a
LEARNING MATERIAL
FOR
APPLIED PHYSICS
(180013)
(FOR 1ST
YEAR)
HARYANA STATE BOARD OF
TECHNICAL EDUCATION
LEARNING TEXT BOOKLET
(PHYSICS)
DIPLOMA 1ST
YEAR
(January, 2019)
Developed By
Haryana State Board of
Technical Education,
Bays 7-12, Sector 4,
Panchkula
In collaboration with
National Institute of Technical
Teachers Training & Research,
Sector-26,
Chandigarh
b
PREFACE
Technical Education in polytechnics plays a very vital role in human resource
development of the country by creating skilled manpower, enhancing industrial productivity
and improving the quality of life. The aim of the polytechnic education in particular is to
create a pool of skill based manpower to support shop floor and field operations as a bridge
between technician and engineers. Moreover, a small and medium scale industry prefers to
employ diploma holders because of their special skills in reading and interpreting drawings,
estimating, costing and billing, supervision, measurement, testing, repair, maintenance etc.
Despite the plethora of opportunities available for the diploma pass-out students, the
unprecedented expansion of the technical education sector in recent years has brought in its
wake questions about the quality of education imparted. Moreover, during the last few years
the students seeking admissions in the polytechnics are coming mainly from the rural
background and face the major challenge of learning and understanding the technical contents
of various subjects in English Language.
The major challenge before the Haryana State Board of Technical Education is to
ensure the quality of a technical education to the stakeholders along its expansion. In order to
meet the challenges and requirement of future technical education manpower, consistent
efforts are made by Haryana State Board of Technical Education to design need based
diploma programmes in collaboration with National Institute of Technical Teachers Training
and Research, Chandigarh as per the new employment opportunities.
The Board undertook the development of the learning material tailored to match the
curriculum content. This learning Text Booklet shall provide a standard material to the
teachers and students to aid their learning and achieving their study goals.
Secretary
HSBTE, Panchkula
c
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The Haryana State Board of Technical Education, Panchkula acknowledges the
assistance and guidance provided by the administrative authorities of the Technical Education
Department and Director, NITTTR for initiating and supporting the development of Learning
Textbook for 1st
year diploma students. The academic inputs from the faculty of the
polytechnics for preparing the contents of Learning Textbook are duly appreciated. Thanks
are also due towards the academic experts from the various Institutes of importance like
NITTTR, Chandigarh; Panjab University, Chandigarh; PEC, Chandigarh etc. for their efforts
in enrichment and finalization of the contents of this learning textbook. Last but not the least
the efforts of the coordinators for overall monitoring, coordinating the development of the
Learning Textbook and organization of workshops are also duly acknowledged.
Joint Secretary
HSBTE, Panchkula
d
TEAM INVOLVED IN DEVELOPMENT OF LEARNING TEXTBOOK
(PHYSICS)
ADMINISTRATIVE AUTHORITIES
1. Sh. Anil Kumar, IAS, Additional Chief Secretary, Technical Education, Govt. of
Haryana-Cum-Chairman, Haryana State Board of Technical Education, Panchkula
2. Sh. A. Sreeniwas, IAS, Director General, Technical Education, Govt. of Haryana
3. Sh. K. K. Kataria, Director, Technical Education-Cum-Secretary, Haryana State Board
of Technical Education, Panchkula
4. Dr. S.S. Pattnaik, Director, National Institute of Technical Teachers Training and
Research, Chandigarh
POLYTECHNIC FACULTY
5. Dr. Bhajan Lal, Lecturer Physics, Govt. Polytechnic for Women, Sirsa
6. Sh. Anil Nain, Lecturer Physics, Govt. Polytechnic, Hisar
7. Smt. Bindu Verma, Lecturer Physics, SJPP Damla
8. Dr. Sarita Maan, Lecturer Physics, Govt. Polytechnic, Ambala City
9. Sh. Arvind Kumar, Lecturer Physics, Govt. Polytechnic, Mandi Adampur
10. Dr. Anoop Kumar, Lecturer Physics, Govt. Polytechnic for Women, Faridabad
ACADEMIC EXPERTS
11. Dr. S.K. Tripathi, Professor of Physics, Physics Department, Panjab University,
Chandigarh
12. Dr. Sanjeev Kumar, Professor, Applied Physics, Applied Science Dept., Punjab
Engineering College, Chandigarh
COORDINATORS
13. Dr. B. C. Choudhary, Professor, Applied Physics, Applied Science Dept., NITTTR,
Chandigarh
14. Sh. R. K. Miglani, Joint Secretary (Academics), Haryana State Board of Technical
Education, Panchkula
15. Dr. Nidhi Aggarwal, Assistant Secretary, Haryana State Board of Technical Education,
Panchkula
16. Sh. Sanjeev Kumar, Assistant Secretary, Haryana State Board of Technical Education,
Panchkula
17. Sh. D. K. Rawat, Principal, Govt. Polytechnic, Narnaul
e
INDEX
CHAPTER
NO.
TITLE PAGE NO.
SYLLABUS i-iii
DISTRIBUTION OF SYLLABUS &MARKS FOR
ASSESSMENTS
iv-vii
1. UNITS AND DIMENSIONS 1-14
2. FORCE AND MOTION 15-24
3. WORK, POWER AND ENERGY 25-30
4. ROTATIONAL MOTION 31-35
5. PROPERTIES OF MATTER 36-40
6. HEAT AND TEMPERATURE 41-46
7. WAVE MOTION AND ITS APPLICATIONS 47-59
8. OPTICS 60-67
9. ELECTROSTATICS 68-76
10. CURRENT ELECTRICITY 77-86
11. ELECTROMAGNETISM 87-91
12. SEMICONDUCTOR PHYSICS 92-100
13. MODERN PHYSICS 101-107
ASSIGNMENTS AND SAMPLE PAPERS 108-112
i
SYLLABUS
1.3 APPLIED PHYSICS
L T P
2 1 2
RATIONALE
Applied physics includes the study of a large number of diverse topics all related to
things that go on in the world around us. It aims to give an understanding of this world both
by observation and by prediction of the way in which objects will behave. Concrete use of
physical principles and analysis in various fields of engineering and technology are given
prominence in the course content.
Note: Teachers should give examples of engineering/technology applications of various
concepts and principles in each topic so that students are able to appreciate learning of
these concepts and principles. In all contents, SI units should be followed. Working in
different sets of units can be taught through relevant software.
LEARNING OUTCOMES
After undergoing this subject, the students will be able to:
 Identify physical quantities, parameters and select their units for use in engineering
solutions.
 Units and dimensions of different physical quantities.
 Represent physical quantities as scalar and vectors.
 Basic laws of motions,
 Analyse and design banking of roads and apply conservation of momentum to explain
recoil of gun etc.
 Define work, energy and power and their units. Solve problems about work and
power
 State the principle of conservation of energy.
 Identify forms of energy, conversion from one form to another.
 Compare and contrast the physical properties associated with linear motion and
rotational motion and give examples of conservation of angular momentum.
 Describe the surface tension phenomenon and its units, applications, effects of
temperature on surface tension.
 Describe the viscosity of liquids.
 Define stress and strain, modulus of elasticity.
 State Hooke‟s law.
 Measure temperature in various processes on different scales (Celsius, Kelvin,
Fahrenheit etc.)
 Distinguish between conduction, convection and radiation.
 Use equipment like, Vernier calliper, Screw Gauge, Spherometer.
 Differentiate between Transverse and Longitudinal, Periodic and Simple Harmonic
Motion.
ii
 Explain the terms: frequency, amplitude, wavelength, wave velocity, frequency and
relation between them.
 Explain various Engineering and Industrial applications of Ultrasonics.
 Apply acoustics principles to various types of buildings to get best sound effect.
 Explain the laws of reflection and refraction of light.
 Explain total internal reflection as applied to optical fibers.
 Define capacitance and its unit and solve simple problems using C=Q/V
 Explain the role of free electrons in insulators, conductors and semiconductors.
 Application of semiconductors as diode, rectifiers, concept of transistors
 Explain electric current as flow of charge, the concept of resistance, heating effect of
current.
 State and apply Ohm's law.
 Calculate the equivalent resistance of a variety of resistor combinations.
 Apply the concept of light amplification in designing of various LASER based
instruments and optical sources.
 Apply the use of optical fibre in Medical field and optical fibre Communication.
 Concept of nanomaterials
LIST OF PRACTICALS (To perform minimum fourteen experiments)
1. To find diameter of solid cylinder using a vernier calliper
2. To find internal diameter and depth of a beaker using a vernier calliper and hence find
its volume.
3. To find the diameter of wire using screw gauge
4. To find thickness of paper using screw gauge.
5. To determine the thickness of glass strip using a spherometer
6. To determine radius of curvature of a given spherical surface by a spherometer.
7. To verify parallelogram law of forces
8. To determine the atmospheric pressure at a place using Fortin‟s barometer
9. To determine force constant of spring using Hooke‟s law
10. Measuring room temperature with the help of thermometer and its conversion in
different scale.
11. To find the time period of a simple pendulum
12. To determine and verify the time period of cantilever
13. To verify ohm‟s laws by plotting a graph between voltage and current.
14. To verify laws of resistances in series combination.
15. To verify laws of resistance in parallel combination.
16. To find resistance of galvanometer by half deflection method
17. To verify laws of reflection of light using mirror.
18. To verify laws of refraction using glass slab.
19. To find the focal length of a concave lens, using a convex lens
20. To study colour coding scheme of resistance.
iii
INSTRUCTIONAL STATREGY
Teacher may use various teaching aids like models, charts, graphs and experimental
kits etc. for imparting effective instructions in the subject. Students need to be exposed to use
of different sets of units and conversion from one unit type to another. Software may be used
to solve problems involving conversion of units. The teacher should explain about field
applications before teaching the basics of mechanics, work, power and energy, rotational
motion, properties of matter etc. to develop proper understanding of the physical
phenomenon. Use of demonstration can make the subject interesting and develop scientific
temper in the students.
MEANS OF ASSESSMENT
 Assignments and quiz/class tests, mid-term and end-term written tests, model/prototype
 Actual laboratory and practical work, exercises and viva-voce
RECOMMENDED BOOKS
1. Text Book of Physics for Class XI (Part-I, Part-II); N.C.E.R.T., Delhi
2. Applied Physics, Vol. I and Vol. II by Dr. H H Lal; TTTI Publications, Tata McGraw
Hill, Delhi
3. Applied Physics - I& II by AS Vasudeva; Modern Publishers, Jalandhar.
4. Applied Physics - I& II by R A Banwait; Eagle Prakashan, Jalandhar.
5. A text book of OPTICS by N Subrahmanyam, Brij Lal and Avadhanulu; S Chand
Publishing, New Delhi.
6. e-books/e-tools/relevant software to be used as recommended by AICTE/ HSBTE/
NITTTR.
7. Nanotechnology: Importance and Applications by M H Fulekar; IK International
Publishing House (P) Ltd., New Delhi.
8. Practical Physics, by C. L. Arora, S Chand Publication
Websites for Reference:
http://swayam.gov.in
iv
Distribution of Syllabus and Marks for Assessments
Section A (20%)
1. Units and Dimensions (08 periods)
1.1 Definition of Physics, physical quantities (fundamental and derived),
1.2 Units: fundamental and derived units,
1.3 Systems of units: CGS, FPS, MKS, SI
1.4 Definition of dimensions;
1.5 Dimensional formulae and SI units of physical quantities (distance,
displacement, area, volume, velocity, acceleration, momentum, force,
impulse, work, power, energy, pressure, surface tension, stress, strain)
1.6 Principle of homogeneity of dimensions
1.7 Dimensional equations, applications of dimensional equations; checking of
correctness of equation, conversion of system of unit (force, work)
2. Force and Motion (08 periods)
2.1 Scalar and vector quantities (definition and examples),
2.2 Addition of vectors, triangle & parallelogram law (statement only),
2.3 Scalar and vector product (statement and formula only)
2.4 Definition of distance, displacement, speed, velocity, acceleration
2.5 Force and its units, concept of resolution of force
2.6 Newton‟s law of motion (statement and examples),
2.7 Linear momentum, conservation of momentum (statement only), Impulse
2.8 Circular motion: definition of angular displacement, angular velocity,
angular acceleration, frequency, time period; relation between linear and
angular velocity.
2.9 Centripetal and centrifugal forces (definition and formula only)
2.10 Application of centripetal force in banking of roads (derivation for angle of
banking)
Section B (20%)
3. Work, Power and Energy (05 periods)
3.1. Work (definition, symbol, formula and SI units)
3.2. Energy (definition and its SI units), examples of transformation of energy.
3.3. Kinetic energy (formula, examples and its derivation)
3.4. Potential energy (formula, examples and its derivation)
3.5. Law of conservation of mechanical energy for freely falling bodies (with
derivation)
3.6. Power (definition, formula and units)
3.7. Simple numerical problems based on formula of power
4 Rotational Motion (03 periods)
4.1 Rotational motion with examples
v
4.2 Definition of torque and angular momentum and their examples
4.3 Conservation of angular momentum (quantitative) and its examples
4.4 Moment of inertia and its physical significance, radius of gyration (definition,
derivation and formula).
5. Properties of Matter (06 periods)
5.1 Definition of elasticity, deforming force, restoring force, example of Elastic
and plastic body,
5.2 Definition of stress and strain with their types,
5.3 Hooke‟s law, modulus of elasticity (Young‟s, bulk modulus and shear)
5.4 Pressure (definition, formula, unit), Pascals Law
5.5 Surface tension: definition, its units, applications of surface tension, effect of
temperature on Surface tension
5.6 Viscosity: definition, units, effect of temperature on viscosity
5.7 Fluid motion, stream line and turbulent flow.
Section C (60%)
6. Heat and Temperature (04 periods)
6.1 Definition of heat and temperature (on the basis of kinetic theory),
6.2 Difference between heat and temperature
6.3 Principles of measurement of temperature.
6.4 Modes of transfer of heat (conduction, convection and radiation with
examples).
6.5 Properties of heat radiation
6.6 Different scales of temperature and their relationship
7. Wave motion and its applications (07 periods)
7.1 Wave motion, transverse and longitudinal wave motion with examples, Terms
used in wave motion like displacement, amplitude, time period, frequency,
wavelength, wave velocity; relationship among wave velocity, frequency and
wave length .
7.2 Simple harmonic motion (SHM): definition, examples
7.3 Cantilever (definition, formula of time period (without derivation).
7.4 Free, forced and resonant vibrations with examples
7.5 Acoustics of buildings– reverberation, reverberation time, echo, noise, coefficient
of absorption of sound, methods to control reverberation time.
7.6 Ultrasonics: Introduction and their engineering applications (cold welding,
drilling, SONAR)
8. Optics (03 periods)
8.1. Reflection and refraction with laws, refractive index, lens formula (no derivation),
power of lens (related numerical problems).
vi
8.2. Total internal reflection and its applications, critical angle and conditions for total
internal reflection
8.3. Microscope, telescope (definition)
8.4. Uses of microscope and telescope.
9. Electrostatics (06 Periods)
9.1. Electric charge, unit of charge, conservation of charge.
9.2. Coulombs law of electrostatics,
9.3. Electric field, electric lines of force (definition and properties), electric field
intensity due to a point charge.
9.4. Definition of electric flux, Gauss law (Statement and derivation)
9.5. Capacitor and capacitance (with formula and units), series and parallel
combination of capacitors (simple numerical problems)
10. Current Electricity (06 Periods)
10.1 Electric Current and its unit, direct and alternating current,
10.2 Resistance, specific resistance and conductance (definition and units)
10.3 Series and parallel combination of resistances.
10.4 Ohm‟s law (statement and formula),
10.5 Heating effect of current, electric power and its units
10.6 Kirchhoff‟s laws (statement and formula)
11 Electromagnetism (03 periods)
11.1. Introduction to magnetism, types of magnetic materials. Dia, para and
ferromagnetic materials with examples.
11.2. Magnetic field, magnetic intensity, magnetic lines of force, magnetic flux and
their units
11.3. Electromagnetic induction (definition)
12. Semiconductor physics (07 periods)
12.1. Definition of energy level, energy bands,
12.2. Types of materials (insulator, semiconductor, conductor) with examples,
12.3. Intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors, p-n junction diode and its V-I
characteristics
12.4. Diode as rectifier – half wave and full wave rectifier (centre tap only)
12.5. Semiconductor transistor; pnp and npn (Introduction only), symbol.
13. Modern Physics (06 periods)
13.1. Lasers: full form, principle, spontaneous emission, stimulated emission,
population inversion, engineering and medical applications of lasers.
13.2. Fibre optics: Introduction to optical fibers (definition, parts), applications of
optical fibers in different fields.
13.3. Introduction to nanotechnology (definition of nanomaterials with examples)
and its applications.
vii
DISTRIBUTION OF MARKS
Section Unit Time Allotted
(Periods)
Marks Allotted (%)
A
(20 Marks)
1 8 10
2 8 10
B
(20 Marks)
3 5 8
4 3 4
5 6 8
C
(60 Marks)
6 4 6
7 7 10
8 3 5
9 6 9
10 6 8
11 3 4
12 7 9
13 6 9
Total 72 100
1
Chapter 1
UNITS AND DIMENSIONS
Learning objective: After going through this chapter, students will be able to;
- Understand physical quantities, fundamental and derived;
- Describe different systems of units;
- Define dimensions and formulate dimensional formulae;
- Write dimensional equations and apply these to verify various formulations.
-
1.1 DEFINITION OF PHYSICS AND PHYSICAL QUANTITIES
Physics: Physics is the branch of science, which deals with the study of nature and natural
phenomena. The subject matter of physics includes heat, light, sound, electricity, magnetism
and the structure of atoms.
For designing a law of physics, a scientific method is followed which includes the
verifications with experiments. The physics, attempts are made to measure the quantities with
the best accuracy. Thus, physics can also be defined as science of measurement.
Applied Physics is the application of the Physics to help human beings and solving
their problem, it is usually considered as a bridge between Physics & Engineering.
Physical Quantities: All quantities that can be measured are called physical quantities.
For example: Distance, Speed, Mass, Force etc.
Types of Physical Quantity:
Fundamental Quantity: The quantity which is independent of other physical quantities. In
mechanics, mass, length and time are called fundamental quantities.
Derived Quantity: The quantity which is derived from the fundamental quantities is a
derived quantity. For example area, speed etc.
1.2 UNITS: FUNDAMENTAL AND DERIVED UNITS
Measurement: In our daily life, we need to express and compare the magnitude of different
quantities; this can be done only by measuring them.
Measurement is the comparison of an unknown physical quantity with a known fixed physical
quantity.
Unit: The known fixed physical quantity is called unit.
or
The quantity used as standard for measurement is called unit.
For example, when we say that length of the class room is 8 metre, we compare the length of
class room with standard quantity of length called metre.
Length of class room = 8 metre
Q = nu
2
Physical Quantity = Numerical value × unit
Q = Physical Quantity
n = Numerical value
u = Standard unit
e.g. Mass of stool = 15 kg
Mass = Physical quantity
15 = Numerical value
kg = Standard unit
Means mass of stool is 15 times of known quantity i.e. kg.
Characteristics of Standard Unit: A unit selected for measuring a physical quantity should
have the following properties
(i) It should be well defined i.e. its concept should be clear.
(ii) It should not change with change in physical conditions like temperature,
pressure, stress etc.
(iii) It should be suitable in size; neither too large nor too small.
(iv) It should not change with place or time.
(v) It should be reproducible.
(vi) It should be internationally accepted.
Classification of Units: Units can be classified into two categories.
Fundamental units: Units of fundamental physical quantities are called Fundamental units.
Physical Quantity Fundamental unit
Mass kg, gram, pound
Length metre, centimetre, foot
Time second
Derived units: the units of derived physical quantity are called as derived units.
For example units of area, speed etc.
Area = Length  Breadth
= Length  Length
= (Length)2
Speed =Distance / Time
=Length / Time
1.3 SYSTEMS OF UNITS: CGS, FPS, MKS, SI
For measurement of physical quantities, the following systems are commonly used:-
(i) C.G.S system: In this system, the unit of length, mass and time are centimetre, gram
and second, respectively.
(ii) F.P.S system: In this system, the unit of length, mass and time are foot, pound and
second, respectively.
(iii) M.K.S: In this system, the unit of length, mass and time are metre, kilogram and
second, respectively.
3
(iv) S.I System: This system is an improved and extended version of M.K.S system of
units. It is called international system of unit.
With the development of science & technology, the three fundamental quantities like
mass, length & time were not sufficient as many other quantities like electric current, heat
etc. were introduced. Therefore, more fundamental units in addition to the units of mass,
length and time are required.
Thus, MKS system was modified with addition of four other fundamental quantities
and two supplementary quantities.
Table of Fundamental Units
Sr. No. Name of Physical Quantity Unit Symbol
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Length
Mass
Time
Temperature
Electric Current
Luminous Intensity
Quantity of Matter
metre
kilogram
second
kelvin
ampere
candela
mole
m
kg
s
K
A
cd
mol
Table of Supplementary unit
Sr. No Name of Physical Quantity Unit Symbol
1
2
Plane angle
Solid angle
radian
steradian
rad
sr
Advantage of S.I. system:
(i) It is coherent system of unit i.e. the derived units of a physical quantity are easily
obtained by multiplication or division of fundamental units.
(ii) It is a rational system of units i.e. it uses only one unit for one physical quantity e.g.
joule (J) is unit for all types of energies (heat, light, mechanical).
(iii) It is metric system of units i.e. it‟s multiples & submultiples can be expressed in
power of 10.
(iv) It gives due representation to all branches of physics.
Definition of Basic and Supplementary Units of S.I. system
1. Metre (m): one metre is the length of the path travelled by light in vacuum during a time
interval of 1/299 792 458 of a second.
2. Kilogram (kg) : one kilogram is the mass of the platinum-iridium prototype which was
approved by the Conférence Générale des Poids et Mesures, held in Paris in 1889, and
kept by the Bureau International des Poids et Mesures.
4
3. Second (s): one second is the duration of 9192631770 periods of the radiation
corresponding to the transition between two hyperfine levels of the ground state of
Cesium-133 atom.
4. Ampere (A) : The ampere is the intensity of a constant current which, if maintained in two
straight parallel conductors of infinite length, of negligible circular cross-section, and
placed 1 metre apart in vacuum, would produce between these conductors a force equal
to 2  10-7
newton per metre of length.
5. Kelvin (K): Kelvin is the fraction 1/273.16 of the thermodynamic temperature of the triple
point of water.
6. Candela (cd): The candela is the luminous intensity, in a given direction, of a source that
emits monochromatic radiation of frequency 540 x 1012
hertz and that has a radiant
intensity in that direction of 1/683 watt per steradian.
7. Mole (mol): The mole is the amount of substance of a system which contains as many
elementary entities as there are atoms in 0.012 kilogram of Carbon-12.
Supplementary units:
1. Radian (rad): It is supplementary unit of plane angle. It is the plane angle subtended
at the centre of a circle by an arc of the circle equal to the radius of the circle. It is
denoted by 𝜃.
𝜃 = l / r; 𝑙 is length of the arc and 𝑟 is radius of the circle
2. Steradian (sr): It is supplementary unit of solid angle. It is the angle subtended at the
centre of a sphere by a surface area of the sphere having magnitude equal to the
square of the radius of the sphere. It is denoted by Ω.
Ω = ∆s / r2
SOME IMPORTANT ABBREVIATIONS
Symbol Prefix Multiplier Symbol Prefix Multiplier
d
c
m
µ
n
p
f
a
deci
centi
milli
micro
nano
pico
femto
atto
10-1
10-2
10-3
10-6
10-9
10-12
10-15
10-18
da
h
k
M
G
T
P
E
deca
hecto
kilo
mega
giga
tera
pecta
exa
101
102
103
106
109
1012
1015
1018
5
Some Important Units of Length:
1 micron = 10–6
m = 10–4
cm
1 angstrom = 1Å = 10–10
m = 10–8
cm
1 fermi = 1 fm = 10–15
m
1 Light year = 1 ly = 9.46 x 1015
m
1 Parsec = 1pc = 3.26 light year
Some conversion factor of mass:
1 kilogram = 2.2046 pound
1 pound = 453.6 gram
1 kilogram = 1000 gram
1 milligram = 1/1000 gram = 10-3
gram
1 centigram = 1/100 gram = 10-2
gram
1 decigram = 1/10 gram
1 quintal = 100 kg
1 metric ton = 1000 kilogram
1.4 DEFINITION OF DIMENSIONS
Dimensions: The powers, to which the fundamental units of mass (M), length (L) and
time (T) are raised, which include their nature and not their magnitude are called
dimensions of a physical quantity.
For example Area = Length x Breadth
= [ L1
] × [L1
] = [L2
] = [M0
L2
T0
]
Here the powers (0, 2, 0) of fundamental units are called dimensions of area in mass,
length and time respectively.
e.g. Density = mass/volume
= [M]/[L3
]
= [ M1
L-3
T0
]
1.5 DIMENSIONAL FORMULAE AND SI UNITS OF PHYSICAL QUANTITIES
Dimensional Formula: An expression along with power of mass, length & time which
indicates how physical quantity depends upon fundamental physical quantity.
e.g. Speed = Distance/Time
= [L1
]/[T1
] =[M0
L1
T-1
]
It tells us that speed depends upon L & T and it does not depend upon M.
Dimensional Equation: An equation obtained by equating the physical quantity with its
dimensional formula is called dimensional equation.
e.g. the dimensional equation of area, density & velocity are given as under-
Area = [M0
L2
T0
]
Density = [M1
L-3
T0
]
Velocity = [M0
L1
T-1
]
6
Dimensional formula & SI unit of Physical Quantities
Sr.
No.
Physical
Quantity
Mathematical
Formula
Dimensional
formula
S.I unit
1 Force Mass × Acceleration [M1
L1
T-2
] newton (N)
2 Work Force × Distance [M1
L2
T-2
] joule (J)
3 Power Work / Time [M1
L2
T-3
] watt (W)
4 Energy (all form) Stored work [M1
L2
T-2
] joule (J)
5 Pressure, Stress Force/Area [M1
L-1
T-2
] Nm-2
6 Momentum Mass × Velocity [M1
L1
T-1
] kgms-1
7 Moment of force Force × Distance [M1
L2
T-2
] Nm
8 Impulse Force × Time [M1
L1
T-1
] Ns
9 Strain Change in dimension
/ Original dimension
[M0
L0
T0
] No unit
10 Modulus of
elasticity
Stress / Strain [M1
L-1
T-2
] Nm-2
11 Surface energy Energy / Area [M1
L0
T-2
] joule/m2
12 Surface Tension Force / Length [M1
L0
T-2
] N/m
13 Co-efficient of
viscosity
Force × Distance/
Area × Velocity
[M1
L-1
T-1
] N/m2
14 Moment of
inertia
Mass × (radius of
gyration)2
[M1
L2
T0
] kg-m2
15 Angular Velocity Angle / Time [M0
L0
T-1
] rad per sec
16 Frequency 1/Time period [M0
L0
T-1
] hertz (Hz)
17 Area Length × Breadth [M0
L2
T0
] m2
18 Volume Length × Breadth ×
Height
[M0
L3
T0
] m3
19 Density Mass/ Volume [M1
L-3
T0
] kg/m3
20 Speed or velocity Distance/ Time [M0
L1
T-1
] m/s
21 Acceleration Velocity/Time [M0
L1
T-2
] m/s2
22 Pressure Force/Area [M1
L-1
T-2
] N/m2
7
Classification of Physical Quantities on the basis of dimensional analysis
1. Dimensional Constant: These are the physical quantities which possess dimensions and
have constant (fixed) value.
e.g. Planck‟s constant, gas constant, universal gravitational constant etc.
2. Dimensional Variable: These are the physical quantities which possess dimensions but do
not have fixed value.
e.g. velocity, acceleration, force etc.
3. Dimensionless Constant: These are the physical quantities which do not possess
dimensions but have constant (fixed) value.
e.g. e, π, numbers like 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, etc.
4. Dimensionless Variable: These are the physical quantities which do not possess
dimensions and have variable value.
e.g. angle, strain, specific gravity etc.
Example1 Derive the dimensional formula of following Quantity & write down their
dimensions.
(i) Density (ii) Power
(iii) Co-efficient of viscosity (iv) Angle
Sol. (i) Density = mass/volume
= [M]/[L3
] = [M1
L-3
T0
]
(ii) Power = Work/Time
= Force x Distance/Time
= [M1
L1
T-2
] x [L]/[T]
= [M1
L2
T-3
]
(iii) Co-efficient of viscosity =
= [M] x [LT-2
] x [L] [T]/[L2
] x [L]
= [M1
L-1
T-1
]
(v) Angle = arc (length)/radius (length)
= [L]/[L]
= [M0
L0
T0
] = No dimension
Example2 Explain which of the following pair of physical quantities have the same
dimension:
(i) Work &Power (ii) Stress & Pressure (iii) Momentum &Impulse
Sol. (i) Dimension of work = force x distance = [M1
L2
T-2
]
Force x Distance
Area x Velocity
Mass x Acceleration x Distance x time
length x length x Displacement
8
Dimension of power = work / time = [M1
L2
T-3
]
Work and Power have not the same dimensions.
(ii) Dimension of stress = force / area = [M1
L1
T-2
]/[L2
] = [M1
L-1
T-2
]
Dimension of pressure = force / area = [M1
L1
T-2
]/[L2
] = [M1
L-1
T-2
]
Stress and pressure have the same dimension.
(iii) Dimension of momentum = mass x velocity= [M1
L1
T-1
]
Dimension of impulse = force x time = [M1
L1
T-1
]
Momentum and impulse have the same dimension.
1.6 PRINCIPLE OF HOMOGENEITY OF DIMENSIONS
It states that the dimensions of all the terms on both sides of an equation must be the
same. According to the principle of homogeneity, the comparison, addition & subtraction of
all physical quantities is possible only if they are of the same nature i.e., they have the same
dimensions.
If the power of M, L and T on two sides of the given equation are same, then the
physical equation is correct otherwise not. Therefore, this principle is very helpful to check
the correctness of a physical equation.
Example: A physical relation must be dimensionally homogeneous, i.e., all the terms on both
sides of the equation must have the same dimensions.
In the equation, S = ut + ½ at2
The length (S) has been equated to velocity (u) & time (t), which at first seems to be
meaningless, But if this equation is dimensionally homogeneous, i.e., the dimensions of all
the terms on both sides are the same, then it has physical meaning.
Now, dimensions of various quantities in the equation are:
Distance, S = [L1
]
Velocity, u = [L1
T-1
]
Time, t = [T1
]
Acceleration, a = [L1
T-2
]
½ is a constant and has no dimensions.
Thus, the dimensions of the term on L.H.S. is S=[L1
] and
Dimensions of terms on R.H.S=
ut + ½ at2
= [L1
T-1
] [T1
] + [L1
T-2
] [T2
] = [L1
] + [L1
]
Here, the dimensions of all the terms on both sides of the equation are the same.
Therefore, the equation is dimensionally homogeneous.
1.7 DIMENSIONAL EQUATIONS, APPLICATIONS OF DIMENSIONAL
EQUATIONS
Dimensional Analysis: A careful examination of the dimensions of various quantities
involved in a physical relation is called dimensional analysis. The analysis of the dimensions
of a physical quantity is of great help to us in a number of ways as discussed under the uses
of dimensional equations.
9
Uses of dimensional equation: The principle of homogeneity & dimensional analysis has put
to the following uses:
(i) Checking the correctness of physical equation.
(ii) To convert a physical quantity from one system of units into another.
(iii) To derive relation among various physical quantities.
1. To check the correctness of Physical relations: According to principle of Homogeneity
of dimensions, a physical relation or equation is correct, if the dimensions of all the terms
on both sides of the equation are the same. If the dimension of even one term differs from
those of others, the equation is not correct.
Example 3 Check the correctness of the following formulae by dimensional analysis.
(i) 𝐹 = 𝑚v2
/r (ii) 2
t l g


Where all the letters have their usual meanings
Sol. 𝑭 = 𝒎𝐯𝟐
/𝐫
Dimensions of the term on L.H.S
Force, F = [M1
L1
T-2
]
Dimensions of the term on R.H.S
𝒎𝐯𝟐
/𝐫 = [M1
][L1
T-1
]2
/ [L]
= [M1
L2
T-2
]/ [L]
= [M1
L1
T-2
]
The dimensions of the term on the L.H.S are equal to the dimensions of the term on
R.H.S. Therefore, the relation is correct.
(ii) 2
t l g


Here, Dimension of term on L.H.S
t = [T1
] = [M0
L0
T1
]
Dimensions of terms on R.H.S
Dimension of length = [L1
]
Dimension of g (acc. due to gravity) = [L1
T-2
]
2𝜋 being constant have no dimensions.
Hence, the dimensions of terms 2
t l g

 on R.H.S
= (L1
/ L1
T-2
])1/2
= [T1
] = [M0
L0
T1
]
Thus, the dimensions of the terms on both sides of the relation are the same i.e.,
[M0
L0
T1
]. Therefore, the relation is correct.
Example 4 Check the correctness of the following equation on the basis of dimensional
analysis, v
E
d
 . Here v is the velocity of sound, E is the elasticity and d is the density
of the medium.
Sol. Here, Dimension of the term on L.H.S
v = [M0
L1
T-1
]
10
Dimension of elasticity, E = [M1
L-1
T-2
]
& Dimension of density, d = [M1
L-3
T0
]
Therefore, dimensions of the terms on R.H.S
v
E
d
 = [M1
L-1
T-2
/ M1
L-1
T-2
]1/2
= [M0
L1
T-1
]
Thus, dimensions on both sides are the same, hence the equation is correct.
Example 5 Using Principle of Homogeneity of dimensions, check the correctness of
equation, h = 2Td /rgcos𝜃.
Sol. The given formula is, h = 2Td /rgcos𝜃.
Dimension of term on L.H.S
Height (h) = [M0
L1
T0
]
Dimensions of terms on R.H.S
T= surface tension = [M1
L0
T-2
]
d= density = [M1
L-3
T0
]
r = radius = [M0
L1
T0
]
g = acc. due to gravity = [M0
L1
T-2
]
cos𝜃 = [M0
L0
T0
] = no dimensions
So, the dimensions of 2Td/rgcos𝜃 = [M1
L0
T-2
] x [M1
L-3
T0
] / [M0
L1
T0
] x [M0
L1
T-2
]
= [M2
L-5
T0
]
Dimensions of terms on L.H.S are not equal to dimensions on R.H.S. Hence, formula is
not correct.
Example 6 Check the accuracy of the following relations:
(i) E = mgh + ½ mv2
; (ii) v3
-u2
= 2as2
.
Sol. (i) E = mgh + ½ mv2
Here, dimensions of the term on L.H.S.
Energy, E = [M1
L2
T-2
]
Dimensions of the terms on R.H.S,
Dimensions of the term, mgh = [M] ×[LT-2
] × [L] = [M1
L2
T-2
]
Dimensions of the term, ½ mv2
= [M] × [LT-1
]2
= [M1
L2
T-2
]
Thus, dimensions of all the terms on both sides of the relation are same; therefore, the
relation is correct.
(ii) The given relation is,
v3
-u2
= 2as2
Dimensions of the terms on L.H.S
v3
= [M0
] × [LT-1
]3
= [M0
L3
T-3
]
u2
= [M0
] × [LT-1
]2
= [M0
L2
T-2
]
Dimensions of the terms on R.H.S
2as2
= [M0
] × [LT-2
] ×[L]2
= [M0
L3
T-2
]
Substituting the dimensions in the relations, v3
-u2
= 2as2
11
We get, [M0
L3
T-3
] - [M0
L2
T-2
] = [M0
L3
T-2
]
The dimensions of all the terms on both sides are not same; therefore, the relation is not
correct.
Example 7 The velocity of a particle is given in terms of time t by the equation
v = at +
b
t c

What are the dimensions of a, b and c?
Sol. Dimensional formula for L.H.S
V = [L1
T-1
]
In the R.H.S dimensional formula of at
[T] = [L1
T-1
]
a = [LT-1
] / [T-1
] = [L1
T-2
]
t +c = time, c has dimensions of time and hence is added in t.
Dimensions of t + c is [T]
Now,
b
t c

= v
b = v (t + c) = [LT-1
] [T] = [L]
There dimensions of a = [L1
T-2
], dimensions of b = [L] and that of c = [T]
Example 8 In the gas equation (P + a/v2
) (v – b) = RT, where T is the absolute
temperature, P is pressure and v is volume of gas. What are dimensions of a and b?
Sol. Like quantities are added or subtracted from each other i.e.
(P + a/v2
) has dimensions of pressure = [ML-1
T-2
]
Hence, a/v2
will be dimensions of pressure = [ML-1
T-2
]
a = [ML-1
T-2
] [volume]2
= [ML-1
T-2
] [L3
]2
a = [ML-1
T-2
] [L6
] = [ML5
T-2
]
Dimensions of a = [ML5
T-2
]
(v – b) have dimensions of volume i.e.,
b will have dimensions of volume i.e., [L3
]
or [M0
L3
T0
]
2. To convert a physical quantity from one system of units into another.
Physical quantity can be expressed as
Q = nu
Let n1u1 represent the numerical value and unit of a physical quantity in one system and
n2u2 in the other system.
If for a physical quantity Q; M1L1T1be the fundamental unit in one system and
M2L2T2 be fundamental unit of the other system and dimensions in mass, length and time
in each system can be respectively a,b,c.
u1 = [ M1
a
L1
b
T1
c
]
u2 = [ M2
a
L2
b
T2
c
]
12
As we know
n1u1 = n2u2
n2 =n1u1/u2
1 1 1
2 1
2 2 2
a b c
a b c
M L T
n n
M L T
 
 

 
 
1 1 1
2 1
2 2 2
a b c
M L T
n n
M L T
 
     
 
      
 
     
 
While applying the above relations the system of unit as first system in which numerical
value of physical quantity is given and the other as second system
Thus knowing [M1L1T1], [M2L2T2] a, b, c and n1, we can calculate n2.
Example 9 Convert a force of 1 newton to dyne.
Sol. To convert the force from MKS system to CGS system, we need the equation
Q = n1u1 = n2u2
Thus 1 1
2
2
n u
n
u

Here n1 = 1, u1 = 1N, u2 = dyne
2
1 1 1
2 1 2
2 2 2
M LT
n n
M L T


 
 

 
 
2
1 1 1
2 1
2 2 2
M L T
n n
M L T

   
    
   
2
2 1
kg m s
n n
gm cm s

   
    
  
 
2
2 1
1000 100
gm cm s
n n
gm cm s

   
    
  
 
2 1(1000)(100)
n 
5
2 10
n 
Thus 1N= 5
10 dynes.
Example 10 Convert work of 1 erg into joule.
Sol: Here we need to convert work from CGS system to MKS system
Thus in the equation
1 1
2
2
n u
n
u

n1 =1
u1 = erg (CGS unit of work)
u2 = joule (SI unit of work)
1 1
2
2
n u
n
u

13
2 2
1 1 1
2 1 2 2
2 2 2
M L T
n n
M L T



2 2
1 1 1
2 1
2 2 2
M L T
n n
M L T

    
     
    
2 2
2 1
gm cm s
n n
kg m s

    
     
   
 
2 2
2 1
1000 100
gm cm s
n n
gm cm s

    
     
   
 
3 2 2
2 1(10 )(10 )
n  
 7
2 10
n 

Thus, 1 erg = 7
10
joule.
Limitations of Dimensional Equation: The method of dimensions has the following
limitations:
1. It does not help us to find the value of dimensionless constants involved in various
physical relations. The values, of such constants have to be determined by some
experiments or mathematical investigations.
2. This method fails to derive formula of a physical quantity which depends upon more than
three factors. Because only three equations are obtained by comparing the powers of M, L
and T.
3. It fails to derive relations of quantities involving exponential and trigonometric functions.
4. The method cannot be directly applied to derive relations which contain more than one
terms on one side or both sides of the equation, such as v= u + at or s = ut + ½ at2
etc.
However, such relations can be derived indirectly.
5. A dimensionally correct relation may not be true physical relation because the
dimensional equality is not sufficient for the correctness of a given physical relation.
* * * * * *
14
EXERCISES
Fill in the blanks:
1. The dimensional formula for coefficient of friction is ……………..
2. The dimensional formula for Modulus of elasticity is ……………..
3. 105
fermi is equal to ……………..angstrom.
4. The unit of angular velocity is…………………….
5. The unit for measuring the luminous intensity is ………………..
6. The displacement of particle moving along x-axis with respect to time is x=at+bt2
-ct3
.
The dimension of c is ……………..
Short Answer Questions
1. Define Physics.
2. Define physical quantity.
3. Differentiate between fundamental and derived unit.
4. Write full form of the following system of units
(i) CGS (ii) FPS (iii) MKS
5. Write definition of Dimensions.
6. What is the suitable unit for measuring distance between sun and earth?
7. Write the dimensional formula of the following physical quantity -
(i) Momentum (ii) Power (iii) Surface Tension (iv) Strain v) density
8. State principle of Homogeneity of Dimensions.
9. Write the S.I & C.G.S units of the following physical quantities-
(a) Force (b) Work
10. Write any three uses of dimensions.
Long Answer Questions
1. Check the correctness of the relation 𝜆 = h /mv; where 𝜆 is wavelength, h- Planck‟s
constant, m is mass of the particle and v - velocity of the particle.
2. Explain different types of system of units.
3. Convert 1 dyne to newton.
4. Check the correctness of the following relation by using method of dimensions
(i) v = u + at
(ii) F = mv / r2
(iii) v2
– u2
= 2as
5. State any four limitations of dimensional analysis.
6. Convert an acceleration of 100 m/s2
into km/h2
.
15
Chapter 2
FORCE AND MOTION
Learning objective: After going through this chapter, students will be able to
- Understand scalar and vector quantities, addition of vectors, scalar and vector
products etc.
- State and apply Newton’s laws of motion.
- Describe linear momentum, circular motion, application of centripetal force.
2.1 SCALAR AND VECTOR QUANTITIES
Scalar Quantities:
Scalar quantities are those quantities which have only magnitude but no direction.
Examples: Mass, length, density, volume, energy, temperature, distance, speed,
electric charge, current, electric potential etc.
Vector Quantities:
Vector quantities are those quantities which are having both magnitude as well as
direction.
Examples: Displacement, velocity, acceleration, force, electric intensity, magnetic
intensity etc.
Representation of Vector: A vector is represented by a straight line with an arrow head.
Here, the length of the line represents the magnitude and arrow head gives the direction of
vector.
Types of Vectors
Negative Vectors: The negative of a vector is defined as another vector having same
magnitude but opposite in direction.
i. e. any vector 𝐴 and its negative vector [–𝐴] are shown in Fig.2.2.
Equal Vector: Two or more vectors are said to be equal, if they have same magnitude and
same direction. If 𝐴 and 𝐵 are two equal vectors then
Figure: 2.1
Figure: 2.2 Figure: 2.3
16
Unit Vector: A vector divided by its magnitude is called a unit vector. It has a magnitude one
unit and direction same as the direction of given vector. It is denoted by 𝐴 (A cap).
𝐴 =
𝐴
𝐴
Collinear Vectors: Two or more vectors having equal or unequal magnitudes, but having
same direction are called collinear vectors
Zero Vector: A vector having zero magnitude and arbitrary direction (be not fixed) is called
zero vector. It is denoted by O.
2.2 LAWS OF ADDITION OF VECTORS
(i) Triangle law of vector addition.
Magnitude of the resultant is given by
𝑅 = 𝐴2 + 𝐵2 + 2𝐴𝐵 𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝜃
And direction of the resultant is given by
𝑡𝑎𝑛 𝛽 =
𝐵 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃
𝐴 + 𝐵 𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝜃
(ii) Parallelogram (||gm) law of vectors addition:
It states that if two vectors, acting simultaneously at a point, can have represented both in
magnitude and direction by the two adjacent sides of a parallelogram, the resultant is represented
by the diagonal of the parallelogram passing through that point (Fig. 2.6).
Magnitude of the resultant is given by
𝑅 = 𝑃2 + 𝑄2 + 2𝑃𝑄 𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝜃
And direction of the resultant is given by
𝑡𝑎𝑛 𝜙 =
𝑄 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃
𝑃 + 𝑄 𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝜃
It two vectors can be represented in magnitude
and direction by the two sides of a triangle taken in the
same order, then the resultant is represented in
magnitude and direction, by third side of the triangle
taken in the opposite order (Fig. 2.5).
Figure: 2.4
Figure: 2.5
Figure: 2.6
17
2.3 SCALAR AND VECTOR PRODUCT
Multiplication of Vectors
(i) Scalar (or dot) Product: of two vectors is defined as the product of magnitude of two
vectors and the cosine of the smaller angle between them. The dot product of vectors 𝐴 and 𝐵
can be represented as
(ii) Vector (or Cross) Product: of two vectors is defined as a vector having a magnitude
equal to the product of the magnitudes of the two vectors and the sine of the angle between them
and is in the direction perpendicular to the plane containing the two vectors.
Thus, the vector product of two vectors A and B is equal to
𝐴 × 𝐵 = 𝐴𝐵 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝜃 𝑛
2.4 DEFINITION OF DISTANCE, DISPLACEMENT, SPEED, VELOCITY,
ACCELERATION
Distance: The path covered by an object during it motion is called distance. Distance is a
scalar quantity. SI unit is metre (m).
Displacement: The shortest distance between the two points is called displacement. It is a
vector quantity.
SI unit is metre.
Dimension formula: [L]
Speed: The rate of change of distance is called speed. Speed is a scalar quantity.
distance
time
speed 
Unit: ms-1
.
Linear Velocity: The time rate of change of displacement.
𝑣 =
𝑐ℎ𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑒 𝑖𝑛 𝑑𝑖𝑠𝑝𝑙𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑡
𝑡𝑖𝑚𝑒
Units of Velocity: ms-1
Dimension formula = [M0
L1
T-1
]
Acceleration: The change in velocity per unit time. i.e. the time rate of change of velocity.
𝑎 =
𝐶ℎ𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑒 𝑖𝑛 𝑣𝑒𝑙𝑜𝑐𝑖𝑡𝑦
𝑡𝑖𝑚𝑒
Figure: 2.7
18
If the velocity increases with time, the acceleration „a‟ is positive. If the velocity decreases
with time, the acceleration „a‟ is negative. Negative acceleration is also known as
retardation.
Units of acceleration:
C.G.S. unit is cm/s2
(cms-2
) and the SI unit is m/s2
(ms-2
).
Dimension formula = [M0
L1
T-2
]
2.5 FORCE
Force: Force is an agent that produces acceleration in the body on which it acts.
Or
It is a push or a pull which change or tends to change the position of the body at rest or in
uniform motion. Force is a vector quantity.
For example,
(i) To move a football, we have to exert a push i.e., kick on the football
(ii) To stop football or a body moving with same velocity, we have to apply push in a
direction opposite to the direction of the body.
SI unit is newton.
Dimension formula: [MLT-2
]
Concept of Resolution of a Force
The phenomenon of breaking a given force into two or more forces in different
directions is known as resolution of force. The forces obtained on splitting the given force are
called components of the given force.
If these are at right angles to each other, then these components are called
rectangular components.
Let a force F be represented
by a line OP. Let OB (or Fx)
is component of F along x-
axis and OC (or Fy) is
component along y-axis (Fig.
2.8).
Let force F makes an angle
θ with x-axis.
In Δ OPB
sin𝜃 =
OB
OP
or PB = OP sin𝜃
Fy = F sin𝜃
cos𝜃 =
OB
OP
OB = OP cos𝜃
Figure: 2.8
19
Fx = F cos𝜃
Vector 𝐹 = 𝐹
𝑥 + 𝐹
𝑦
So, resultant: 𝐹 = 𝐹
𝑥
2 + 𝐹
𝑦
2
2.6 NEWTON'S LAWS OF MOTION
Sir Isaac Newton gave three fundamental laws. These laws are called Newton's laws of
motion. These are
Newton’s First Law: It states that everybody continues in its state of rest or of uniform
motion in a straight line until some external force is applied on it.
For example, the book lying on a table will not move at its own. It does not change its
position from the state of rest until no external force is applied on it.
Newton’s Second law: The rate of change of momentum of a body is directly proportional
to the applied force and the change takes place in the direction of force applied.
Or
Acceleration produced in a body is directly proportional to force applied.
Let us consider a body of mass m is moving with a velocity u. Let a force F be applied so
that its
velocity changes from u to v in t second.
Initial momentum = mu
Final momentum after time t second = mv
Total change in momentum = mv-mu.
Thus, the rate of change of momentum will be
𝑚𝑣 − 𝑚𝑢
𝑡
From Newton's second law
F
mv mu
t

 or
( )
F
m v m
t


but
v u
t

=
Change in velocity
time
= acceleration (a)
Hence, we have
F  ma
or F = k ma
Where k is constant of proportionality, for convenience let k = 1.
Then F = ma
Units of force:
One dyne is that much force which produces an acceleration of 1cm/s2
in a mass of 1
gm.
1 dyne = 1 gm x 1 cm/s2
= 1 gm cm s-2
20
One newton is that much force which produces an acceleration of 1 m/s2
in a mass of
1kg.
Using F = ma
1N = 1 kg x 1 m/s2
or = 1 kgm/s2
IN =1000 gm×100 cm/s2
= 105
dyne
Newton’s Third law: it state that to every action there is an equal and opposite reaction or
action and reaction are equal and opposite.
When a body exerts a force on another body, the other body also exerts an equal force
on the first body but in opposite direction.
From Newton's third law these forces always occur in pairs. If two bodies A and B applies
force on each other, then
FAB (force on A by B) = -FBA (force on B by A)
2.7 LINEAR MOMENTUM, CONSERVATION OF MOMENTUM, IMPULSE
Linear Momentum (p): The quantity of motion contained in the body is linear
momentum. It is given by product of mass and the velocity of the body. It is a vector and its
direction is the same as the direction of the velocity.
Let m be the mass and v is the velocity of a body at some instant, then its linear
momentum is given by p = mv
Example, a fast-moving cricket ball has more momentum in it than a slow moving one. But a
slow-moving heavy roller has more momentum than a fast cricket ball.
Units of momentum:
The SI unit is kg m/s i.e. kgms-1
Dimension formula = [M1
L1
T-1
]
Law of conservation of Momentum
It states that if external force acting on a system of bodies is zero then the total linear
momentum of a system always remains constant. As we know from newton‟s second
law of motion
F=
dp
dt
i.e. If F=0
Thus, F= 0
dp
dt

Hence, p (momentum) is constant.
Application of law of conservation of momentum
Recoil of the Gun: When a bullet is fired with a gun the bullet moves in forward direction
and gun is recoiled/pushed backwards. Let
21
m = mass of bullet
u = velocity of bullet
M = mass of gun
V = velocity of gun
The gun and bullet form an isolated system, so the total momentum of gun and bullet
before firing = 0
Total momentum of gun and bullet after firing= mu + MV
Using law of conservation of momentum
0 = m.u + M.v
MV = -mu
V =
−𝑚𝑢
𝑀
This is the expression for recoil velocity of gun.
Here negative sign shows that motion of the gun is in opposite direction to that of the
bullet. Also, velocity of gun is inversely proportional to its mass. Lesser the mass,
larger will be the recoil velocity of the gun.
Impulse
Impulse is defined as the total change in momentum produced by the impulsive force.
OR
Impulse may be defined as the product of force and time and is equal to the total
change in momentum of the body.
F.t = p2– p1= total change in momentum
Example: A kick given to a football or blow made with hammer.
SI unit: Ns
2.8 CIRCULAR MOTION
The motion of a body in a circle of fixed radius is called circular motion.
For example, the motion of a stone tied to a string when whirled in the air is a circular
motion.
Angular Displacement (θ): The angle subtended by a body while moving in a circle is
called angular displacement.
Consider a body moves in a circle, starting from A to B so
that BOA is called angular displacement
The SI unit of angular displacement is radian (rad.)
Angular Velocity: Angular velocity of a body moving in a circle is the rate of change of
angular displacement with time. It is denoted by ω (omega)
If θ is the angular displacement in time t then
Figure: 2.9
22
t

 
SI unit of angular velocity is rad/s
Time Period: Time taken by a body moving in a circle to complete one cycle is called time
period. It is denoted by T
Frequency (n): The number of cycles completed by a body in one second is called
frequency. It is reciprocal of time period; 𝑛 =
1
𝑇
Angular Acceleration: The time rate of change of angular velocity of a body.
It is denoted by α. Let angular velocity of a body moving in a circle change from ω1
to ω2 in time t, then
𝛼 =
𝜔1 − 𝜔2
𝑡
SI unit of „‟ is rad/s2
Relationship between linear and angular velocity
Consider a body moving in a circle of radius r Let it start from A and reaches to B after
time t, so that BOA = θ (Fig. 2.9).
Now
𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 =
𝑎𝑟𝑐
𝑟𝑎𝑑𝑖𝑢𝑠
𝜃 =
𝐴𝐵
𝑂𝐴
=
𝑆
𝑟
𝑆 = 𝑟𝜃
Dividing both sides by time (t), we get
𝑆
𝑡
= 𝑟
𝜃
𝑡
Here v
s
t
 is linear velocity
And
t


 is angular velocity
Hence v = 𝑟𝜔
2.9 CENTRIPETAL AND CENTRIFUGAL FORCES
Centripetal Force: The force acting along the radius towards the centre of circle to keep a
body moving with uniform speed in a circular path is called centripetal force. It is denoted by
FC.
𝐹
𝑐 =
𝑚𝑣2
𝑟
For example, a stone tied at one end of a string whose other end is held in hand, when
round in the air, the centripetal force is supplied by the tension in the string.
23
Centrifugal Force:
A body moving in circle with uniform speed experience a force in a direction away from
the centre of the circle. This force is called centrifugal force.
For example, cream is separated from milk by using centrifugal force. When milk is
rotated in cream separator, cream particles in the milk being lighter, experience less
centrifugal force.
2.10 APPLICATION OF CENTRIPETAL FORCE IN BANKING OF ROADS
Banking of Roads: While travelling on a road, you must have noticed that the outer edge of
circular road is slightly raised above as compared to the inner edge of road. This is called
banking of roads (Fig. 2.10).
Angle of Banking: The angle through which the outer edge of circular road is raised above
the inner edge of circular roads is called angle of banking.
Application of centripetal force in banking of roads
Let m = mass of vehicle
r = radius of circular road
v = uniform speed (velocity) of vehicle
θ = angle of banking
At the body two forces act. Figure 2.10
(i) Weight (mg) of vehicle vertically downwards.
(ii) Normal reaction (R).
R makes an angle θ and resolves the forces into two components
(i) Rsinθ towards the centre
(ii) Rcosθ vertically upwards and balance by weight of (mg)
vehicle
Rsinθ provides the necessary centripetal force (
2
mv
r
)
2
mv
Rsin
r
  - - - - - (1)
and R cosθ = mg - - - - -(2)
Divide equation 1 by 2
2
cos
mv
RSin r
R mg



𝑡𝑎𝑛𝜃 =
𝑣2
𝑟𝑔
𝜃 = 𝑡𝑎𝑛−1
𝑣2
𝑟𝑔
* * * * * *
Figure: 2.10
24
EXERCISES
Fill in the blanks:
1. The maximum possible number of rectangular components of a vector is ………….
2. The acceleration of the particle performing uniform circular motion is called…………
3. Centripetal force always acts ……… (towards/away to) the centre of the circle.
4. Railway tracks are banked at the curves so that the necessary …………..force may be
obtained from the horizontal component of the reaction on the train.
5. The angle through which the outer edge of a circular road is raised above its inner
edge is called ………….
6. A model aeroplane fastened to a post by a fine thread is flying in a horizontal circle.
Suddenly the thread breaks. The aeroplane will fly ……………(inward/outward)
7. A force which acts for a small time and also varies with time is called ……………….
Short Answer Type Questions
1. State and explain laws of vector addition.
2. Explain resolution of a vector.
3. How is impulse related to linear momentum?
4. Define circular motion. Give examples.
5. Define banking of roads.
3. Define scalar and vector quantities with examples.
4. Define resolution and composition of forces.
5. Define impulse.
6. Why does a gun recoil when a bullet is fired?
7. Differentiate between centripetal and centrifugal forces.
8. An artificial satellite takes 90 minutes to complete its revolution around the earth.
Calculate the angular speed of satellite. [Ans. 2700 rad/sec]
9. At what maximum speed a racing car can transverse an unbanked curve of 30 m
radius? The co-efficient of friction between types and road is 0.6. [Ans. 47.8]
10. Define Force. Give its units.
11. Define Triangle law of vector addition.
12. State parallelogram law of vector addition.
Long Answer Type Questions
1. Explain Newton‟s Law of Motion.
2. Explain Banking of Roads.
3. State law of conservation of momentum.
4. Derive relationship between linear and angular velocity.
5. Derive a relation between linear acceleration and angular acceleration.
25
Chapter 3
WORK, POWER AND ENERGY
Learning objective: After going through this chapter, students will be able to;
- Understand work, energy and power, their units and dimensions.
- Describe different types of energies and energy conservation.
- Solve relevant numerical problems
3.1 WORK (DEFINITION, SYMBOL, FORMULA AND SI UNITS)
Work: is said to be done when the force applied on a body displaces it through certain
distance in the direction of applied force.
Work = Force × Displacement
In vector form, it is written as F

.S

= FS Cos
It is measured as the product of the magnitude of force and the distance covered by the
body in the direction of the force. It is a scalar quantity.
Unit: SI unit of work is joule (J). In CGS system, unit of work is erg.
1J = 107
ergs
Dimension of work = [M1
L2
T–2
]
Example1. What work is done in dragging a block 10 m horizontally when a 50 N force is
applied by a rope making an angle of 30° with the ground?
Sol. Here, F = 50 N, S = 10 m, = 30
W = FS Cos θ
W = 50 × 10 × Cos 30°
3
50x10x
2
W 
= 612.4 J
Example2. A man weighing 50 kg supports a body of 25 kg on head. What is the work done
when he moves a distance of 20 m?
Sol. Total mass = 50 + 25 = 75 kg
θ = 90°
Distance = 20 m
W = FS × 0 (Cos 90o
= 0)
W = 0
Thus, work done is zero.
Example3. A man weighing 50 kg carries a load of 10 kg on his head. Find the work done
when he goes (i) 15 m vertically up (ii) 15 m on a levelled path on the ground.
Sol. Mass of the man, m1= 50 kg
Mass carried by a man, m2 = 10 kg
Total mass M = m1 + m2 = 50 + 10 = 60 kg.
When the man goes vertically up,
26
Height through which he rises, h = 15 m
W = mgh = 60 × 9.8 × 15 = 8820 J
When the man goes on a levelled path on the ground
W= FS Cosθ
As θ =90o
, therefore, Cos 90o
= 0
Hence W= F×S×0 =0
3.2 ENERGY
Energy of a body is defined as the capacity of the body to do the work. Like work, energy
is also a scalar quantity.
Unit: SI system – joule (J), CGS system - erg
Dimensional Formula: [ML2
T–2
].
Transformation of Energy
The phenomenon of changing energy from one form to another form is called transformation
of energy. For example-
 In a heat engine, heat energy changes into mechanical energy
 In an electric bulb, the electric energy changes into light energy.
 In an electric heater, the electric energy changes into heat energy.
 In a fan, the electric energy changes into mechanical energy which rotates the fan.
 In the sun, mass changes into radiant energy.
 In an electric motor, the electric energy is converted into mechanical energy.
 In burning of coal, oil etc., chemical energy changes into heat and light energy.
 In a dam, potential energy of water changes into kinetic energy, then K.E rotates the
turbine which produces the electric energy.
 In an electric bell, electric energy changes into sound energy.
 In a generator, mechanical energy is converted into the electric energy.
3.3 KINETIC ENERGY (FORMULA, EXAMPLES AND ITS DERIVATION)
Kinetic Energy (K.E.): the energy possessed by the body by virtue of its motions is called
kinetic energy.
For example (i) running water (ii) Moving bullet.
Expression for Kinetic Energy
Consider F is the force acting on the body at rest (i.e., u = 0), then it moves in the
direction of force to distance (s).
Figure: 3.1
27
Let v be the final velocity.
Using relation 2 2
2
v u aS
 
2 2
2
v u
a
S


2
0
2
v
a
S


2
2
v
a
S
 --------------(1)
Now, work done, W= FS
or W= maS (using F =ma) ------------- (2)
By equation (1) and (2)
2
. .
2
v
W m S
S

or 2
1
2
W mv

This work done is stored in the body as kinetic energy. So kinetic energy possessed by the
body is (K.E.) = 2
1
2 mv
3.4 POTENTIAL ENERGY
Potential Energy (P.E.): the energy possessed by the body by virtue of its position is called
potential energy. Example
(i) Water stored in a dam
(ii) Mango hanging on the branch of a tree
Expression for Potential Energy (P.E)
It is defined as the energy possessed by the body by virtue of its position above the surface of
earth.
W = FS
Work done = Force × height
= mg × h = mgh
This work done is stored in the form of gravitational potential energy.
Hence Potential energy =mgh.
LAW OF CONSERVATION OF ENERGY
Energy can neither be created nor be destroyed but can be converted from one form to
another.
h
Figure: 3.2
m
28
3.5 CONSERVATION OF MECHANICAL ENERGY OF A FREE FALLING BODY
Let us consider K.E., P.E. and total energy of a body of mass m falling freely under
gravity from a height h from the surface of ground.
According to Fig. 3.3
At position A:
Initial velocity of body (u) = 0
K.E = 2
1
2 mv
P. E. = mgh
Total Energy = K.E + P.E
= 0 + mgh
= mgh ------------- (1)
At position B
Potential energy = mg(h – x)
Velocity at point B = u
From equation of motion K.E. = 2
1
2 mu
As
2 2
2
V U aS
 
Hence 2 2
0 2
u gx
 
or 2
2
u gx

Putting this value we get, KE= 1
2 (2 )
m gx
or K.E. = mgx
Total Energy = K.E + P.E
= mgx + mg(h – x)
= mgh --------(2)
At position C
Potential energy = 0 (as h = 0)
Velocity at Point B = v
From equation of motion K.E. = 2
1
2 mv
As
2 2
2
V U aS
 
Hence 2 2
0 2
v gh
 
or 2
2
v gh

Putting this value we get KE= 1
2 (2 )
m gh
or K.E. = mgh
Total Energy = K.E + P.E
= mgh + 0
= mgh ---------(3)
From equations (1), (2) and (3), it is clear that total mechanical energy of freely falling body
at all the positions is same and hence remains conserved.
Figure: 3.3
29
Example 4 A spring extended by 20 mm possesses a P.E. of 10 J. What will be P.E., if the
extension of spring becomes 30 mm?
Sol. h = 20 mm = 20 × 10–3
m
g = 9.8 ms–2
, m =?
P.E = mgh = 10 J
i.e., m × 9.8 × 20 × 10–3
= 10 J
3
10
9.8x20x10
m 

m =51.02 kg
When extension is 30 mm i.e., 30 × 10–3
m, then
P.E =mgh
= 51.02 × 9.8×3 × 10–3
= 15.0 J
3.6 POWER (DEFINITION, FORMULA AND UNITS)
Power is defined as the rate at which work is done by a force. The work done per unit
time is also called power.
If a body do work W in time t, then power is
W
P
t

Units of Power: SI unit of power is watt (W)
1
1
1
J
W
s

Power is said to be 1 W, if 1 J work is done in 1 s.
Bigger units of power are:
kilowatt (kW) = 103
W
Megawatt (MW) = 106
W
Horse power (hp) = 746 W
Dimension of power = [M1
L2
T-3
]
Example 5 A man weighing 65 kg lifts a mass of 45 kg to the top of a building 10 metres
high in 12 second. Find;
(i)Total work done by him. The power developed by him.
Solution Mass of the man, m1 = 65 kg
Mass lifted m2 = 45 kg
Height through which raised h = 10 m
Time taken t = 12 seconds.
(i) Total work done by the man, W = mgh
= 110 × 9.81 × 10 = 10791.0 J
(ii) Power developed
W 10791J
899.25 W
t 12
P
s
  
* * * * * *
30
EXERCISES
Fill in the blanks:
1. There are two bodies X and Y with equal kinetic energy but different masses m and
4 m respectively. The ratio of their linear momentum is……
2. When a spring is stretched, its potential energy ………….
3. 1 kWH= ……. J
Short Answer Type Questions
1. Define the terms energy, potential energy and kinetic energy.
2. Define potential energy, Derive expression for gravitational potential energy.
3. Define work and write its unit.
4. State and prove principle of conservation of energy.
5. Define power. Give it S.I unit and dimensions.
6. Explain transformation of energy.
7. A person walking on a horizontal road with a load on his head does not work.
Explain.
8. Give some examples of transformation of energy.
Long Answer Type Questions
1. State and explain the law of conservation of energy for free falling body.
2. Define power and energy. Give their units.
3. Define kinetic energy with examples. Obtain an expression for kinetic energy of body
moving with uniform speed.
31
Chapter 4
ROTATIONAL MOTION
Learning objective: After going through this chapter, students will be able to;
- Define rotational motion and parameters like; torque, angular momentum and
momentum conservation.
- Describe Moment of inertia and radius of gyration.
- Solve relevant numerical problems.
4.1 ROTATIONAL MOTION WITH EXAMPLES
The rotation of a body about fixed axis is called Rotational motion. For example,
(i) Motion of a wheel about its axis
(ii) Rotation of earth about its axis.
4.2 DEFINITION OF TORQUE AND ANGULAR MOMENTUM
Torque ()
It is measured as the product of magnitude of force and perpendicular distance of the line
of action of force from the axis of rotation.
It is denoted by τ,
x
F r
 
  
Where F is external force and r is
perpendicular distance.
Unit: newton (N)
Dimension Formula: [M1
L2
T-2
]
Angular Momentum (L)
Angular momentum of a rotating body about its axis of rotation is the algebraic sum of
the linear momentum of its particles about the axis. It is denoted by L. It is vector
quantity.
L = momentum × perpendicular distance
L= p × r
or L= mvr
Unit: Kg m2
/sec
Dimensional Formula = [ML2
T–1
]
Figure: 4.1
32
4.3 LAW OF CONSERVATION OF ANGULAR MOMENTUM
When no external torque acts on a system of particles, then the total angular
momentum of the system always remains constant.
Let I be moment of inertia and ω the angular velocity, then angular momentum is
given as
L = Iω
Also the torque is given by
dL
dt
 
If no external torque acts on the body, then τ = 0
Hence
dL
dt
  =0
Thus L is constant (as derivative of constant quantity is zero).
Hence, if no external torque acts on system, the total angular momentum remains
conserved.
Examples:
(i) An ice skater who brings in her arms while spinning spins faster. Her moment of
inertia is dropping (reducing the moment of arm) so her angular velocity increases to
keep the angular momentum constant
(ii) Springboard diver stretches his body in between his journey.
5.4 MOMENT OF INERTIA AND ITS PHYSICAL SIGNIFICANCE
Moment of Inertia of a rotating body about an axis is defined as the sum of the product
of the mass of various particles constituting the body and square of respective
perpendicular distance of different particles of the body from the axis of rotation.
Expression for the Moment of Inertia:
Let us consider a rigid body of mass M having n number of
particles revolving about any axis. Let m1, m2, m3 ..., mn be
the masses of particles at distance r1, r2, r3... rn from the
axis of rotation respectively (Fig. 4.2).
Moment of Inertia of whole body
I = m1r1
2
+ m2r2
2
+ ... mnrn
2
or 2
1
n
i i
i
I m r

 
Physical Significance of Moment of Inertia
It is totally analogous to the concept of inertial mass. Moment of inertia plays the
same role in rotational motion as that of mass in translational motion. In rotational motion, a
body, which is free to rotate about a given axis, opposes any change in state of rotation.
Moment of Inertia of a body depends on the distribution of mass in a body with respect to the
axis of rotation.
Figure: 4.2
33
Radius of Gyration (K)
It may be defined as the distance of a point from the axis of rotation at which whole mass
of the body is supposed to be concentrated, so that moment of inertia about the axis remains
the same. It is denoted by K
If the mass of the body is M, the moment of inertia (I) of the body in terms of
radius of gyration is given as,
2
I MK
 ---------- (1)
Expression for Radius of Gyration
Let m1, m2, m3 ..., mn be the masses of particles at distance r1, r2, r3... rn from the axis of
rotation respectively (Fig. 4.3).
Then Moment of Inertia of whole body
I = m1r1
2
+ m2r2
2
+ .......+mnrn
2
If mass of all particles is taken same, then
I = m (r1
2
+ r2
2
+ ..........+rn
2
)
Multiply and divide the equation by n (number of particle)

2 2 2
1 2
x ( ............ )
n
m n r r r
I
n
  

or
2 2 2
1 2
( ............ )
n
M r r r
I
n
  
 ---------- (2)
(M=m×n, is total mass of body)
Comparing equation (1) and (2) , we get
2 2 2
2 1 2
( ............ )
n
M r r r
MK
n
  

Or
2 2 2
2 1 2
( ............ )
n
r r r
K
n
  

2 2 2
1 2
( ............ )
n
r r r
K
n
  

Thus, radius of gyration may also be defined as the root mean square (r.m.s.) distance of
particles from the axis of rotation.
Unit: metre.
Example 1. What torque will produce an acceleration of 2 rad/s2
in a body if moment of
inertia is 500 kg m2
?
Sol. Here, I = 500 kg m2
α = 2 rad/s2
Now, torque τ = I× α
= 500 kgm2
× 2 rad/s2
= 1000 kg m2
s–2
= 1000 Nm or J
Figure: 4.3
34
Example2. An engine is rotating at the rate of 1500 rev. per minute. Find its angular velocity.
Sol. Here, Revolution per minute of engine, n= 1500
Angular velocity 2 n
 

Or
22 1500
2
7 60
   
157.1
  rad/s
Example 3. How large a torque is needed to accelerate a wheel, for which I = 2 kgm2
,
from rest to 30 r.p.s in 20 seconds?
Sol. Here, Moment of inertia, I = 2 kgm2
R.P.S after 20 sec, n = 30
Initial velocity, ω1 = 0
Final velocity, ω2 = 2 x π x 30 = 188.4 rad/s.
Angular acceleration = 2 1
t
 

=
188.4 0
20

= 9.43 rad/s2
.
Now, torque, τ = I× α
= 2 kg m2
× 9.43 rad/s2
= 18.86 Nm or J
Example 4. If a point on the rim of wheel 4 m in diameter has a linear velocity of 16 m/ s,
find the angular velocity of wheel in rad/sec.
Sol. Radius of wheel (R) =
2
Diameter
=
2
4
= 2 m
From the relation v r

16
2
v
r
   = 8 rad/s.
Angular velocity of wheel is 8 rad/s.
* * * * *
35
EXERCISES
Fill in the blanks:
1. The radius of gyration of a ring of radius R about an axis through its centre and
perpendicular to its plane is ………………
2. Two rings have their moment of inertia in the ratio 2:1 and their diameters are in the
ratio 2:1. The ratio of their masses will be …………………..
3. A person standing on a rotating platform with his hands lowered outstretches his arms.
The angular momentum of the person ………………
4. An earth satellite is moving around the earth in a circular orbit. In such a case,
………… is conserved.
5. When no external torque acts on a system, its ……………. is conserved.
Short Answer Type Question
1. Define torque.
2. Define rotational inertia or moment of inertia. Give its SI unit.
3. Define radius of gyration and give its SI units.
4. Derive the relation between torque and angular momentum.
Long Answer Type Question
1. Derive an expression for angular momentum in terms of moment of inertia.
2. State and prove law of conservation of angular momentum.
3. Define radius of gyration and derive its expression.
4. Define moment of inertia. Derive its expression and explain its physical significance.
36
Chapter 5
PROPERTIES OF MATTER
Learning objective: After going through this chapter, students will be able to;
- Understand elasticity, deforming force, restoring force etc.
- Define stress, strain, Hook’s law, modulus of elasticity, pressure etc..
- Describe surface tension, viscosity and effect of temperature on these.
- Understand fluid motion and nature of flow.
5.1 DEFINITION OF ELASTICITY, DEFORMING FORCE, RESTORING FORCE,
EXAMPLE OF ELASTIC AND PLASTIC BODY
Elasticity: It is the property of solid materials to return to their original shape and size
after removal of deforming force.
Deforming Forces: The forces which bring the change in configuration of the body are
called deforming forces.
Restoring Force: It is a force exerted on a body or a system that tends to move it
towards an equilibrium state.
Elastic Body: It is the body that returns to its original shape after a deformation.
Examples are Golf ball, Soccer ball, Rubber band etc.
Plastic Body: It is the body that do not return to its original shape after a deformation.
Examples are Polyethylene, Polypropylene, Polystyrene and Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC).
5.2 DEFINITION OF STRESS AND STRAIN WITH THEIR TYPES
Stress: It is defined as the restoring force per unit area of a material. Stress is of two types:
1. Normal Stress: If deforming force acts normal (perpendicular) to the surface of the
body then the stress is normal stress.
2. Tangential Stress: If deforming force acts tangentially to the surface of the body
then the stress is tangential stress.
Strain: It is defined as the ratio of change in configuration to the original configuration, when
a deforming force is applied to a body. The strain is of three types:
(i) Longitudinal strain:
If the deforming force produces a change in length only, the strain produced is called
longitudinal strain or tensile strain. It is defined as the ratio of change in length to the original length.
Longitudinal strain =
Change in length(∆𝑙)
original length(𝑙)
37
(ii) Volumetric strain: It is defined as the ratio of the change in volume to the original volume.
Volumetricstrain =
Change in volume(∆V)
original volume(V)
(iii) Shearing strain:
It is defined as the ratio of lateral displacement of a surface under the tangential force to the
perpendicular distance between surfaces
Shearing strain =
Lateral Displacement
Distance between surfaces
=
∆𝐿
𝐿
= tan Ф
The shearing strain is also defined as the angle in radian through which a plane perpendicular to the fixed
surface of a rectangular block gets turned under the effect to tangential force.
Units of strain:
Strain is a ratio of two similar physical quantities, it is unitless and dimensionless.
5.3 HOOK’S LAW, MODULUS OF ELASTICITY
Hook’s law: Within elastic limits, the stress and strain are proportional to each other.
Thus, Stress ∝ Strain
Stress = E × Strain
Where E is the proportionality constant and is known as modulus of elasticity.
Modulus of Elasticity: The ratio of stress and strain is always constant and called as
modulus of elasticity.
Young’s Modulus (Y): The ratio of normal stress to the longitudinal strain is defined as
Young’s modulus and is denoted by the symbol Y.
F A
Y
l l


=
F l
A l


The unit of Young‟s modulus is the same as that of stress i.e., Nm–2
or pascal (Pa)
Bulk Modulus (K): The ratio of normal (hydraulic) stress to the volumetric strain is called
bulk modulus. It is denoted by symbol K.
F A
K
V V


=
F V
A V


SI unit of bulk modulus is the same as that of pressure i.e., Nm–2
or Pa
Figure: 5.1
38
Shear Modulus or Modulus of rigidity (𝜂): The ratio of shearing stress to the
corresponding shearing strain is called the shear modulus of the material and is represented
by 𝜂. It is also called the modulus of rigidity.
Tangential stress
Shear strain
 
F A
L L
 

=
F L
A L


The SI unit of shear modulus is Nm–2
or Pa.
5.4 PRESSURE
Pressure: It is defined as the force acting per unit area over the surface of a body.
P =
A
F
SI unit is Nm–2
or Pa
Pascal Law: A change in the pressure applied to an enclosed incompressible fluid is
transmitted undiminished to every portion of the fluid and to the walls of its container.
Or it states that liquid enclosed in a vessel exerts equal pressure in all the directions.
5.5 SURFACE TENSION
The property of a liquid due to which its free surface behaves like stretched membrane
and acquires minimum surface area. It is given by force per unit length.
𝑇 =
𝐹
𝑙
Surface tension allows insects (usually denser than water) to float and
stride on a water surface.
SI unit is N/m.
Applications of surface tension in daily life
It plays an important role in many applications in our daily life.
 Washing clothes
 Cleaning
 Cosmetics
 Lubricants in machines
 Spreading of ink, colours
 Wetting of a surface
 Action of surfactants
 Paints, insecticides
 Creating fuel-spray in automobile engines
 Passing of liquid in porous media
 Spherical shape of water droplets.
Figure: 5.2
39
Effect of Temperature on Surface Tension
In general, surface tension decreases when temperature increases and vice versa.
This is because cohesive forces decrease with an increase of molecular thermal activity. The
influence of the surrounding environment is due to the adhesive action liquid molecules have
at the interface.
5.6 VISCOSITY
The property of liquid due to which it oppose the relative motion between its layers. It
is also known as liquid friction.
SI unit of viscosity is pascal-second (Pas) and cgs unit is poise.
Effect of Temperature on Viscosity
In liquids the source for viscosity is considered to be atomic bonding. As we
understand that, with the increase of temperature the bonds break and make the molecule free
to move. So, we can conclude that the viscosity decreases as the temperature increases and
vice versa.
In gases, due to the lack of cohesion, the source of viscosity is the collision of
molecules. Here, as the temperature increases the viscosity increases and vice versa. This is
because the gas molecules utilize the given thermal energy in increasing its kinetic energy
that makes them random and therefore resulting in more the number of collisions.
5.7 FLUID MOTION, STREAM LINE AND TURBULENT FLOW
Fluid Motion: A liquid in motion is called fluid. There are two types of fluid motions;
streamline and turbulent.
Streamline Flow: Flow of a fluid in which its
velocity at any point of given cross section is
same. It is also called laminar flow.
Turbulent flow: It is type of fluid (gas or
liquid) flow in which the speed of the fluid at
given cross section is continuously undergoing
changes in both magnitude and direction.
***********
Figure: 5.3
40
EXERCISES
Fill in the blanks
1) Stress is defined as the ………………. per unit area of a material.
2) ……………………is the ratio of change in dimensions to the original dimensions.
3) For small deformations the stress and strain are proportional to each other. This is called
…………………
4) Pressure is defined as the force per unit ………………. over the surface of a body.
5) A change in the pressure applied to an enclosed incompressible fluid is transmitted
undiminished to every portion of the fluid to the walls of its container. It is
called………………….
6) The property of solid materials to return to their original shape and size after the removal
of deforming forces is called ................
Short Answer Type Questions
1. Define elasticity.
2. Define viscosity.
3. Define turbulent flow.
4. Define surface tension.
5. What is Young‟s modulus of elasticity?
6. State and explain Hooks Law.
7. State and explain Pascal‟s Law.
8. What is the effect of temperature on surface tension?
9. What is the effect of temperature on viscosity?
10. Give any five applications of surface tension.
11. Write difference between elastic and plastic bodies.
Long Answer Type Questions
1. Explain different kind of modulus of elasticity.
2. Define surface tension. Give formula, units and applications of surface tension.
3. Explain streamline flow, laminar flow and turbulent flow.
4. Explain different types of stress.
5. Explain Young‟s modulus of elasticity and its units.
41
Chapter 6
HEAT AND TEMPERATURE
Learning Objectives: After going through this chapter, the students will be able to:
- Define heat and temperature; understand the difference between heat and temperature;
- Describe principles of measuring temperature and different temperature scales,
- Enlist properties of heat radiations and various modes of transfer of heat.
6.1 HEAT AND TEMPERATURE
All objects are made of atoms or molecules. These molecules are always in some
form of motion (linear, vibrational or rotational) and possess kinetic energy by virtue of their
motion. The hotter an object is, faster will be the motion of the molecules inside it and hence
more will be its kinetic energy. Heat of an object is the total energy of all the individual
molecules of which the given object is made. It is a form of thermal energy. When the object
is heated, its thermal energy increases, means its molecules begin to move more
violently. Temperature, on the other hand, is a measure of the average heat or
thermal energy of the molecules in a substance.
Heat is the form of energy which produces the sensation of warmth or coldness.
The cgs unit of heat is the calorie (cal) - defined as the amount of heat required to raise the
temperature of 1g of water through 1o
C. The S.I. unit of heat energy is the joule (J) The
relation between these two units is:
1 cal = 4.18 J.
Heat on the basis of kinetic theory: According to the kinetic theory, heat of a body is total
kinetic energy of all its molecules. If a body have „n’ number of molecule having mass m and
velocities v1, v2, v3, --------, vn respectively, then
Total heat energy in the body (H) = Sum of kinetic energy of all molecules
2 2 2 2
1 2 3
1 1 1 1
........
2 2 2 2
n
H K mv mv mv mv
 
    
 
 
; where K is thermal constant.
When the body is heated, the kinetic energy of each molecule inside it increases due to
increase in their velocity. This results in the increase of total kinetic energy of the body and in
turn represents total heat of the body.
Temperature
Temperature is the degree of hotness or coldness of the body. It is the average kinetic
energy of all the molecules of which the given body is made and is given by the expression;
2 2 2 2
1 2 3
1 1 1 1
........
2 2 2 2
n
K mv mv mv mv
T
n
 
   
 
 

Units of temperature are; fahrenheit (o
F), celsius (o
C) and kelvin (K). Kelvin is the S.I. unit of
temperature.
42
6.2 DIFFERENCE BETWEEN HEAT AND TEMPERATURE:
Heat Temperature
Heat is energy that is transferred from
one body to another as the result of a
difference in temperature
Temperature is a measure of degree of
hotness or coldness
It is total kinetic energy of all the
molecules
It is average kinetic energy of all the
molecules
It depends on quantity of matter It does not depend on quantity of
matter
It is form of energy (Thermal) It is measure of energy
S.I. unit is joule S.I. unit is kelvin
6.3 PRINCIPLES OF MEASUREMENT OF TEMPERATURE:
Measurement of temperature depends on the principle that properties (physical/
electrical/ chemical) of material changes with change in temperature. A device that utilizes a
change in property of matter to measure temperature is known as thermometer. Temperature
is a principle parameter that needs to be monitored and controlled in most engineering
applications such as heating, cooling, drying and storage. Temperature can be measured via a
diverse array of sensors. All of them infer temperature by sensing some change in a physical
characteristic; be it a thermal expansion, thermoelectricity, electrical resistance or thermal
radiation. There are four basic types of thermometers, each working on a different principle:
1. Mechanical (liquid-in-glass, bimetallic strips, bulb & capillary, pressure type etc.)
2. Thermo-electric (Thermocouples)
3. Thermo-resistive (RTDs and thermistors)
4. Radiative (Infrared and optical pyrometers).
Each produces a different scale of temperature which can be related to one another.
Commonly used thermometers are mercury thermometer, platinum resistance thermometer,
thermo-electric and pyrometers. Liquid thermometers can measure temperature upto 300o
C.
Resistance thermometers can go upto 1200o
C while thermo-electrics are used for measuring
temperature as high as 3000o
C. For still higher temperatures pyrometers (very hot furnaces) are
used.
6.4 DIFFERENT SCALES OF TEMPERATURE AND THEIR RELATIONSHIP
In general, there are three scales of temperature measurement. The scales are usually
defined by two fixed points; temperature at which water freezes and the boiling point of
water as defined at sea level and standard atmospheric pressure.
a) Fahrenheit Scale: It was given by physicist Daniel Gabriel Fahrenheit in 1724. It uses
the degree fahrenheit (symbol: °F) as the unit. On this scale, freezing point of water is
taken as the lower fixed point (32°F) and boiling point of water is taken as upper fixed
point (212°F). The interval between two points is divided into 180 equal parts. Each
division is 1o
F.
This scale is used for clinical and meteorological purpose.
43
b). Celsius Scale: This scale was given by Anders Celsius in 1742. On this scale, freezing
point of water is taken as the lower fixed point (marked 0°C) and boiling point of water is
taken as upper fixed point (marked 100°C). The interval between two points is divided into
100 equal parts. Each division is 1o
C.
This scale is used for common scientific,
clinical, meteorological and technological
work.
c). Kelvin Scale: This scale defines the SI
base unit of temperature with symbol K.
On this scale freezing point of water is
taken as the lower fixed point (273K) and
boiling point of water is taken as upper
fixed point (373K). The interval between
two points is divided into 100 equal parts.
Each division is 1K.
On scale 1o
C = 1 K
This is the natural scale of temperature also
called the absolute temperature scale. The
scale is based on ideal gas thermometer.
Absolute Zero: Absolute zero is the temperature at which all molecular motions come to stand
still i.e. net kinetic energy becomes zero. It is taken as zero kelvin (-273o
C). At absolute zero
temperature, the pressure (or volume) of the gas goes to zero. This may implies that if the
temperature is reduced below -273.15°C, the volume becomes negative which is obviously
not possible. Hence -273.15°C is the lowest temperature that can be achieved and therefore
called the absolute zero of temperature. The interval on the scale is the same as on the celsius
scale (1 K = 1 o
C) and two scales can be related as.
K = o
C + 273.15
Thus on absolute scale of temperature, water freezes at 273.15K and boils at 373.15K.
Triple Point of water: The triple point is that point on a pressure versus temperature graph
which corresponds to the equilibrium among three phases of a substance i.e. gas, liquid and solid.
Triple point of pure water is at 273.16K. It is unique and occurs at single temperature
and single pressure.
RELATION AMONG THE SCALES OF TEMPERATURE
Temperature of a body can be converted from one scale to the other.
Let, L = lower reference point (freezing point)
H = upper reference point (boiling point)
T = temperature read on the given scale.
Figure 6.1 Temperature scales
44
Now
L
H
L
T


= Relative temperature w.r.t. both reference point.
Let us take a body whose temperature is determined by three different thermometers
giving readings in o
C, o
F and K respectively.
Let T1 = C = Temperature in o
C, L1 = 0°C H1 =100°C
T2 = F = Temperature ino
F, L2 = 32°F H2 = 212°F
T3 = K = Temperature Kelvin, L3 =273 K H3 = 373K
We can write,
3 3
1 1 2 2
1 1 2 2 3 3
T L
T L T L
H L H L H L
 
    
 
   
   
  
     
0 32 273
100 0 212 32 373 273
C F K
  
     
 
     
  
     
32 273
100 180 100
C F K
 
 
32 273
5 9 5
C F K
 
 
6.5 MODES OF TRANSFER OF HEAT
When two bodies having different temperatures are brought close together, the heat
flows from body at higher temperature to body at lower temperature. Heat may also flow
from one portion of body to another portion because of temperature difference. The
process is called transfer of heat. There are three modes by which heat is transferred from
one place to another. These are named as conduction, convention and radiations.
(i) Conduction: It is defined as that mode of transfer of heat in which the heat travels from
particle to particle in contact, along the direction of fall of temperature without any net
displacement of the particles.
For example, if one end of a long metal
rod (iron or brass) is heated, after some time
other end of rod also become hot. This is due to
the transfer of heat energy from hot atoms to the
nearby atoms. When two bodies have different
temperatures and are brought into contact,
they exchange heat energy and tend to
equalize the temperature. The bodies are said to
be in thermal equilibrium. This is the mode of
heat transfer in solids. Figure 6.2: Conduction
45
ii) Convection: The process of transmission of heat in which heat is transferred from one point to
another by the physical movement of the heated particles is called convection.
For example, if a liquid in a vessel is
heated by placing a burner below the vessel,
after some time the top surface of liquid also
become warm. This is because the speed of
atoms or molecules increases when liquid or
gases are heated. The molecule having more
kinetic energy rise upward and carry heat with
them. Liquids and gases transfer heat by
convection. Examples are heating of water,
cooling of transformers, see breeze, heating of
rooms by heater etc.
(iii) Radiation: The process of heat transfer in which heat is transmitted from one place to
another in the form of Infra-Red radiation, without heating the intervening medium is called
radiation.
Thermal radiations are the energy emitted by a body in the form of radiations on account
of its temperature and travel with the velocity of light. We receive heat from sun by radiation
process. All the bodies around us do emit these radiations. These radiations are the
electromagnetic waves.
6.6 PROPERTIES OF HEAT RADIATIONS
1. They do not require a medium for their propagation.
2. Heat radiations travel in straight line.
3. Heat radiations do not heat the intervening medium.
4. Heat radiations are electromagnetic waves.
5. They travel with a velocity 3 × l08
m/s in vacuum.
6. They undergo reflection, refraction, interference, diffraction and polarization.
7. They obey inverse square law.
* * * * * *
Figure 6.3: Convection
46
EXERCISES
Fill in the blanks and true/false
i. Heat of an object is the …………………. (total/average) energy of all the molecular
motions inside that object.
ii. Temperature is a measure of the …………………. energy of the molecules.
iii. Transfer of heat from a fluid to a solid surface or within a fluid is called ............ .
iv. Matter that is at finite temperature emits energy in space in the form of
electromagnetic waves. The process is known as ……………....
v. Heat radiation travels at the same speed as sound. (True/ False).
vi. The Kelvin scale is an absolute scale. (True/ False)
vii. Heat radiations cannot travel through a vacuum. (True / False)
viii. Air conditioner is an example of radiation. (True / False)
Short Answer Questions
1. Define heat. Give SI unit of heat.
2. Define temperature. Give SI unit of temperature.
3. What are heat radiations? Whether these travel in straight line or not?
4. What is principle of measurement of temperature?
5. Define absolute zero temperature.
6. What is triple point?
7. Give two examples of convection.
8. Define the process of conduction in metals.
9. Give relationship between celsius and fahrenheit scales of temperature.
10. Temperature of a patient is 40o
C. What will be the corresponding temperature on
Fahrenheit scale?
Long Answer Questions
1) Explain heat and temperature on basis of kinetic theory.
2) Describe principle of temperature measurements and name two such devices.
3) Describe with example different modes of transfer of heat.
4) Explain different scales of temperature and establish relationship between them.
5) Give any five properties of heat radiations.
47
Chapter 7
WAVE MOTION AND ITS APPLICATIONS
Learning Objective: After going through this chapter, students will be able to;
- Understand concept of waves and wave motion, define parameters representing a
wave motion and their relationship, define simple harmonic motion with examples,
understand vibrations and types of vibrations.
- Describe concept of acoustics, associated parameters and methods to control
acoustics of buildings.
- Identify ultrasonic waves and enlist their engineering applications.
7.1 WAVE MOTION
Motion of an object is the change in its position with time. In different types of
motions, some form of energy is transported from one place to another. There are two ways
of transportation of energy from its place of origin to the place where it is to be utilized. One
is the actual transport of matter. For example when a bullet is fired from a gun it carries
kinetic energy which can be utilized at another place. The second method by which energy
can be transported is the wave process.
A wave is the disturbance in which energy is transferred from one point to other due to
repeated periodic motion of particles of the medium. The waves carry energy but there is no
transport of matter.
There are two types of waves;
1. Mechanical or Elastic waves
2. Electromagnetic waves
Mechanical waves
Those waves which are produced due to repeated periodic motion of medium particles
are called mechanical or elastic waves. They need a material medium for their generation and
propagation.
For example sound waves, water waves are mechanical in nature.
Electromagnetic waves
The wave which travels in form of varying electric and magnetic fields mutually
perpendicular to each other and also perpendicular to direction of propagation of wave. They
do not need material medium for their propagation.
For example, light waves, heat radiations, radio waves, X-rays are electromagnetic waves.
The characteristics of wave motion are:
1. The wave travels forward but the particles vibrate only about their mean position.
2. The velocity of wave is the rate at which the disturbance travels through the medium.
3. The velocity of the wave depends on the type of wave (light, sound) and type of
medium (solid, liquid or gas).
4. The velocity of waves is different from the velocity of particles.
5. There is regular phase difference between particles of wave.
48
Types of Wave Motion: There are two types of wave motion;
a) Transverse wave motion
b) Longitudinal wave motion
a) Transverse wave motion
When the particles of the medium vibrate perpendicular to the direction of propagation
of wave the wave motion is called transverse wave motion. A transverse wave motion is
shown in Fig. 7.1. A transverse wave consists of one crest and one trough that makes one
cycle. The distance between two consecutive crests or two consecutive troughs is called wave
length.
Fig. 7.1
Examples are wave produced by a stretched string, light waves, waves produced on surface of
water etc.
b) Longitudinal Waves
When the particles of medium vibrate parallel to the direction of propagation of wave
the wave motion is called longitudinal wave motion. A longitudinal wave travels in the form
of compressions and rarefactions as shown in the Fig. 7.2. The part of medium where
distance between medium particles is less than their normal distance is called compression
and the portion where distance is more than their normal distance is called rarefaction. One
cycle consist of one complete compression and one complete rarefaction. The distance
between two consecutive compressions and rarefaction is called wave length.
Fig. 7.2
Most familiar example of longitudinal waves is sound waves. Sound waves can travel in
different medium such as solids, liquids and gases.
49
The main points of difference between transverse and longitudinal waves are listed below:
S. No. Transverse Waves Longitudinal Waves
1. The particles of the medium vibrate
perpendicular to the direction of
propagation of wave
The particles of medium vibrate parallel
to the direction of propagation of wave
2. The wave travels in form of crests and
troughs
The wave travels in form of
compressions and rarefactions.
3. There is no change in density of the
medium.
These waves produce change in density
of the medium.
4. These waves can be polarised. These waves cannot be polarised.
5. Velocity of wave decreases with density of
medium
Velocity of wave increases with density
of medium
6. Electromagnetic waves, wave travelling on
stretched string, light waves are the
examples.
Sound waves, pressure waves, musical
waves are its examples.
Terms Characterizing Wave Motion:
Various parameters used to characterize a wave motion are defined below.
Displacement: The distance of a particle from its mean position, at any instant is called
displacement.
Amplitude: It is the maximum displacement of the particle from its mean position of
rest.
Wavelength: It is the distance travelled by the wave in the time in which the particle of the
medium completes one vibration.
Or the distance between two consecutive crests or troughs is called as wavelength.
It is denoted by λ and measured in metres. The distance AB or DE in figure 7.3 is equal to
one wave length.
Fig. 7.3
Time period: It is defined as the time taken by a wave to complete one vibration or one
cycle. It is denoted by T and SI unit is second.
Frequency: The number of vibrations made by a wave in one second is called frequency.
It can also be written as reciprocal of time period ( = 1/T).
It is represented by n or  (nu) and units are hertz (Hz), kilohertz (kHz), Megahertz
(MHz) ... etc.
50
Wave Velocity: The distance travelled by the wave per unit time is defined as wave
velocity. It is denoted as (v) and measured in m/s.
Or it may be defined as the velocity by which a wave propagates is called as wave velocity.
Phase: Phase of a vibrating particle tells the position of a particle at that instant. It is
measured by the fraction of angle or time elapsed by wave at any instant since the particle has
crossed its mean position in positive direction. It is denoted by θ and unit is radian.
Phase difference: The difference in angle or time elapsed between two particles at any
instant. It is calculated by the formula
Phase difference (ϕ) =
λ
2π
× path difference
Relation between Wave velocity, Wavelength and Frequency
Wave velocity is the distance travelled by a wave in one time period.
v
distanse
time T

 
and frequency is reciprocal of time period i.e.
T
1
ν 
Thus v =  
The relation holds for both transverse and longitudinal waves.
Numerical 1: A radio station broadcasts at a frequency of 15 MHz. The velocity of
transmitted waves is 3×108
m/s. What is the wavelength of transmitted waves?
Solution: Given, frequency () = 15 MHz = 15×106
Hz,
Velocity of waves (v) = 3×108
m/s
Using relation; v =  
we get wavelength () =
v

= 6
8
10
15
10
3


= 20 m
Numerical 2: A tuning fork of frequency 512 Hz makes 24 vibrations in air. If velocity of
sound in air is 340 m/s, how far does sound travel in air?
Solution: Here, frequency () = 512 Hz and velocity = 340 m/s
Using the relation v =  , we get
Wavelength () =

V
=
512
40
3
= 0.664 m
Therefore, distance in 24 vibrations = 24 × = 24 ×0.664 m = 15.94 m
51
Fig. 7.4. Damped vibrations
Fig. 7.5. Undamped vibrations
7.2 FREE, FORCED AND RESONANT VIBRATIONS
Vibrations
A motion in which the object moves to and fro about a fixed mean position is called
oscillatory motion (vibration). All oscillatory motion needs to be periodic. The motion in
which the object repeats its path after a fixed or regular interval of time is called periodic
motion. For example, motion of hands of clock, motion of spring mass system, simple
pendulum, cantilever, rim of cycle wheel etc.
Types of Vibrations: There are three types of vibrations: free, forced and resonant.
1) Free Vibrations: A force can set a resting object into motion. But when the force is a
short-lived or momentary, it only begins the motion. The object moves back and forth,
repeating the motion over and again.
When a body is set into vibrations and is allowed to vibrate freely under the influence
of its own elastic forces, such vibrations are called free vibrations.
The frequency of free vibration is called natural frequency. Examples are vibrations
of simple pendulum, cantilever, loaded beam etc.
Free vibrations can also be divided in two classes; damped and undamped vibrations.
a) Damped Vibrations:
In case of free vibrations, the extent of displacement from the equilibrium position
reduces with time. This is because the force that started the motion is a momentary
force and the vibrations ultimately cease. The
object is said to experience damping. Thus when
the amplitude of vibrations goes on decreasing
with time and finally the vibrations stop after some
time then such vibrations are called damped
vibrations as shown in Fig.7.4. For example
vibrations of cantilever, loaded beam, spring mass
system etc. Damping is the tendency of a vibrating
object to lose or to dissipate its energy over time.
b) Undamped Vibrations:
If the amplitude of vibrations
remains constant and the vibrations
continue for infinite time then such
vibrations are called undamped
vibrations as shown in Fig. 7.5. For
example vibrations of simple
pendulum in vacuum.
52
2) Forced Vibrations: A vibrating object naturally loses energy with time. It must
continuously be put back into the vibrations through a force in order to sustain the
vibration. A sustained input of energy would be required to keep the back and forth
motion going. Thus when a periodic force is used to maintain the vibrations of an object
then such vibrations are called forced vibrations. For example swing of a child.
3) Resonant Vibrations: It is a special type of forced vibration in which the frequency of
applied force matches with natural frequency of an object. In this situation resonance
occurs and the amplitude of vibrations increases largely. For example tuning of radio set,
swing of a child.
(a) Tuning of a radio set: There are many stations sending radio waves of various
frequencies causing forced oscillations in the circuit of receiver. When the
frequency of tuner equals that of waves from particular broadcasting station, the
resonance takes place and hence we can hear only that station, whose amplitude is
increased.
(b) During earthquake certain building whose natural frequency are same as the
frequency of earthquake collapse due to resonant vibration.
Resonance occurs widely in nature. Some sounds we hear, like when hard objects of
metal, glass, or wood are struck, are caused by brief resonant vibrations in the object.
Electromagnetic waves are produced by resonance on an atomic scale. Other examples are
the balance wheel in a mechanical watch, tidal resonance, acoustic resonances of musical
instruments, production of coherent light by optical resonance in a laser etc.
7.3 SIMPLE HARMONIC MOTION (SHM)
It is a special type of motion in which the restoring force is directly proportional to
displacement from the mean position and opposes its increase. Applying Newton‟s second
law of motion (force = mass × acceleration), it can be stated as a periodic motion in which the
acceleration is directly proportional to displacement and is always directed towards mean
position.
In other words, if F is the restoring force and „y‟ is the displacement from the mean position,
then
F = - K y or a = -
m
K
y
The negative sign indicates that F opposes increase in y and K is constant of proportionality,
called force constant. In such motion displacement varies harmonically with time and can be
represented in terms of harmonic functions i.e. sinθ, cosθ such as
y(t) = A sin t or A cos t (  = t)
Here A is the amplitude of SHM and  is angular frequency.
Examples of SHM are; motion of simple pendulum, cantilever, mass-spring system, swing
etc.
53
Fig. 7.6 Cantilever
Characteristics of SHM:
• The motion should be periodic.
• Force causing the motion is directed toward the equilibrium point (minus sign).
• Acceleration produced is directly proportional to the displacement from equilibrium.
7.4 CANTILEVER
A metallic beam fixed at one end and free to vibrate at other end is called cantilever.
The normal configuration of a cantilever is shown in Fig. 7.6.
When it is loaded at free end it vibrates and its edge performs simple harmonic motion. The
time taken to complete one vibration is called time period.
The time period is given by
2
p
T
g


Where p is the depression of beam
(displacement of beam from its unloaded
position) and g is acceleration due to gravity.
7.5 SOUND WAVES
These are mechanical waves and need medium for their propagation. Sound waves also
called pressure waves can be transmitted through solid, liquid or gas. There are three
frequency ranges in which sound is categorised:
a) Audible: The sound waves between frequencies 20 Hz to 20 kHz is called audible
range and audible to human. It is also called sonic sound.
b) Infrasonic: Sound waves below frequency 20Hz are called infrasonic and are
inaudible to human ears. A number of animals produce and use sounds in the
infrasonic range. For example elephant, whales, rhinos etc.
c) Ultrasonic: The sound waves with frequency above 20 kHz are called ultrasonic.
Bats communicate through ultrasonic waves. These waves also inaudible to human
ears.
Properties of sound waves are:-
1. Sound waves are longitudinal mechanical waves.
2. They need material medium for their generation and propagation.
3. They cannot traverse through vacuum so their velocity in vacuum is zero.
4. Their velocity in air at NTP is 332 m/s and it increases with rise in temperature.
5. Sound waves travel faster in solids than in liquids than in gasses.
6. They show the phenomena of reflection, transmission, diffraction etc.
54
7.6 ACOUSTICS OF BUILDINGS
The branch of physics that deals with study of audible sound including their
generation, propagation and properties is called acoustics.
Acoustics of buildings: It deals with construction of public halls, auditoriums, cinema halls
etc. for best sound effects.
Generation of Audible Sound: Any object that can produce longitudinal mechanical waves
of frequency between 20 Hz to 20 kHz generates audible sound. For example, musical
instruments, vibrating fork, human throat (vocal chord) etc.
Propagation of Audible Sound: Audible sound propagates in material medium only. Its
velocity is lowest in air and increases with increase in density of the medium. It travels fastest
in metals. While travelling in one medium if it meets another medium it gets divided into
three parts; reflected part, absorbed part and transmitted part.
Coefficient of Absorption of Sound:
The ratio of sound energy absorbed by a surface to the total sound incident on a
surface is called coefficient of absorption or simply absorption coefficient of sound. It is
denoted by „a‟ and its SI unit is OWU (open window unit). Its value is maximum (=1) for an
open window.
a =
surface
on the
incident
energy
sound
Total
surface
a
by
energy
sound
absorbed
Types of Audible Sound: Two types of audible sound are musical sound and noise.
Musical Sound: The sound that produces pleasant effect on our ears is called musical sound.
It is a single sound or multiple sounds having same frequency, wavelength and meeting in
same phase.
e.g. Sound of music, crisping of birds etc.
Noise: The sounds that produce unpleasant effect on our ears are called noise. It has irregular
amplitude with time. It is generally a combination of multiple sounds of different frequency,
wavelength and meeting in different phases.
e.g. sound of horn, thunder etc.
Reverberation:
It is the persistence of sound after the source has stopped emitting sound due to
reflection from multiple surfaces.
Reverberation Time:
The time up to which a sound persists in a hall or room after the source has stopped
emitting it is called reverberation time.
55
Standard reverberation time (Sabine’s formula): Reverberation time is the time taken by
the sound intensity to drop by 60 dB or reduce to its one millionth parts. An American
scientist W. C. Sabine developed an equation for calculating the reverberation time as:
T =
0.16V
aS

where V is the volume of the hall in m3
, a is the average absorption coefficient of room
surfaces and S is total surface area of room in m2
.
Here .....
s
a
s
a
s
a
S
a 3
2
2
2
1
1 




where a1, a2, a3etc. are absorption coefficients of different objects in hall and s1, s2, s3etc. are
their surface areas.
Echo:
The repetition of original sound by reflection from a surface is called echo. The echo
is produced if the reflected sound reaches our ears after 1/10 of a second. It is different from
reverberation as echo is identified as repeated sound due to a time gap of at least 1/10 of a
second.
The distance „d‟ of reflector/obstacle causing echo is given by
d =
v.
2
t
where „v‟ is velocity of sound and „t‟ is time taken by reflected sound to reach our ears.
The minimum distance of obstacle to produce echo thus is given as
s = {332× (1/10)}/2 = 16.6 m/s
Thus, the obstacle must be placed at a minimum distance of 16.6 m from the source to
produce echo.
Methods to Control Reverberation time:
To control reverberation time the simplest way is to increase absorption in the hall.
The methods to control reverberation are:
1. Provide few open windows in hall- Open windows are good absorbers of sound and
the reverberation time can be controlled by adjusting the number of open windows in
the hall.
2. Cover the floor with carpets- The carpets are also good absorbers of sound which help
in reducing the reverberation time in the hall.
3. Curtains- The use of heavy folded curtains on doors and windows allows to control
the reverberation time.
4. Cover the walls-Covering the walls with absorbing materials like fibre or asbestos
sheets etc help in reducing reverberation time.
5. Using false ceiling- False ceiling is made of sound absorbing materials which reduces
the reverberation in a hall.
6. Using upholstered cushioned seats in hall- the seats in the empty hall would also
absorb the sound if they are made of good absorbing cushioned material and turn up
when no one is sitting on them.
7. A good number of audience increases the absorption of hall.
56
7.7 ULTRASONICS
The sound waves having frequency more than 20 kHz are called ultrasonics. Their
characteristics are:
i. They are high frequency and high energy waves.
ii. If they are passed through a liquid it is shaken violently.
iii. They work as catalyst for chemical reactions.
iv. They can be sent in the form of narrow beam to long distances without loss of energy.
v. Travelling in one medium if they meet another, they return back in same medium at
180 degree.
vi. Just like ordinary sound waves, ultrasonic waves get reflected, refracted and absorbed.
vii. They produce intense heating effect when passed through a substance.
Production of Ultrasonic: The natural producer of ultrasonics is „Bat‟. Another simple
method to produce low frequency ultrasonics is „Galton‟s whistle‟. Two types of oscillators
are used to produce ultrasonic sounds: Magnetostriction oscillator, Piezoelectric oscillator.
Applications of Ultrasonic: Ultrasonic waves are used in various fields like; medical for
ultrasound, navigation for various purposes, engineering for drilling, cleaning, flaw detection
etc. Some important applications of ultrasonic are described below:
1) Drilling: Ultrasonic is high frequency and high energy
wave, so they can be used in applications involving high
amount of energy. They can be used to make a drill even in
hardest material of world i.e. Diamond. For this a tool bit is
attached at lower end of magnetostriction oscillator. The
sheet to be drilled is kept below the tool bit. It is driven by a
magneto-striction oscillator that creates the vibrations.
When oscillator is switched on the tool bit moves up and
down that produces enough strain to make a drill in the
sheet. The setup of drilling is shown in figure 7.7.
2) Ultrasonic welding (cold welding): The setup is shown in
figure 7.8. Cold welding means welding without
involvement of heat which is possible only with
ultrasonics. A hammer is attached at lower end of
magnetostriction oscillator. The sheets to be welded are
kept below hammer. When oscillator is switched on
hammer strikes the sheets frequently. In case of resonance
the molecules of both sheets enter in each other due to high
amplitude and welding is performed without involvement
of heat. The interface of the two parts is specially designed
to concentrate the energy for maximum weld strength.
Fig. 7.7 Ultrasonic drilling
Fig. 7.8 Cold welding
57
Fig. 7.9 Sound navigation and ranging
3) SONAR: is a technique which stands for SOund
Navigation and Ranging. It uses ultrasonic for the
detection and identification of underwater objects.
A powerful beam of ultrasonic is sent in the
suspected direction in water. By noting the time
interval between the emission and receipt of beam
after reflection, the distance of the object can be
easily calculated. Measuring the time interval (t)
between the transmitted pulses and the received
pulse, the distance (d) between the transmitter and
the remote object is determined using the formula
d = v ×
2
t
where v is the velocity of sound in sea water. The same principle is used to find the depth
of the sea as shown in figure 7.9.
Numerical 3. An ultrasonic scanner travelling with a speed of 1.5 km/s in a tissue operating
under a frequency of 4.1 MHz. What is the wavelength of sound in the tissue?
Solution:
Given, Velocity (v) = 1.5 km/s = 1.5×1000 = 1500 m/s
Frequency () = 4.1 MHz = 4.1×106
Hz
Using the relation; v =  we can get
Wavelength,  =
v

= 6
10
1
.
4
1500

= 3.65×10-4
m = 36.5 mm
Numerical 4. A man hears his sound again after reflection from a cliff after 1 second. If the
velocity of sound is 330 m/s, find the distance of cliff from the man.
Solution: Given
Velocity of sound, v = 330 m/s
Time after which sound is heard, t = 1.0 s
Let d be the distance of cliff from man.
Total distance travelled by sound in going and coming back from cliff = 2 d
Thus, 2 d = v × t = 330 ×1 = 330 m
d =
330
2
= 165 m
* * * * * *
58
EXERCISES
Fill in the blanks or true/false
1. In __________ waves, matter in the medium moves forward and backward in the
same direction in which the wave travels.
2. When the vibrations of a body are maintained by its own elastic forces then such
vibrations are called ________.
3. Sound wave cannot get ________ (Reflected /Polarized)
4. Echo is caused due to _________ of sound.
5. Perfect absorber has absorption coefficient of _________(0 / 1/ infinity).
6. Standard reverberation time is given by _________ formula.
7. ______________ waves does not require medium to travel
8. In __________ waves, matter in the medium moves back and forth at right angles to
the direction the wave travels.
9. The velocity of sound waves in vacuum is ______.
10. Wave is a form of disturbance. (True / False)
11. In SHM, acceleration is directly proportional to displacement. (True / False)
12. The vibrations in which amplitude of vibrations remains constant are called damped
vibration. (True / False)
13. The minimum distance of an obstacle for echo to be heard is 16.6 m. (True / False).
14. Sound waves cannot travel in outer space because these are mechanical waves. (True /
False).
Short answer type questions:
1. Define wave motion.
2. Explain types of wave motion?
3. Differentiate between transverse and longitudinal waves.
4. Define amplitude and wavelength of a wave.
5. Give relation between time period and frequency of a wave.
6. Define Simple Harmonic Motion.
7. What is a cantilever?
8. Define acoustics of buildings.
9. What is Sabine‟s formula?
10. Define ultrasonic waves.
11. Establish the relation between velocity, frequency and wavelength?
12. Give full form of SONAR.
13. Name different types of vibrations.
14. What are resonant vibrations?
15. Explain damped and undamped vibrations?
Long answer questions:
1) Define wave motion? Explain transverse and longitudinal wave motion with examples.
2) Define the terms; wave velocity, frequency and wave length. Drive the relationship
between them.
3) Describe simple harmonic motion. Give its characteristics.
59
4) What is a cantilever? Write the formula for its time period.
5) What are acoustics and acoustics of buildings?
6) Explain the terms: reverberation, reverberation time and echo.
7) Define coefficient of absorption of sound? Give its units.
8) List various methods to control reverberation time.
9) Explain free, forced and resonant vibrations with examples.
10) What is ultrasonic wave? Explain their two engineering applications.
60
Fig. 8.1 Reflection of light
Chapter8
OPTICS
Learning Objectives: After studying this chapter the student should be able to;
- Understand light properties, reflection and refraction of light, lens parameters, lens
formula and power of a lens.
- Explain total internal reflection, conditions for TIR and its applications.
- Describe microscope, telescope and their uses.
Introduction
Optics is the branch of physics which deals with the study of behavior and properties
of light. Light is an electromagnetic wave having transverse nature. Although light has dual
nature; particle as well as wave, classical approach considers only wave nature. The wave
nature is further simplified in geometric optics, where light is treated as a ray which travels in
straight line. Ray optics model includes wave effects like diffraction, interference etc.
Quantum optics deals with application of light considered as particles (called photons) to the
optical systems. The phenomena of photoelectric effect, X-rays and lasers are explained in
the quantum optics (particle nature of light).
Ray Optics (Geometric optics)
Geometrical optics describes the propagation of light in terms of rays. The assumptions
of geometrical optics are:
 Light travels in straight-line paths.
 It bends, or split into part, at the interface between two different media.
 It follows curved paths in a medium where refractive index changes.
 It may be reflected, absorbed or transmitted.
8.1 REFLECTIONAND REFRACTION OF LIGHT
Reflection of Light
The phenomena of bouncing back of light after striking at a polished surface is called
as reflection
Glassy surfaces such as mirrors exhibit reflection. This allows for production of reflected
images that can be associated with real
or virtual location in space. Figure 8.1
depicts the phenomenon of reflection
from a glass-air interface. The light
ray incident on a glass mirror at an
angle i (angle of incident) and the
light ray reflected from the surface at
an angle r (angle of reflection).
61
Fig. 8.2 Refraction of light
Laws of reflection:
1) The incident ray, reflected ray and the normal, all lie in same plane, and
2) The angle of incidence is always equal to angle of refraction i.e. i =r
Refraction of light
When a light ray passes from one transparent medium to another, it gets deviated from its
original path while crossing the interface of two media. The phenomena of bending of light
rays from their original path while passing from one medium to another is called refraction.
 When light travels from a rarer
medium to denser medium, it bends
towards the normal.
 When light travels from a denser
medium to rarer medium, it bends
away from the normal.
It happens when light travels through
medium that has a changing index of
refraction. Refraction occurs due to change
in speed of light as it enters a different
media. Figure 8.2 describe the occurrence of
refraction at an interface.
Laws of refraction:
1) The incident ray, the refracted ray and the normal all lie in the same plane.
2) The ratio of sine of incidence angle (θ1) to the sine of refracted angle (θ2) is a constant for
that pair of media and is equal to the refractive index of that media. This is also known
as Snell’s law
1 1
2
2
sin sin
sin sin
i
r



 
Where „i‟ is the angle of incidence and „r' is the angle of refraction and1
2
 is the refractive
index of medium 2 w.r.t. medium 1.If medium 1 is vacuum then,
1
2
sin
sin




When light travels from air (vacuum) to a medium then refractive index of the medium can
be written as
v
c


where c is the velocity of light in air (vacuum) and v is the velocity of light in the medium.
For example, the refractive index of water is 1.333, meaning that light travels 1.333 times
slower in the water than in vacuum. Thus, the refractive index of a material is a
dimensionless number that describes how light propagates through that medium.
62
The Snell‟s law is used to find the deflection of light rays when they pass through
different media. It is used to produce dispersion spectra through a prism since light ray
having different frequencies have slightly different refractive index in most materials.
Lens and lens formula
Lens is an optical device based on phenomenon of refraction. A lens is a transparent
medium bounded by two refracting surfaces. It can produce two types of rays- converging
and diverging rays. Convex lens is converging while concave lens is diverging.
Terms related in study of lenses:
1. Centre of curvature: The center of curvature of a lens is the centre of sphere which
forms a part of the spherical surface of the lens.
2. Radius of curvature: The radius of the sphere of the spherical surface of lens is called
radius of curvature. It is the distance of the vertex of the lens from the center of
curvature.
3. Principal axis: The principal axis of a lens is an imaginary line that is perpendicular to
the vertical axis of the lens. Principal focus of the lens lies on this axis. All rays parallel
to the principal axis that are incident on the lens, would either converge (if lens is
converging) to, or diverge (if the lens is diverging) from, the principal focus.
4. Optical centre: Optical centre is the centre of the lens lying on the principal axis. If a
light ray passes through optical centre, it goes undeviated.
5. Principal focus: When the parallel rays are incident on a lens, they either meet or appear
to meet at a point on the principal axis, that point is called principal focus.
6. Focal length (f): The distance of principal focus from the optical centre is called focal
length. In other words, focal length is equal to the image distance when the object is at
infinity.
7. Image: If two or more rays passing from a point gets refracted through a lens and
converges or appears to diverge to a point then that point is called the image of first
point. The image can be real or virtual. In real image, rays actually meet at the second
point, while in virtual image; the rays appear to diverge from the second point.
Lens formula
The formula which gives relation between focal length (f), object distance (u) and image
distance (v) as
1 1 1
f v u
  This is called lens formula.
Linear magnification: the ratio of size of image to the size of object is called as linear
magnification of a lens. It is given by; m =
I
O
or
u
v
and holds for both convex and concave
lenses and for real as well as virtual images.
63
Fig. 8.3 Total internal reflection
Power of lens
The ability of a lens to converge or diverge the light rays is called as power of lens.
Mathematically, power of a lens is defined as the reciprocal of the focal length.
P =
f
1
(f is taken in metre)
The unit of power of lens is m-1
which is called dioptre and indicated by symbol „D‟. In other
words, one dioptre is the power of a lens of one metre focal length.
The power of a convex lens is positive and that of concave lens is negative. If two lenses are
combined (placed in contact), the focal length of the combination is given by
1 2
1 1 1
F f f
 
Thus the power of combination becomes sum of power of individual lenses. i.e.
P = P1 + P2
In general, P= P1 + P2+ P3 + ……….
8.2 TOTAL INTERNAL REFLECTION (TIR)
When light is goes from denser medium to rare medium and the angle of incidence is
greater than critical angle, the light get completely reflection in the same medium. This
phenomenon is known as total internal reflection.
There are two essential conditions for TIR:
1. The light should travel from a denser medium to a rarer medium.
2. The angle of incidence in the denser medium should be greater than the critical angle.
The angle of incidence for which the angle of refraction becomes 90o
is called as critical
angle (θc). At the critical angle of incidence, the refracted ray travels along the boundary
between the two media i.e. the angle of refraction becomes 900
. For angle of incidence
greater than critical angle light is totally reflected as shown in Fig. 8.3.
The critical angle for a material depends upon the refractive index. Higher the
refractive index, the lower the critical angle. It can be calculated using the following formula:
Sin c =

1
Where c is the critical angle and µ is the refractive index.
64
Fig. 8.4 A microscope Fig. 8.5 A Telescope
Applications of TIR
1. TIR is the basic principle of optical fibers which are used as transmission media in
sending telecommunication signals and images in endoscopes.
2. Automotive rain sensors work on the principle of TIR, which control automatic
windscreen wipers.
3. Prisms in binoculars also form erect images based on total internal reflection.
4. Some multi-touch screens also use TIR to pick up multiple targets.
5. Optical fingerprinting devices used to record fingerprints without the use of ink are
also based on TIR.
6. The bright shining of diamonds is also a result of total internal reflection.
7. Formation of mirage.
8.3 OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
An optical instrument is a device which is used to view the objects. The eye is natural
optical system. In addition to it, other instruments are devised to increase the range a human‟s
viewing ability. The optical instruments are an aid to the eye. They consist of an arrangement
of lenses, prisms or mirrors which enables to see better than what we can see with the naked
eye. These can be of two types:
1. When the real image is formed on screen as in case of photographic camera, overhead
projector etc.
2. When a virtual image is formed and can be seen directly with eye as in telescopes,
microscopes, binoculars etc.
a) Microscope: A microscope is an optical instrument which enables us to see magnified
image of very small objects. A microscopic object is invisible to the eye unless aided by a
microscope. Fig.8.4 shows the view of a microscope.
There are two types of microscope:
1. Simple microscope. It is also known as magnifying glass. It is made of only one
convex lens and the object is so adjusted before the focal point that the image is formed
at least distance of distinct vision.
2. Compound microscope. The magnification produced by a simple microscope is small
and is only governed by the focal length of lens. To produce large magnification, a
compound microscope is used in which magnification is obtained in two stages by the
use of two convex lenses.
65
Telescope: A telescope is an optical instrument which is used to see distant objects clearly.
There are three types of telescopes:
1. Astronomical: It is used to see astronomical heavenly objects like stars and planets.
The image formed in an astronomical telescope is inverted.
2. Terrestrial: Astronomical telescope forms an inverted image which is not suitable to
see the terrestrial objects like buildings, trees etc. For seeing the distant objects lying on
earth, the final image should be erect. A terrestrial telescope (Fig. 8.5) forms an erect
image and makes use of three convex lenses.
3. Galilean (modification of terrestrial telescope): It is a modified version of terrestrial
telescope which also forms erect image but with the use of only two lenses.
8.4 USES OF MICROSCOPE AND TELESCOPE
a) Uses of Microscope
1. Biological scientists use microscope to see microorganisms and their behavior.
2. Doctors use microscope to see and examine blood cells and bacteria.
3. Forensic science experts use microscope to analyze the evidences of crimes.
4. Jewelers and watch makers use it to see the details of parts they are working with.
5. Environmentalist uses it to test the soil and water samples for presence of pollutants.
6. Geologist uses it to test the composition of different types of rocks.
7. These are used in various laboratories.
b) Uses of Telescope
1. Astronomical objects are seen by using telescope by astronomers.
2. They found use in terrestrial applications also. They are used in laboratories to
perform different experiments and finding values of different quantities.
3. Spectrometry uses telescopes to find wavelength of light and spectral lines etc.
4. It is used in spy glasses and long focus camera lenses.
Solved Numericals
Numerical 1. A lens is having power of +4 D. What is its focal length?
Solution: Given, Power (P) = +4 D
We know that P =
f
1
Therefore, 4 =
f
1
or f = m
4
1
= 0.25 m = 25 cm
Thus, focal length of lens is 25 cm.
66
Numerical 2. An object is kept at distance of 30 cm from a convex lens of focal length 0.2 m.
Find the position of the image formed.
Solution: Given, distance of object, u = - 30 cm = - 0.3 m, and f = 0.2 m
The lens formula is
u
1
v
1
f
1


or
u
1
f
1
v
1

 =
)
3
.
0
(
1
2
.
0
1

 = 5-3.33 = 1.67
v =
67
.
1
1
= 0.598 = 0.6 m = 60 cm
Numerical 3. A light wave has wavelength of 600 nm in vacuum. What is the wavelength of
the light as it travels through water (index of refraction = 1.33)?
Solution:
Given, wavelength () = 600 nm = 600 ×10-9
m ( 1 nm = 10-9
m).
The wavelength of light that travels through a medium of refractive index n changes by
expression
n =
33
.
1
10
600 9



n

= 451× 10-9
m = 451 nm
* * * * * *
67
EXERCISES
Fill in the blanks and true/false
1. The speed of light in vacuum is _________.
2. Spectrum is formed due to _________of light.
3. A ________ lens is thick at centre and thin at ends.
4. A transparent medium bound by two curved surfaces is called ________ (lens/mirror).
5. A lens is an optical device based on ________ (reflection/ refraction).
6. Changing path of light while entering second medium is called ________.
7. Power of a lens is measured in __________ .
8. Power of a lens is inverse of __________ .
9. Simple microscope uses __________ (one/two) number of lens.
10. Simple microscope is also known as magnifying glass (True/ False).
11. Telescope that uses three lenses is called terrestrial telescope. (True / False)
12. An instrument that forms image on screen is called camera. (True / False)
13. Refractive index of a medium is constant. (True / False)
14. Two lenses are used in a simple microscope. (True / False)
Short answer questions:
1. Define reflection and state laws of reflection.
2. Define refraction and state laws of refraction.
3. Explain total internal reflection (TIR).
4. What is critical angle?
5. Define principal focus of a lens.
6. Write is lens formula.
7. Define power of a lens.
8. Give the relation between focal length and power of a lens.
Long answer questions:
1. Define refractive index? How it is related to Snell‟s law.
2. Describe total internal reflection. Give two applications of TIR.
3. What is critical angle? Explain conditions necessary for TIR.
4. What is a microscope? Give its types and uses.
5. What is a telescope? Give various uses of telescope.
68
Chapter 9
ELECTROSTATICS
Learning Objectives: After studying this chapter, the student should be able to;
- Understand fundamental of charges at rest, properties of point charges;
- Explain conservation and quantization of charges;
- Relate the properties leading charge storage capacity of the electronic devices using
static charges.
Electrostatics is the branch of physics which deals with the study of charges at rest.
9.1. ELECTRIC CHARGE
Electric Charge: it is the physical property of matter that causes it to experience force when
placed in an electromagnetic field. There are two types of charges.
(1) Positive charge: e.g. proton, alpha particle
(2) Negative charge: e.g. electron, etc.
Charge on electron is smallest unit of charge.
SI unit of charge is coulomb (C).
Like charges repel each other and unlike charges attract each other. i.e.
+ ve +ve Repel
-ve -ve Repel
+ve -ve Attract
-ve +ve Attract
Conservation of Charge
Charge conservation is the principle that total electric charge in an isolated system
always remains constant. This also means that no net charge can be created or destroyed.
When an atom is ionized, equal amounts of positive and negative charges are produced.
Hence the algebraic sum of charges before and after remains the same.
Quantization of Charges
Charge quantization is the principle that the total charge on any object is
an integral multiple of the elementary charge (e). Thus, an object's charge can be exactly
ne
 (i.e. 1 e, −1 e, 2 e, etc.).
Or Q = ne

9.2. COULOMB LAW OF ELECTROSTATICS
It states that force of interaction between two point charges is
(i) Directly proportional to magnitude of charges and
(ii) Inversely proportional to the square of the distance between them.
Charge on electron (e) = - 1.6 × 10-19
C
Charge on proton (P) = + 1.6 × 10-19
C
69
Let F is force between two charges q1 and q2. Then
1 2
F q q

2
1
F
r

1 2
2
q q
F
r

 ………(1)
1 2
2
q q
F K
r
 ………(2)
where K is constant of proportionality and its value is given as
0
1
4
K



= 9 × 109
Nm2
/C2
(in SI units system)
Now from equation (2)
1 2
2
0
4
q q
F
r



………..(3)
Here 0
 is electrical permittivity of vacuum. Its value is 8.854 × 10-12
N-1
m-2
C2
.
Let 1 2
= =
q q q (say)
and r = 1 m
then from equation (3), F = 9 × 109
N
Thus one coulomb is that much charge which produces a force of 9 × 109
N at a unit charge
placed at a distance of 1 m.
Smaller units of charge;
milli coulomb (mC) = 10-3
C.
micro coulomb (μC) = 10-6
C.
9.3. ELECTRIC FIELD
It is the space around the charge in which force of attraction or repulsion can be
experienced by another charge.
Electric field intensity
At point is defined as the force acting on a unit positive charge at that point.
0
F
E
q




The value of 0
q should be very small. Its SI unit is N /C (newton per coulomb)
Electric Lines of Force:
It is the path along which the isolated charge moves in electric field if it is free to do so.
These are imaginary continuous line in an electric field such that tangent to it at any point
gives the direction of electric force at that point (Fig. 9.2).
 A unit positive charge is also called
as test charge
q2
q1
r
Figure 9.1
70
Properties of electric lines of force
 Electric lines of force originate from a +ve charge and terminate to a -ve charge.
 The tangent to the line of force indicates the direction of the electric field and electric
force.
 Electric lines of force are always normal to the surface of charged body.
 Electric lines of force contract longitudinally and expand laterally.
 Two electric lines of force cannot intersect each other.
 Two electric lines of force proceeding in the same direction repel each other.
 Two electric lines of force proceeding in the opposite direction attract each other.
 There are no lines of force inside the conductor, so electric field inside conductor is
zero.
9.4. ELECTRIC FLUX
It is the measure of distribution of electric field through a given surface. Electric flux
is defined as total number of electric lines of force passing per unit area normal to the
surface. It is denoted by ϕ (phi).
Consider small elementary area ds


on a closed surface S. Electric field E

exit in the
space. If θ is the angle between E

and area vector ds


as then
EdS
  


 is called electric flux.
GAUSS’S LAW
It states that net electric flux of an electric field over a closed surface is equal to the net
charge enclosed by the surface divided by 0
 i.e.
+
-
Proof: Consider a closed surface S having a charge q
placed at a point O inside a closed surface as shown in
Fig. 9.3. Take a point P on the surface and consider a
small area ds around P .
Let OP r

P
ds


dω
r
θ E

ds
O
0
cos
S
q
Eds
 

 


.
E ds
  




Figure 9.3
Figure 9.2
71
Then Electric field at P is
2
0
4
q
E
r



…………(1)
Now electric flux
cos
S
Eds
 
 

Putting value of E we get
2
0
cos
4
S
q
ds
r
 

 

2
0
cos
4 S
q ds
r



 

0
4 S
q
d
 

 

0
.4
4
q
 

 4
Total Solid angle 


0
q
 

Hence,
0
cos
S
q
Eds
 

 


Applications of Gauss’s Law:
Electric field due to a point charge:
Now flux
0
cos
S
q
Eds
 

 


0
S
q
E ds




2
0
.4
q
E r

 

( Area of Sphere = 2
4 r
 )
2
0
4
q
E
r

 

Thus the electric intensity decreases with increase in distance.
2
cos
ds
d
r




is Small Solid Angle
ds
E

r
Consider a point charge q . We want to find
electric field at point P at a distance of r from it.
Construct a spherical surface of radius r . This is
called as Gaussian surface. Consider small area
dS on the surface. Let θ is angle between E

and
Area vector as shown in Fig. 9.4.
.
( θ = 0)
Figure 9.4
72
9.5. CAPACITOR
Capacitor is an electronic component that stores electric charge.
Capacitance
Of a capacitor is defined as the ability of a capacitor to store the electric charge.
As potential is proportional to charge
V q

or q V

q CV
q
C
V


Unit of capacitance: farad (F), microfarad
Grouping of Capacitors
Series Grouping:
A number of capacitors are said be connected in series if -ve plate of one capacitor is
connected to the +ve plate of other capacitor and so on. In this grouping, current is same on
each capacitor.
Consider three capacitors of capacitances C1, C2, C3 in series. Let V is total applied voltage.
If V1, V2, V3 → voltage drops across C1, C2, C3 as shown in fig. 9.5.
Figure 9.5
Then V = V1+V2+V3 ----------------- (1)
Now
V
q
C  
C
q
V 
So,
1
1
C
q
V  ,
2
2
C
q
V  ,
3
3
C
q
V 
Putting in Equation (1)
3
2
1 C
q
C
q
C
q
C
q














3
2
1 C
1
C
1
C
1
C
q
q
3
2
1 C
1
C
1
C
1
C
1



So the total capacitance decreases in series grouping.
73
The reciprocal of the equivalent capacitance of two capacitors connected in series is the sum
of the reciprocals of the individual capacitances.
Parallel Grouping:
A number of capacitors are said to be connected in parallel if +ve plate of each
capacitor is connected to the +ve terminal of battery and –ve plate of each capacitor is
connected to the –ve terminal of battery. In this grouping voltage across each capacitor in
same.
Consider three capacitors of capacitances C1, C2, C3 connected in parallel and V is applied
voltage.
q1, q2, q3 charges on capacitors C1, C2, C3 as shown in fig. 9.6
Figure 9.6
So
q = q1 + q2 +q3 ------------------ (1)
Now
V
q
C  or q = CV
 q1 = C1 V, q2 = C2V, q3 = C3V
Put in equation (1)
CV = C1V + C2V + C3V
CV = (C1 + C2 + C3) V
C = C1 + C2 + C3
So the total capacitance increases in parallel grouping.
The equivalent capacitance of capacitors connected in parallel is sum of the individual
capacitance.
74
Solved Numerical
Example 1. Calculate the Coulomb force between two protons separated by a distance of
1.6× 10–15
m.
Solution: Given, 2 protons;
Charge on Proton = 1.6 × 10–19
C
Thus, q1 = q2 = 1.6 × 10–19
C
Distance, r = 1.6 × 10–15
m
Also 2
2
9
0
/C
Nm
10
×
9
4
1


Now 2
2
1
0 r
q
q
4
1
F


 
10
6
.
1
10
6
.
1
10
6
.
1
10
9
2
15
19
19
9










F
F = 90 N
Example 2. Calculate the force between an alpha particle and a proton separated by distance
of 5.12×10–15
m.
Solution: Given, q1 = Charge on alpha particle = 2 × 1.6 × 10–19
C
q2 = Charge on proton = 1.6 × 10–19
C
distance, r = 5.12 × 10-15
m
2
2
9
/C
Nm
10
9
4
1


o

Now
2
2
1
0 r
q
q
4
1


F
 
9 19 19
2
15
9 10 3.2 10 1.6 10
5.12 10
F
 

    


F = 17.58 N
Example 3. Three capacitors of capacitances 3 F, 2 F and 4 F are connected with each
other. Calculate total capacitance (a) in Series grouping (b) in Parallel grouping.
Solution: Given,
C1 = 3 F, C2 = 2 F and C3 = 9 F
In Series grouping
C
1
C
1
C
1
C
1
3
2
1
tot



75
9
1
2
1
3
1
C
1
tot



= F

18
17
 Ctot =
18
1.06 F
17


In Parallel grouping
Ctot = C1 + C2 + C3
Ctot = 3 + 2 + 9
Ctot = 14 F
Example 4.Three capacitors 1 F, 2 F, and 3 F are joined in series first and then in parallel.
Calculate the ratio of equivalent capacitance in two cases.
Solution: Given,
C1 = 1 F, C2 = 2 F, C3 = 3 F
In series grouping
3
2
1 C
1
C
1
C
1
1



S
C
3
1
2
1
1
1
1



S
C
6
11
1

S
C
 F
11
6
C 
In Parallel grouping
Cp = C1 + C2 + C3
Cp = 1 + 2 + 3
Cp = 6F
 Ratio
11
6
6

S
C
Cp
or 11

S
C
Cp
76
EXERCISES
Fill in the blanks
1) As per Coulomb's law, force of attraction or repulsion between two point charges is
……………… proportional to product of the magnitude of charges.
2) A device which stores charge is called ………………..
3) 1 micro farad (1 µF) is equal to …………… farad.
4) SI unit of charge is ……………………
5) The unit of capacitance is ......................
6) Unit of electric field intensity is ...................
Short Answer Questions
1. Define electric field.
2. What are electric lines of force?
3. Define the term capacitance.
4. What is electric flux?
5. Define capacitor.
6. What do you mean by electric potential?
7. Define electric intensity.
8. Explain properties of electric lines of force.
9. Explain Gauss's law.
10. Define electric charge and its types.
11. Find the total capacitance when three capacitors each of 2 F are joined in (i) series,
(ii) parallel?
12. What will be Coulomb's force between 2 point charges 10 µC and 5 µC placed at a
distance of 150 cm?
Long Answer Type Question
1. Calculate total capacitance when capacitors are connected in series and parallel
grouping.
2. State and prove Gauss law.
3. Using Gauss theorem find electric field intensity due to a point charge.
4. State Coulomb‟s law of electrostatics.
5. The force between two charges is 120 N. What will be the force, if the distance
between the charges is doubled?
77
Chapter 10
CURRENT AND ELECTRICITY
Learning Objectives: After studying this chapter, the learner should be able to;
- Describe electric current and types of current; AC and DC.
- Define resistance, combination of resistances; series and parallel.
- State Ohm’s law, Kirchhoff’s law and their applications
10.1 ELECTRIC CURRENT AND ITS UNITS
In a conductor, there are many free electrons. These electrons are in random motion
but there is no net motion along the conductor. But if the two ends of a conductor are at
different potentials, the charge will start flowing from one end of conductor to the other end.
Therefore, the free electrons (charge) which were moving randomly will now move towards
positive terminal of the battery and constitute a current. Hence a potential difference is
always needed to make charge move from one end of the conductor to the other end of the
conductor.
In a conductor the motion of the free electrons give rise to the electric current as shown in
Fig. 10.1.
+ -
Figure 10.1
Electric current passing through a conductor is the rate of flow of charge passing through it.
If a charge of q units passes through any cross section of the conductor in t seconds. The
current (I) flowing through the wire is given by the formula
arg
Ch e q
I
time t
 
The direction of current is the direction of flow of positive charge i.e. opposite to the
direction of flow of electron.
Unit: ampere (A)
In the relation
q
I
t

If the charge is measured in coulombs and time is measured in seconds then the unit of
current will be ampere.
Where 1 ampere (A) =
1 c
1 sec
oulomb
One Ampere: The current flowing through the conductor is said to be of one ampere if one
coulomb of charge flows through the conductor in one second.
Conductor
78
Electric Potential difference (V)
Electric potential between two points is defined as the work done in moving a unit
positive charge from one point to other against the electric field.
SI unit: volt (V)
One Volt:
1 j
1
1 c
oule
V
oulomb

So, electric potential difference is said to be 1 V, if 1 J work is done in moving 1 C charge
from one point to another point. It is defined as energy consumption of one joule per electric
charge of one coulomb.
Direct Current (DC)
Direct current in an electric wire is that which flow in only one direction. It is the
unidirectional flow of current. The electric current flowing through a semi-conductor diode is
an example of direct current. Direct current (DC) is produced by sources such as batteries,
fuel cells and solar cells and cannot travel over long distances since it has more loss of
energy.
The frequency of DC is zero and it has a single polarity. In direct current the electron
flows from negative end of the battery to the positive end of the battery.
Symbol of DC voltage source
It can be shown as Fig. 10.2.
DC form is used in low voltage apparatus like charging batteries,
cell phones, automotive apparatus, aircraft apparatus and other
low voltage low current apparatus.
Alternating current (AC)
AC is current that reverses the direction
periodically and also has a magnitude that varies
continuously with time.
AC is used in our homes. Power stations
generate AC because it is easy to low and raise the
voltage with the help of transformers. In North
America the frequency of AC is 60 Hz and in India
it is 50 Hz. The AC in our home is sinusoidal in nature.
The radio frequency current in antennas and transmission lines are the examples of AC.
Figure 10.2
Figure 10.3
79
Symbol of AC
It is produced by an alternator and has more power and can be easily transferred from one
place to another.
10.2 OHM’S LAW
According to Ohm‟s law “The current flowing through a conductor is always directly
proportional to the potential difference between the two ends if the physical condition
(temperature, pressure etc.) of the conductor remains the same”.
If I is the current passing through a
conductor and V is the potential difference
between the ends of the conductor having
resistance R, then
V α I
V = R I
V
R
I

Therefore,
V
R
I
 =
potential differnce
electric current
where R is a constant and is called electric
resistance.
The value of R depends upon nature, dimension
and temperature of the conductor.
V = I R
Therefore
V
I
R

If a graph is drawn between current (I) and the
potential difference (V) it will be a straight line for a
conductor (Fig. 10.5).
10.3 RESISTANCE (R)
The opposition to the flow of electric current in an electric circuit is called resistance.
Therefore, it is the measure of the difficulty to pass an electric current through the circuit.
c
V potential difference
R
I electric urrent
 
If V is measured in volts and I is measured in amperes then the resistance R is measured in
ohms.
Symbol:
Figure 10.5
Figure 10.4
80
Unit: ohms (Ω)
One ohm:
1 v
1
1
olt
ohm
ampere

Therefore, one ohm is the resistance of conductor in which a current of one ampere
flows through it when the potential difference of one volt is maintained between its two ends.
Specific Resistance (Definition and Units)
The resistance of a conductor depends on following factors;
(i) The resistance of a given conductor is directly proportional to its length i.e.
R l
 ............ (1)
ii) The resistance of a given conductor is inversely proportional to its area of cross-section.
1
R
A
 ........... (2)
By combining equation (1) and (2), we get
l
R
A

or
l
R
A


where ρ (rho) is a constant and known as specific resistance or resistivity of the
material. The resistivity of a material does not depend on its length or thickness. It depends
on the nature of the material.
If l = 1 m and A = 1 m2
then from above equation
ρ = R
Thus resistivity of the material is the resistance of a conductor having unit length and unit
area of cross- section.
Units: ohm-m (Ωm)
Conductivity: It is the degree to which an object conducts electricity. This is the reciprocal
of the resistivity,



1
Where, σ is the conductivity and ρ is the resistivity of the conductor.
Unit: siemens per metre or mho per metre
Conductance (G): It is the reciprocal of the resistance and it is a measure of ease with which
the current flows through an object.
G =
1
R
where G = Conductance
R = Resistance
Unit: mho
81
10.4 COMBINATION OF RESISTANCES
1. Series combination
The resistance are said to be connected in series if the same current passes through all
the resistances and the potential difference is different across each resistance.
Let three resistances R1, R2, R3 be connected in series as shown in the Fig. 10.6
Figure 10.6
Let
V = Voltage applied across the series combination
I = Current passing through the circuit
Clearly current I is same throughout the circuit
Let V1, V2, V3 be the potential difference across R1, R2, R3 respectively. Then, according to
Ohm‟s law
V = I R
where R is the total resistance in series
Now
V = V1 + V2 + V3 --------------- (1)
Then by Ohm‟s law
V1 = I R1
V2 = I R2
V3 = I R3
Putting the values of V1, V2 and V3 in equation (1) we get
IR = I R1+I R2 +I R3
IR = I (R1 +R2 + R3)
R = (R1+R2+ R3)
Thus the combined resistances when they are connected in series is the sum total of the
individual resistances.
2. Parallel Combination
The resistances are said to be connected in parallel if the potential difference across
each resistance is the same but the current passing through each resistance is different.
Let there be three resistances R1, R2, R3 connected in parallel as shown in Fig. 10.7. One end
of each resistance is connected to point A and the other end of each resistance is connected to
the point B.
V1 V2 V3
V
82
Figure 10.7
Let
V = potential difference applied across A and B (same across each resistance)
I = total current flowing in the circuit.
R = total resistance of the circuit
Let I1, I2, I3 be the current passing through the resistances R1, R2, R3 respectively.
From Ohm‟s law applied to the whole circuit
1
1
V
I
R

2
2
V
I
R

3
3
V
I
R

Now we have,
I = I1+ I2+ I3 ----------------------- ( 2 )
Putting the values of I, I1, I2, I3 in the equation (2)
1 2 3
V V V V
R R R R
  
1 2 3
1 1 1 1
V V
R R R R
 
  
 
 
Or
1 2 3
1 1 1 1
R R R R
  
Thus we can say that if the resistances are connected in parallel, then the reciprocal of the
equivalent resistance is equal to the sum of reciprocals of individual resistances in the circuit.
10.5 HEATING EFFECT OF ELECTRIC CURRENT
When an electric current is passed through a conductor, the conductor becomes hot
after some time and produces heat. This effect of electric current is called heating effect of
current. This happens due to the conversion of some electric energy passing through the
conductor into heat energy.
The heating effect of current was studied experimentally by Joule in 1941. After
doing this experiments, Joule came to the conclusion that the heat produced in a conductor is
B
A
83
directly proportional to the product of square of current (I2
), resistance of the conductor (R)
and the time (t) for which current is passed. Thus,
H = I2
Rt
Derivation of Formula
To calculate the heat produced in a conductor, consider current I is flowing through a
conductor of resistance R for time t. Also consider that the potential difference applied across
its two ends is V.
Now, total amount of work done in moving a charge q from point A to point B is given by:
W = q × V ------------------ (1)
Now, we know that charge = current x time
or q = I × t
and V = I × R (Ohm‟s law)
Putting the values of q and V in equation (1), we get
W = (I × t) × (I × R)
or W = I2
Rt
Now, assuming that all the work done is converted into heat energy we can replace symbol of
„work done‟ with that of „heat produced‟. So,
H = I2
Rt
Applications of Heating Effect of Current
The heating effect of current is used in various electrical heating appliances such as
electric bulb, electric iron, room heaters, geysers, electric fuse etc.
10.6 ELECTRIC POWER
Electric power is the rate per unit time at which electric energy is transferred or
consumed by an electric circuit.
W
P
t

Or P = V I
Where, V is the applied voltage and I is the current flowing through the circuit. SI unit of
power is watt (W).
Now P = V I
If, V = 1 volt (1 V) and I = 1 ampere (1 A), then,
P = 1 watt
Thus, power is said to be 1 watt, if a potential difference of 1 volt causes 1 ampere of
current to flow through the circuit.
Bigger units of electric power are kilowatt (kW) and megawatt (MW)
10.7 KIRCHHOFF’S LAWS
These two rules are commonly known as: Kirchhoff‟s circuit laws with one of
Kirchhoff‟s laws dealing with the current flowing in a closed circuit, Kirchhoff‟s current law
(KCL); while the other law deals with the voltage sources present in a closed circuit,
Kirchhoff‟s voltage law, (KVL).
84
(i) Kirchhoff’s First Law (Kirchhoff’s Current Law) KCL
The law states that “The algebraic sum of all the currents meeting at any junction point in an
electric circuit is zero”
Σ I = 0
Let us suppose the currents I1, I2, I3 entering
the junction are all positives in value and the two
currents I4, I5 are leaving the junction are negative in
values (Fig. 10.8), then according to KCL
I1 + I2 + I3 - I4 - I5 = 0
Or I1 + I2 + I3 = I4 + I5
or Sum of incoming currents = sum of outgoing currents Figure 10.8
(ii) Kirchhoff’s Second Law (Kirchhoff’s Voltage Law) KVL
The law states that “In any closed loop of a circuit, the algebraic sum of products of
the resistances and currents plus the algebraic sum of all the e.m.f. in that circuit is zero”.
In any closed circuit; Σ E + ΣIR = 0
Here we use two sign conventions (Fig. 10.9).
1. If we go from negative terminal of the
battery to the positive terminal then
there is rise in potential and it is
considered positive. And if we go from
positive terminal to negative terminal,
there is fall of potential and it is
considered as negative.
2. If we go with the current, voltage drop is
negative and if we go against the current, the
voltage drop is positive.
In the closed loop ABCD using KVL we get
- E2 - IR1 - IR2 + E1 = 0
Solved Numerical
Example 1. An source of emf 6 V is connected to a resistive lamp and a current of 2 ampere
flows. What is the resistance of lamp?
Solution. Given, V = 6 V and I = 2 A
From Ohm‟s law, we know, V = I R or R = V/I
R = 6/2 = 3Ω
Figure 10.9
85
Example 2. An electric fan has a resistance of 100 ohms. It is plugged into potential
difference of 220 V. How much current passes through the fan?
Solution. Given, R = 100 ohm and V = 220 V
We know, I =V/R = 220/100
Therefore I =2.2 A
Example 3. Calculate the total resistance, if three resistances of 1 ohm, 2 ohm and 3 ohm are
connected in series.
Solution. Given, R1 = 1 ohm,
R2 = 2 ohm
R3 = 3 ohm
We know that in series combination; R = R1 + R2 + R3
Therefore R = 1 + 2 + 3 = 6 ohm
Example 4. Calculate the total resistance if three resistances of 4 ohm, 1 ohm and 6 ohm are
connected in parallel.
Solution. Given, R1 = 4 ohm
R2 = 1 ohm
R3 = 6 ohm
Form formula we know in parallel combination
1 2 3
1 1 1 1
R R R R
  
Hence
1 1 1 1
4 1 6
R
  
Therefore, total resistance, R
12
17
 ohm
* * * * * *
86
EXERCISE
Fill in the blanks
1) The resistance of the wire is inversely proportional to .................
2) The formula of specific resistance of a wire is ………………
3) Product of voltage and current is known as ………….
4) SI unit of electric potential is ....................
5) SI unit of resistance is ..........
6) The reciprocal of conductance is ...................
7) SI unit of specific resistance is ....................
Short answer question
1. Define electric current.
2. Define resistance.
3. Define specific resistance.
4. What is conductance?
5. Explain alternating current and direct current.
6. Explain ohm‟s law.
7. Write short note on electric power.
8. Explain Kirchhoff‟s laws.
9. If a wire is stretched to double of its length. What will be the new resistivity?
Long Answer type questions
1. Calculate the total resistance when resistances are connected in series and parallel.
2. Explain heating effect of current. Derive the formula for it and what are its
applications?
3. a) Three resistors 1 Ω, 2 Ω and 3 Ω are combined in series. What is the total resistance
of the combination?
b) If the combination is connected to a battery of emf 12 V and negligible internal
resistance, obtain the potential drop across each resistor.
4. Differentiate between AC and DC.
5. Explain Kirchhoff‟s law of current (KCL) and Kirchhoff‟s law of voltage (KVL).
6. If the resistance of a circuit is 12Ω and the current of 4 A passes through it calculate
the potential difference. [Ans 48 V]
7. Electric fan takes a current of 0.5 amp when operated on a 200 V supply. Find the
resistance. [Ans 440 ohm]
8. Current of 0.75 A, when a battery of 1.5 V is connected to wire of 5 m having cross
sectional area 2.5 × 10-7
m², what will be the resistivity?
9. Calculate the total resistance when three resistances of 4 ohm, 8 ohm and 12 ohm are
connected in series. [ Ans 24 ohm ]
10. Calculate the total resistance when resistances of 2 ohm and 2 ohm are connected in
parallel. [ Ans 1 ohm ]
11. Calculate the power generated in a current of 2 A passes through a conductor having a
potential difference of 220 V. [ Ans 440 W ]
87
Chapter 11
ELECTROMAGNETISM
Learning Objectives: After studying this chapter, students will be able to;
- Understand the magnetic field associated with flow of current and related parameters
- Classify materials on basis of magnetic properties
- Describe magnetic flux and magnetic lines of force
11.1 ELECTROMAGNETISM
Electromagnetism or magnetism in general is the study of production of magnetic field
when current is passed through a conductor. Various terms associated with magnetism are;
Magnetization (I)
It represents the extent to which a material is magnetized when placed in a magnetic
field. It is given by magnetic moment per unit volume of material.
where, M is magnetic moment and V is volume of the material.
Unit: ampere/metre
Magnetic Intensity (H):
It is the capability of magnetic field to magnetize a magnetic material.
Magnetic Permeability (μ):
It is property of material and defined as the degree to which magnetic lines of force
can penetrate the medium.
Magnetic susceptibility (χ):
It is a property which determines how easily a specimen can be magnetised. It is given
by ratio of magnetization and magnetic Intensity.
H
I


Types of Magnetic Materials:
On the basis of behaviour of magnetic material in magnetic field, the materials are
divided in to three categories:
1. Diamagnetic materials:
The materials when placed in magnetic field, acquire magnetism opposite to the
direction of magnetic field (Fig. 11.1). The magnetic dipoles in these substances tend to align
opposite to the applied field and tend to repel the external field around it.
 Diamagnetic substances have tendency to move from stronger to the weaker magnetic
field.
V
M
I 
88
 When rod of diamagnetic material is placed in magnetic field, it aligns perpendicular
to the magnetic field.
 Permeability of diamagnetic material is < 1.
Examples; gold, water, mercury, graphite, lead etc
Fig 11.1
2. Paramagnetic materials:
Paramagnetic substances are those which get weakly magnetized when placed in an
external magnetic field (Fig. 11.2). These materials show weak attraction in magnetic field.
The magnetic dipoles in the magnetic materials tend to align along the applied magnetic field.
Such materials show weak feeble magnetization and the magnetization disappears as soon as
the external field is removed.
 Permeability of paramagnetic material is > 1.
 The magnetization (I) of such materials dependent on the external magnetic field (B)
and temperature (T) as:
T
B
C
I 
Where C is the Curie constant.
Examples: sodium, platinum, liquid oxygen, salts of iron and nickel.
Fig 11.2
Ferromagnetic materials:
Ferromagnetic substances are those which get strongly magnetized when placed in an
external magnetic field. They exhibit the strongest attraction in magnetic field. Magnetic
dipoles in these materials are arranged into domains.
89
(a) (b)
Figure 11.3
These domains are usually randomly oriented as shown in Fig. 11.3 (a) and net
magnetism is zero in the absence of magnetic field. When an external field is applied, the
domains reorient themselves to reinforce the external field as shown in Fig. 11.3 (b) and
produce a strong internal magnetic field that is along the external field. These materials show
magnetism on removal of magnetic field.
Examples are iron, cobalt, nickel, neodymium and their alloys. These are usually
highly ferromagnetic and are used to make permanent magnets.
11.2 MAGNETIC FIELD
The space around a magnetic material or a moving electric charge within which the
force of magnetism can be experienced. The direction of a magnetic field within a magnet is
from south to north and outside the magnet is north to south.
Unit: tesla (Wb/m2
)
Figure 11.4
Magnetic lines of force:
Curved lines used to represent a magnetic field, drawn such that the number of
lines relates to the magnetic field's strength at a given point (Fig. 11.4).
Properties of magnetic lines of force
(i) The magnetic field lines of a magnet forms continuous closed loops.
(ii) The tangent to the field line at a given point represents the direction of the net
magnetic field (B) at that point.
(iii) Larger the number of field lines crossing per unit area, the stronger is the magnitude
of the magnetic field (B).
90
(iv) Their density decreases with increasing distance from the poles.
(v) The magnetic field lines do not intersect with each other.
(vi) They flow from the South pole to the North pole within a material and North pole to
South pole in air.
Magnetic flux:
The total number of magnetic field lines crossing through given surface area (S) held
perpendicular to direction of magnetic field (B).
 = B S cos
Unit: The SI unit of magnetic flux is the weber (Wb)
Magnetic Intensity:
It is the amount of magnetic flux in a unit area perpendicular to the direction of magnetic
flow.
11.3 ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION
The phenomenon of producing an induced e.m.f. in a conductor by changing magnetic
flux linked with it is electromagnetic induction.
When the speed at which a conductor is moved through a magnetic field is increased, the
induced voltage increases and vice versa.
Electromagnetic Induction is used in
 Electrical motor
 Generator to produce AC electricity.
 Induction cooker
 Metal detector
 Inductors and transformers
 Induction welding
 Inductive charging
* * * * * *
91
EXERCISES
Fill in the blanks
1) The direction of a magnetic field within a magnet is ........... to ..................
2) When the speed at which a conductor is moved through a magnetic field is increased,
the induced voltage ............... (increases/ decreases)
3) Total number of magnetic field lines passing through an area is called ...........
4) Example for para-magnetic materials is …………………
5) Example for ferro-magnetic materials ……………….
Short Answer type question
1. Define magnetic flux and write its unit.
2. Define electromagnetic induction with example
3. Define magnetic field.
4. What is unit of magnetic field?
5. Define magnetic susceptibility?
Write applications of electromagnetic induction. .
6. Define magnetic field intensity.
7. What is the relation between magnetization and magnetic field?
Long Answer Questions
1. What are magnetic lines of force? Write their properties.
2. Explain type of magnetic materials.
3. Explain ferromagnetic materials with their magnetic domains theory.
4. Explain difference between electric field and magnetic field.
5. Differentiate between paramagnetic and ferromagnetic materials with examples.
6. What is electromagnetic induction? Give its application.
92
Ground State
Metastable State
Excited State
E1
E2
E0
Chapter 12
SEMICONDUCTOR PHYSICS
Learning Objectives: After studying this chapter, students should be able to;
- Understand concept of energy levels and energy bands in solids,
- Describe semiconductor materials, their types and doping,
- Explain semiconductor junctions, junction diodes, and transistors,
12.1 ENERGY LEVEL AND ENERGY BANDS
Energy Levels:
In an atom, electrons cannot revolve in any direction, but are confined to well defined
energy states. These states are called energy levels.
There are three types of energy levels:
1. Ground level: This refers to the lowest energy state in the system (E0). Thus the
completely de-excited atoms would occupy this level.
2. Excited level: any level above the ground state is excited state (E1). The atom can stay in
excited state only for 10-8
s. After this time the atom will lose its energy in the form of
radiation and come back to ground state.
3. Metastable level: This level (E2) lies in between the excited (E1) and ground levels (E0).
Its lifetime is 100 times more than excited state.
Energy bands:
If two atoms are brought closer to form a solid, the energy levels get modified due to
mutual interactions. Each energy level split into two levels, one having energy higher than the
original level and another having lower energy.
93
Figure 12.1
Now when a large number of atoms (n) come closer to each other, each energy level
splits into a large number of levels. As a result a large number of discrete but closely spaced
energy levels are formed. These are called energy bands. The inner shells however remain
unaffected by neighbouring atoms, because, they are shielded by the outer electrons of their
own atoms.
The highest energy band occupied by the valence electrons is called the valence
band. Above this band there lies an empty band called the conduction band. These bands
are separated by an energy gap known as forbidden gap (Eg) as shown in Fig. 12.1.
12.2 TYPES OF MATERIALS
On the basis of the forbidden gap (Eg), the material can be divided into following
categories (Fig.12.2).
Insulators: These are poor conductors of electricity. Forbidden gap for these materials is Eg
= 5 - 9 eV. The energy gap between valence band and conduction band is very large. Hence
valence electrons will not be freed and no current will flow. Examples are paper, wood,
plastics etc.
Figure 12.2
94
Conductors: Metals or good conductors are those substances which can conduct heat and
electricity through them easily as there are many free electrons. In case of conductors Eg = 0
i.e. valence band and the conduction band overlap each other. Examples are Copper,
Aluminium, Gold etc.
Semiconductors: The conductivity of a semiconductor lies between that of conductors and
insulators. In case of semiconductors, Eg is of the order of 1 -2 eV.
At absolute zero temperature, the conduction band is totally empty and there is no
flow of current. So these materials act as insulators at room temperature. But at the higher
temperature, some valence electrons acquire sufficient energy to go in the conduction band.
So at higher temperatures these materials start working as conductors. Even a small electric
field can cause a flow of current in such materials. Examples are Silicon (Si), Germanium
(Ge).
12.3 INTRINSIC AND EXTRINSIC SEMICONDUCTORS
Intrinsic Semiconductors: A semiconductor, which is quite pure and completely free from
any impurity, is called an intrinsic semiconductor. E.g. Silicon (Si) and Germanium (Ge).
Figure 12.3
Doping:
The process of adding desirable impurity to a semiconductor is called doping and the
impurity atoms added are called dopants.
Extrinsic Semiconductors
A doped semiconductor is called an extrinsic semiconductor. On the basis of doping,
semiconductors are of two types
n-Type Semiconductor:
When a small amount of pentavalent impurity (e.g. Phosphorous, Arsenic etc.) is
added to an intrinsic semiconductor (Si or Ge), it provides a large numbers of free electrons.
The semiconductor is then, called n-type semiconductor.
They have four valence electrons. Each of the four
electrons forms covalent bond with neighbouring four
atoms. By forming such covalent bonds, there is no
free electron at absolute zero temperature. At room
temperature some electrons break away from the
covalent bond and enter into the conduction band.
Each electron leaves behind a vacancy known as hole.
Hence in pure semiconductors both electrons
and holes constitute current and the numbers of these
two types of charge carriers are equal i.e. ne = nh
95
Because impurity atom has five valence electrons, four of these will form covalent
bonds, but one excess electron will be left free. Hence the current carriers are electrons.
Therefore majority carriers are negatively charge electrons while the holes are minority
carriers.
In an n-type semiconductor, number of electrons is much larger than the number of holes,
i.e. ne>>nh
n-type semiconductor p-type semiconductor
Figure 12.4
p-Type Semiconductor:
When a small amount of trivalent impurity (e.g. Boron, Aluminium etc.) is added to
intrinsic semiconductor, it creates a large number of holes in valence band. The
semiconductor is called a p-type semiconductor.
When a trivalent impurity is added to semiconductor, its three valence electrons form
covalent bonds with three neighbouring atoms, while the fourth bond has a deficiency of
electron. Thus there is a vacancy, which acts as a hole that tends to accept electrons.
The number of holes is greater than the number of electrons, i.e. nh>>ne
Hence, in p-type semiconductors, holes are the majority carriers and electrons are the
minority carriers.
p-n junction Diode
A single crystal of silicon or germanium that has been doped in such a way that half
of it is a p-type and the other half an n-type semi-conductor is known as a p-n junction diode.
The junction is called p-n junction as shown in Fig.12.5.
Figure 12.5
p n
Vb
96
Characteristics of p-n Junction Diode
The graph (Fig. 12.7) showing the variation of the current flowing through the
junction, when the voltage is applied across the junction diode in forward biased and reverse
biased, is known as characteristic curve of a p-n junction diode.
Forward bias characteristic: the p-n junction diode is said to be forward biased if the
positive terminal of battery is connected to the p-type and the negative terminal to the n-type
of semiconductoras shown in Fig. 12.6.
Figure 12.6
Figure 12.7
Reverse bias characteristic:
The p-n junction diode is said to be
reverse biased if the negative terminal of the
external source is connected to the p-type and the
positive terminal to the n-type of semiconductor
as shown in Fig 12.8.
Knee Voltage
p n
Vb
Let V is the voltage applied.
This pushes the majority
carriers, the holes in the p-type
and electrons in the n-type
towards the p-n junction.
If V > VB, then the majority
carriers from both sides are able
to diffuse across the junction and
a current is set up in the circuit.
This process decreases the
thickness of the depletion layers.
The diode offers a low resistance
to the flow of current.
A minimum amount of
voltage required so that a current
start flowing is known as the
knee voltage. The current starts
following at point A (knee
voltage).
p n
V
b
Figure 12.8
97
The external voltage pulls the majority carriers holes in the p-type crystal and the
electrons in the n-type crystal away from the junction. This increases the width of depletion
layer. The diode offers very high resistance and no current is set up across the junction due to
majority carriers. However, a small current may be there across the junction due to minority
carriers. It is called leakage current (Is).
12.4 DIODE AS A RECTIFIER
The rectifier is an electronic device which converts alternating current (AC) into direct
current (DC).
Half wave rectifier:
Half wave rectifier convert AC in to DC for only half of the input cycle. The circuit
diagram for half wave rectifier using the p-n diode is as shown. During the first half cycle of
AC the diode operates under a forward bias and current flows through the load RL. During the
other half, the diode becomes reverse bias and no current flows through the load RL. Thus we
get a rectified, unidirectional current across RL and only half of the AC signal wave is
rectified. The half wave rectifier gives output only for half cycle, hence power loss is high.
Figure 12.9
Full wave rectifier:
Full wave rectifier converts AC in to DC for complete cycle of input wave. The
circuit diagram for full wave rectifier is shown. The center tap transformer is used. Two
diodes are connected across the secondary of the transformer, the middle point of which is
tapped at T. During the first half of the AC cycle, one end of the secondary say A becomes
positive and B becomes negative. Diode D1 is forward biased and diode D2 is reverse bias.
Thus a current flows through the diode D1 and output is obtained across RL.
Figure 12.10
98
Now, during the other half of AC cycle, end B becomes positive and the end A
becomes negative and the current flows through the diode D2. Thus, during both halves, the
current through the load RL is in the same direction and full wave rectification of AC is
achieved.
12.5 SEMICONDUCTOR TRANSISTOR
The transistor is composed of three semiconductor elements. One type of semiconductor
is sandwiched between two types of semiconductors. So, basically transistor is combination
of two pn-junctions joined back to back (Fig. 12.11). If n-type semiconductor is sandwiched
between two p-type semiconductors, this is known as p-n-p transistor.
Figure 12.11
If p-type semiconductor is sandwiched between two n-type semiconductors then this is
known as n-p-n transistor. In the circuit symbols of a transistor, only emitter has an arrow to
indicate that it is the supplier electrode. It also indicates the direction of flow of current.
 The three elements of the transistor are; emitter (E), collector (C) and base (B).
 The emitter supplies the majority carriers for transistor current flow. The collector
collects current and the base controls the passage of electrons from the emitter to
collector.
 The doping level in the emitter is more than in the collector.
 The base is thin and lightly doped.
 Collector is moderately doped.
 Area of emitter is moderate, for base is minimum and of collector is maximum.
 In normal operation of a transistor, the emitter-base junction is always forward biased
whereas the collector-base junction is reverse biased.
* * * * * *
99
EXERCISES
Fill in the blanks
1) The diode is nonconducting in .............. biased.
2) When the diode current is large, the bias is .....................
3) The knee voltage of a diode is approximately equal to ..................
4) In an n-p-n transistor, the majority carriers in the emitter are ...........
5) The emitter junction is usually ........................ biased
6) In a p-n-p transistor, the major carriers in the emitter are .................
Short answer Questions
1. What do you mean by energy level?
2. Define energy band.
3. What do you mean by forbidden gap?
4. Explain conduction and valance band in material?
5. Write the unit used for measuring Forbidden gap?
6. What is forbidden gap for Si, Ge?
7. Explain type of material on the basis of Energy band.
8. Differentiate between a conductor and an insulator.
9. Define semiconductor with example
10. Define doping.
11. What are dopants?
12. Explain p- type semiconductors?
13. Explain n- type semiconductors?
14. Define intrinsic semiconductor?
15. Define extrinsic semiconductor?
16. What is p-n junction diode?
17. Define rectifier?
18. Define transistor.
19. What is n-p-n transistor? Draw symbol.
20. What is p-n-p transistor? Draw symbol.
21. A transistor has how many pn junctions?
Long answer Questions
1. Distinguish between conductors and semiconductors.
2. What is meant by energy band? How is it formed?
3. What does doping mean? How do we obtain the p and n type semiconductor?
4. What is the difference between intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors?
5. What do you understand by forward biasing and reverse biasing in the operation of a
p-n junction diode?
6. Explain transistor? Distinguish between p-n-p and n-p-n transistors.
7. Draw symbols for p-n-p and n-p-n transistors.
8. Write examples of trivalent and pentavalent impurities used as dopant.
100
9. Write difference between p-type and n-type semiconductors?
10. Define conductor, insulator and semiconductor with example.
11. Explain half wave rectifier.
12. Explain in brief about p-n-p and n-p-n transistor
13. Define rectifier? Explain full wave rectifier with a circuit diagram.
14. Explain p-n junction diode? Plot and explain its characteristics.
101
Ground State
Meta-stable State
Excited State
E1
E2
E0
Chapter 13
MODERN PHYSICS
Learning objectives: After studying this chapter, the student should be able to;
- Understand concepts of Laser, emission processes and lasing conditions;
- List laser beam characteristics and engineering applications.
- Describe Optical Fibre, its structure, working principle and applications.
- Acquire some knowledge about Nanotechnology and its long term applications.
13.1 LASER
LASER is an acronym for Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission of
Radiation. It is a beam of light which is coherent, monochromatic, highly directional and
very intense.
Energy Level: In an atom, the electrons are confined to well defined energy states. These
states are called as energy level (Fig. 13.1).
There are three types of energy levels:
1. Ground level: This refers to the lowest energy state in the system (E0). The completely
de-excited atoms would occupy this level.
2. Excited level: Any level above the ground state is excited state (E1). The atom can stay in
excited state only for a very short time varying from 10-8
to 10-10
second. After this time
the atom will lose its energy in the form of radiations and come back to ground state.
3. Metastable level: This level lies in-between the excited and ground levels (E2). Its
lifetime is 100 times more than excited state and atom can stay in this state for a longer
time.
The Emission Process
When a material is energized by some radiations, the atoms of the material get excited
to the higher state from ground state. These excited atoms may lose energy and come back to
ground state. The energy loss may be in the form of heat, light or X-rays etc. This process
may takes place in two ways:
Figure 13.1 Energy levels
102
I. Spontaneous Emission:
Spontaneous emission is the process of light emission in which the atoms in excited state
(E1) comes back to ground state (E0) after 10-8
seconds, without any external radiation(see
Fig.13.2).The atoms in excited state, release radiation of energy hν = E1 - E0 in the form of
photons. These photons are emitted in random directions.
II. Stimulated Emission:
E1
E0
Population Inversion:
In a material, when the number of atoms in excited state (N2) becomes more than the
number of atoms in ground state (N1), this condition is known as population inversion. This
condition is must for stimulated emission and hence for Laser emission.
Characteristics of Laser
Laser light has four unique characteristics that differentiate it from ordinary light:
a) Coherence
The photons emitted from ordinary light sources have different phases and hence non-
coherent. While in Laser all the emitted photons have same phase or constant phase
difference. Thus the laser light is highly coherent in nature. Because of this coherence, a large
amount of power can be concentrated in a narrow space.
b) Monochromatic
In laser, all the photons emitted have the same frequency, or wavelength. Hence, the laser
light has single wavelength or color. Therefore, laser light covers a very narrow range of
frequencies or wavelengths. Hence the light emitted by a laser is highly monochromatic.
E1
E0
If excited atom is irradiated with a photon
having energy hν = E1 - E0 before spontaneous
emission process, then the excited atom will lose
the energy in the form of two photon as shown in
Fig.13.3. This process occurs in such a way that the
incident photon and the emitted photon are found
to be moving with same momentum and phase.
This kind of emission is called stimulated
emission.
Figure 13.2 Spontaneous emission process
Figure 13.3 Stimulated emission process
103
c) Directionality
In ordinary light sources (lamp, torch), photons will travel in random direction. Therefore,
these light sources emit light in all directions. But, in laser, all photons will travel in same
direction. Therefore, laser emits light only in one direction. This is called directionality of
laser light. As a result, a laser beam can travel to long distances without spreading.
If an ordinary light travels a distance of 2 km, it spreads to about 2 km in diameter. On
the other hand, if a laser light travels a distance of 2 km, it spreads by less than 2 cm.
d) High Intensity
In laser, the light spreads in small region of space and in a small wavelength range.
Hence, laser light has greater intensity when compared to the ordinary light. Even 1 mW laser
would appear many thousand times more intense than 100 W ordinary lamp.
Applications of Lasers:
 Laser welding: Lasers can be used for spot welding, seam welding, inert gas laser
welding and welding of non-metals.
 Laser cutting: Metals can be cut with output power of atleast 100 W to 500 W. Wide
range of materials can be cut e-g. paper, cloth, plywood, glass, ceramics, sheet metal
like steel, titanium, aluminium etc.
 Laser drilling: Lasers are used for fine drilling
 Lasers are used for accurate measurement of the order of 0.1 m to the extent of distant
object.
 Lasers are used to produce thermonuclear fusion.
 These are used to study the chemical process, nature of chemical bonds, structure of
molecule and scattering.
 Long distance communication by using optical fibre and laser is very efficient.
 In medicine, lasers are used to study many biological samples, treatment of lever and
to remove tumors.
 Laser is used for printing. Laser printers are very fast and efficient. The quality is very
high.
 In computers, we use laser disc. In CD writer, a tiny laser beam burns spot on the
compact disc.
13.2 OPTICAL FIBRE
An optical fibre consists of a very thin core made of glass or silica having a radius of
the order of micrometers (10-6
m). The core is covered by a thin layer of cladding material of
lower refractive index. Such optical fibres can transmit a light beam from one end to the other
without significant energy loss. These are generally made from transparent materials such as
glass (silica) or glass like polymers.
The branch of physics dealing with the propagation of light through optical fibres is
known as fibre optics
104
Principle: It is based on the phenomenon of total internal reflections at the glass or silica
boundary. The light will reach at other end even if the fibre is bend or twisted.
If ray of light travelling from a denser medium into a rarer medium and the angle of
incidence is greater than the critical angle, the ray is totally reflected back into the same
media. This phenomenon is called as total internal reflection.
Fibre Types
On the basis of mode of propagation the fibre can be classified as:
Monomode fibre: It has a very narrow
core of diameter about 8-12 μm or less and the
cladding is relatively big 125 μm as shown in
Fig. 13.5 (a). As the name implies, monomode
fibre sustains only one mode of propagation
that is why it is also known as single mode
fibre,
Multimode fibre: It has a core of relatively
large diameter such as 50-200 μm as shown in
Fig.13.5 (b). As the name suggests the
multimode fibre contain many hundreds of
modes of propagation simultaneously. The
signals do not intermix with each other. This is
most commonly used optical fibre
Numerical Aperture (NA): It is the light collecting ability of an optical fiber. It depends on
difference in refractive index of core and cladding. Generally, value of NA ranges from 0.1 to
0.5 for most of the commonly used optical fibres.
Fig. 13.5 (b)
Figure 13.4 Schematic of optical fibre
Fig. 13.5 (a)
105
Applications of Optical Fibres:
 With the help of light pipes made up of flexible optical fibres, it is possible to examine
the inaccessible parts of equipment or of the human body. For example in endoscopy, a
patient's stomach can be viewed by inserting one end of a light pipe into the stomach
through mouth.
 Optical fibres are also used for transmitting and receiving electrical signals that are
converted to light by transducers.
 These are used as transmission medium to transmit communication signals at high data
rates over long distances. For example, more than 100000 telephone signals at data rate
of Gigabits/sec can be simultaneously transmitted through a typical single pair of
optical fibre.
 Optical fibres are also being extensively used for cable TV networks and local area
networks (LAN) in premises.
The quality of the signals transmitted with optical fibres is much better than other
conventional methods.
13.3 NANOTECHNOLOGY
It is the branch of technology that deals with use of nanomaterials with dimensions
less than 100 nanometres, especially the manipulation of individual atoms and molecules.
Nanomaterials:
These are materials with any dimension in the nanoscale (1 nm to 100 nm). These
materials are very reactive and exhibit unique physical, chemical and biological properties
due to high surface-to-volume ratio.
Example: Carbon nanotube, nanoparticle, quantum dots, nanoplymers, nanoshell,
nanopores,nanorod, nanowires, nanopowder, fullerene, etc.
Applications of Nanotechnology
Nanomaterials are of interest because of their unique optical, magnetic, electrical, and
other properties. These emergent properties have the potential for great impacts in
electronics, medicine, and other fields.
 Medicine: Nanotechnology based drugs are being used to treat dangerous diseases like
cancers and prevent health issues more effectively, as customized nanoparticles can
deliver drugs directly to diseased cells in the body. New nanoparticles based
chemotherapy drugs that can be delivered directly to cancer cells for better treatment are
under development.
 Electronics: Electronic devices made with nano-fabrication techniques help in reducing
weight and power consumption. This also improves display screens on electronic devices
and increasing the density of memory chips. Nanotechnology can help to reduce the size
of transistors and other components used in integrated circuits.
 Food Industry: Developing new nanomaterials will not only make a difference in the
106
taste of food, but also in improve the food production, nutrient value and preservation.
 Fuel Cells: Nanotechnology is being used to reduce the cost of catalysts, used in fuel cells
to produce hydrogen ions from fuel such as methanol. Nanomaterials are also being
developed to improve the efficiency of membranes used in fuel cells.
 Solar Cells: Nanotechnology based solar cells can be manufactured at significantly lower
cost with better efficiency as compared to conventional solar cells.
 Space: Advancements in development of nano- composites make lightweight spacecrafts.
Carbon nano-tubes based cables have been proposed for the space elevators.
 Fuels: Nanotechnology can be used for production of fuels from low grade raw materials
which are economical and also increase the efficiency of engines.
 Catalyst: Nanoparticles have a greater surface area to interact with the reacting chemicals
than catalysts made up of larger particles. This allows more chemicals to interact with the
catalyst simultaneously and hence makes the catalyst more effective.
 Chemical Sensors: Nanotechnology based sensors can detect very small amounts of
chemical vapours. Various types of nanostructures such as carbon nano-tubes, Graphene,
Zinc oxide nanowires can be used as detecting elements in nanotechnology based sensors.
 Fabric: Making composite fabric with nano-sized particles or fibres allows improvement
of fabric properties without a significant increase in weight, thickness, or stiffness.
 Environment: Nanotechnology is being used in cleaning water and existing pollution,
improving manufacturing methods to reduce the generation of new pollution, and making
alternative energy sources more cost effective.
* * * * * *
107
EXERCISE
Fill in the Blanks
1) When number of atoms become more in higher energy levels than lower energy
levels, the condition, is called . . . . . . .
2) In laser, the light amplification is achieved due to ................ (spontaneous/stimulated)
emission.
3) A multimode step index fibre has a core diameter of range ….
4) For total internal reflection, the angle of incidence is .............. than critical angle
5) The size range of nanoparticles is between ………to .......... nm.
Short answer Questions
1. Define energy level.
2. Give full form of LASER.
3. What is principle of laser?
4. What is meant by population inversion?
5. Write working principle of optical fibre?
6. Name the type of optical fibres.
7. What are nanomaterials? Give an example.
8. What is size range of nanomaterial?
Long answer Questions
1. Explain the characteristics of laser. Also differentiate between laser beam and
ordinary light beam.
2. Describe the two processes of emission of radiations. Also Distinguish between two
emission processes.
3. What is the primary requirement to produce laser beam? What are the main properties
of laser beam?
4. Write five applications of laser light.
5. Write some uses of optical fibres.
6. Define nanotechnology? Give and explain five applications of nanotechnology
108
Subject: Applied Physics (180013)
Assignment – 1 (Section A)
Q1: Each Question carries 2 marks.
i. Write the SI unit of force, work, energy, pressure and momentum.
ii. Write dimensional formula of distance, displacement, density, force, stress, work,
momentum, velocity, strain, acceleration, impulse, surface tension, coefficient of
viscosity.
iii. 1 newton =______dynes.
iv. State the principle of homogeneity
v. Write cgs units of length, mass and time.
vi. Write two advantages of SI units over the earlier systems.
vii. Give limitations of method of dimensions.
viii. Name the fundamental quantities and write their units.
ix. State triangle law and parallelogram law of vector addition.
x. What is relation between linear and angular velocity?
xi. Define velocity and acceleration
xii. Define Impulse with example.
1. Covert 1 joule into erg using dimension analysis. (4)
2. Define vector and scalar quantity, giving examples in each case. (4)
3. Define the terms vector product and scalar product. Write formula. (4)
4. Define force. What is meant by resolution of force? (4)
5. Define momentum. State conservation of liner momentum. (4)
6. Define centripetal and centrifugal force. Write formula (4)
7. State Newton's three laws of motion with example (4)
8. Define angular displacement, angular velocity, angular acceleration, frequency and
time period. (8)
9. Define banking of road. Derive an expression for banking of road. (8)
109
Subject: Applied Physics (180013)
Assignment – II (Section B)
Q1: Each Question carries 2 marks.
i. Define power. Write its unit.
ii. Define energy and write its unit.
iii. Define potential energy.
iv. Define work. Give unit of work
v. Define stress. Give its SI units.
vi. State Hooks law.
vii. Define elasticity. Give 2 example of elastic material.
viii. Define restoring force and deforming force.
ix. Give four example of transformation of Energy.
x. Define pressure and write its unit.
xi. Define streamline and turbulent flow.
xii. What is effect of temperature on surface tension?
xiii. What is physical significance of moment of inertia?
xiv. Define torque with example.
xv. What is Pascal law?
1. State kinetic energy. Find the expression for it. (4)
2. Define strain. Explain its types. (4)
3. Define radius of gyration. Derive expression for it. (4)
4. Define angular momentum. What is conservation of angular momentum? (4)
5. Define moment of inertia with example. (4)
6. Define surface tension and give its unit. Write three applications of surface tension?
(4)
7. Define viscosity. What is the effect of temperature on viscosity?. (4)
8. State principle of conservation of energy and prove it for freely falling body.
(8)
9. Explain Young's, bulk and shear modulus of elasticity. (8)
110
Subject: Applied Physics (180013) Set -1
Sample paper (Section C)
MM: 60
Section A: objective types question. All questions are compulsory. (1X10=10)
Question 1
i. SI unit of temperature is …………………..
ii. Heat is transferred in solids by the mode of ……………….
iii. SI unit of specific resistance is ………………..
iv. Write Full form of SONAR
v. Diamonds shine brightly due to reflection of light.(True/false)
vi. A device that converts AC to DC is called …………………..
vii. Resistance of a material is ……………proportional to the area of the conductor.
viii. The resistance of a semiconductor ………………………..(increases/decreases) with
temperature.
ix. Light wave is ……………………..(transverse/longitudinal)in nature.
x. The sound wave having frequency greater than 20 kHz are called …………………
Section B: Very short answer type questions. Attempt any five questions. (5X2=10)
Question 2
a) Define convection.
b) Define coefficient of absorption of sound.
c) What is power of lens? Write its unit.
d) Define Ohm's law. Write its formula.
e) Define electric power. Give its SI unit.
f) Define electromagnetic induction with example
g) Draw the symbol of pnp and npn transistor.
Section C: Short answer type questions. Attempt any six questions. (6X4=24)
3. Define echo and reverberation
4. What is total internal reflection? Write the condition for TIR.
5. Write any four principles of measurement of temperature?
6. Define electric potential and write its formula and unit. (2,1,1).
7. State Kirchhoff‟s laws for electrical network
8. Write four differences between longitudinal and transverse wave.
9. Explain about magnetic lines of force? Write their properties.
10. Explain half wave rectifier.
Section D: Long answer type questions. Attempt any two questions. (2x8=16)
11. State and derive Guass law of electrostatics.
12. What is p-n junction diode? Draw and explain its characteristics.
13. (a) Write any four applications of optical fibre.
(b) Write the characteristic of LASER
111
Subject: Applied Physics (180013) Set -II
Sample paper (Section C) MM: 60
Section A: objective types question. All questions are compulsory. (1X10=10)
Question 1
i. SI unit of temperature is ______________.
ii. Write full form of S.H.M.
iii. Name one application of ultrasonic waves.
iv. Device used to see distant objects is called _____________
v. Write SI unit of electric charge.
vi. Write formula of electric flux.
vii. Frequency of DC is ____________.
viii. Give one example of diamagnetic material.
ix. Pure semiconductor is also called______.
x. Name two parts of optical fiber.
Section B: Very short answer type questions. Attempt any five questions. (5X2=10)
Question 2
a) Define critical angle in TIR.
b) Define cantilever. Write its formula.
c) Define capacitance. Write is unit.
d) Define specific resistance. Write its unit?
e) Define direct and alternating current.
f) What is the principle of optical fibre.
g) Define extrinsic semiconductor.
Section C: Short answer type questions. Attempt any six questions. (6X4=24)
3. What is difference between heat and temperature?
4. Drive the relation between velocity, frequency and wave length of
electromagnetic wave.
5. Define microscope and telescope. Write two uses of each.
6. Define nanomaterials and give examples. Write two applications.
7. What are electric lines of force? Write their properties.
8. Define reverberation time. What are the methods to control reverberation time?
9. Explain two types of magnetic materials with examples
10. Write four applications of LASER.
Section D: Long answer type questions. Attempt any two questions. (2x8=16)
11. Derive expression for total resistance of resistors connected in (i) Series, (ii) parallel
12. Define rectifier? Explain full wave rectifier with the help of circuit diagram.
13. Name different scales for measuring temperature. Give relation among the scales of
temperature.
112
Subject: Applied Physics (180013) Set -III
Sample paper (Section C) MM: 60
Section A: objective types question. All questions are compulsory. (1X10=10)
Question 1
i. What is noise?
ii. Write lens formula
iii. SI unit of charge is ……………………
iv. SI unit of electric potential is ....................
v. What is forbidden gap for Si?
vi. Give full form of LASER.
vii. The minimum distance of an obstacle for echo to be heard is 16.6 m. (True / False).
viii. The size range of nanoparticles is between ……….
ix. In an npn transistor, the majority carriers in the emitter are ...........
x. Full form of TIR is ...................
Section B: Very short answer type questions. Attempt any five questions. (5X2=10)
Question 2
a) Define SHM. Give one example.
b) A wire has resistance of 64 ohm. What will be its resistance when it is four folded?
c) What is heating effect of current?
d) Define magnetic flux and write its unit.
e) Define refractive index.
f) Define electric Energy and write its unit.
g) Define magnetic field
Section C: Short answer type questions. Attempt any six questions. (6X4=24)
3. State and derive Coulomb law of electrostatics.
4. Define electric field. Derive the electric field due to Point Charge
5. What is free, forced and resonant vibration? Give example.
6. Define reflection and refraction. Write laws for them.
7. Explain in brief about PNP and NPN transistor
8. Define conduction & convection method of heat transfer with examples.
9. What is the difference between p-type and n-type semiconductors?
10. Explain any two applications of ultrasonic wave.
Section D: Long answer type questions. Attempt any two questions. (2x8=16)
11. Derive expression for total capacitance of capacitor connected in (i) Series, (ii)
parallel.
12. Define displacement, velocity, acceleration, time period and frequency for a particle
executing SHM.
13. Define conductors, insulators and semiconductors with example.

More Related Content

PDF
Introduction to Operating Systems
PDF
First semester diploma Engineering physics i
PPTX
Fibre optics
PPTX
Number System & Data Representation
PDF
First semester diploma Engineering chemistry I
PPTX
Physics circular motion
PPTX
Subject verb agreement
PPTX
Introduction to Basic Computer System
Introduction to Operating Systems
First semester diploma Engineering physics i
Fibre optics
Number System & Data Representation
First semester diploma Engineering chemistry I
Physics circular motion
Subject verb agreement
Introduction to Basic Computer System

What's hot (20)

PDF
Presentation of Mechanical
PPTX
ROLE OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING IN SOCIETY
PDF
training report on thermal power plant & thermal power generation by sagar me...
PDF
Viscosity of water by capillary flow
PPTX
Design of springs
PDF
SUMMER INTERNSHIP REPORT 2016 (MECHANICAL ENGINEERING)
PDF
INTERNSHIP/ INDUSTRIAL TRAINING REPORT
PDF
Product Design and Development 20ME43P C-20 Lab Manual.pdf
PPTX
Fluid mechanics - Applications of continuity equation
PDF
Solutions Manual for machine design by khurmi and Gupta
PDF
Physics investigatory project
PDF
ME6503 - DESIGN OF MACHINE ELEMENTS UNIT - IV NOTES
PDF
ME6603 - FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS UNIT - III NOTES AND QUESTION BANK
PDF
Applied mechanics lab manual
DOCX
INDUSTRIAL TRAINING REPORT BY ShRiDhAR KaDaM
PPTX
Stress concentration
PDF
Physics Investigatory Project - Transformer
DOCX
Transformers
PDF
120463N
PPTX
Dimension less numbers in applied fluid mechanics
Presentation of Mechanical
ROLE OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING IN SOCIETY
training report on thermal power plant & thermal power generation by sagar me...
Viscosity of water by capillary flow
Design of springs
SUMMER INTERNSHIP REPORT 2016 (MECHANICAL ENGINEERING)
INTERNSHIP/ INDUSTRIAL TRAINING REPORT
Product Design and Development 20ME43P C-20 Lab Manual.pdf
Fluid mechanics - Applications of continuity equation
Solutions Manual for machine design by khurmi and Gupta
Physics investigatory project
ME6503 - DESIGN OF MACHINE ELEMENTS UNIT - IV NOTES
ME6603 - FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS UNIT - III NOTES AND QUESTION BANK
Applied mechanics lab manual
INDUSTRIAL TRAINING REPORT BY ShRiDhAR KaDaM
Stress concentration
Physics Investigatory Project - Transformer
Transformers
120463N
Dimension less numbers in applied fluid mechanics
Ad

Similar to Polytechnic Physics first semester 1.pdf (20)

PDF
03. M.E.Environmental.pdf
PDF
Quantum and statistical physics workbook dec2020
PDF
ME8381STRENGTHOFMATERIALSLABORATORYMANUAL.pdf
PDF
B tech-ii-year-me-syllabus-2019-20
DOCX
MYP 5 Physics Unit Plan- Electricity Transmission and Generation
PDF
Newsletter 2015
PDF
Jntua r20-b.tech-cse- ai--course-structure-2020-21.
PDF
S.Y. B. Tech. Civil Engineering Syllabus wef from 2021.pdf
PDF
DOC
Himanshu choudhary report
PDF
AICTE Model Curriculum_ELECTRICAL Engg Final-Updated.pdf
DOCX
PDF
General Physics. for fresh man studants pdf
PPTX
OBE Course Curriculum .pptx
PDF
Study guide-mtv410-eng-2016-latest.zp78593
PDF
rgpv-syllabus-aicte-group-a-1-sem-group-b-2-sem.pdf
DOCX
Curriculum Mapping SCIENCE G7 Quarter 1
PDF
Civil construction technology_1_ (2)
PPTX
NAAC PRESENTATION DEPARTMENT OF ELECTICAL
03. M.E.Environmental.pdf
Quantum and statistical physics workbook dec2020
ME8381STRENGTHOFMATERIALSLABORATORYMANUAL.pdf
B tech-ii-year-me-syllabus-2019-20
MYP 5 Physics Unit Plan- Electricity Transmission and Generation
Newsletter 2015
Jntua r20-b.tech-cse- ai--course-structure-2020-21.
S.Y. B. Tech. Civil Engineering Syllabus wef from 2021.pdf
Himanshu choudhary report
AICTE Model Curriculum_ELECTRICAL Engg Final-Updated.pdf
General Physics. for fresh man studants pdf
OBE Course Curriculum .pptx
Study guide-mtv410-eng-2016-latest.zp78593
rgpv-syllabus-aicte-group-a-1-sem-group-b-2-sem.pdf
Curriculum Mapping SCIENCE G7 Quarter 1
Civil construction technology_1_ (2)
NAAC PRESENTATION DEPARTMENT OF ELECTICAL
Ad

Recently uploaded (20)

PPTX
Core Concepts of Personalized Learning and Virtual Learning Environments
PDF
MBA _Common_ 2nd year Syllabus _2021-22_.pdf
PDF
Vision Prelims GS PYQ Analysis 2011-2022 www.upscpdf.com.pdf
DOCX
Cambridge-Practice-Tests-for-IELTS-12.docx
PDF
Everyday Spelling and Grammar by Kathi Wyldeck
PDF
LEARNERS WITH ADDITIONAL NEEDS ProfEd Topic
PDF
FOISHS ANNUAL IMPLEMENTATION PLAN 2025.pdf
PDF
MICROENCAPSULATION_NDDS_BPHARMACY__SEM VII_PCI Syllabus.pdf
PDF
Race Reva University – Shaping Future Leaders in Artificial Intelligence
PDF
Civil Department's presentation Your score increases as you pick a category
PPTX
ELIAS-SEZIURE AND EPilepsy semmioan session.pptx
PPTX
Macbeth play - analysis .pptx english lit
PDF
Compact First Student's Book Cambridge Official
PDF
M.Tech in Aerospace Engineering | BIT Mesra
PPT
REGULATION OF RESPIRATION lecture note 200L [Autosaved]-1-1.ppt
PDF
Climate and Adaptation MCQs class 7 from chatgpt
PDF
LIFE & LIVING TRILOGY - PART - (2) THE PURPOSE OF LIFE.pdf
PPTX
What’s under the hood: Parsing standardized learning content for AI
PDF
Journal of Dental Science - UDMY (2022).pdf
PDF
HVAC Specification 2024 according to central public works department
Core Concepts of Personalized Learning and Virtual Learning Environments
MBA _Common_ 2nd year Syllabus _2021-22_.pdf
Vision Prelims GS PYQ Analysis 2011-2022 www.upscpdf.com.pdf
Cambridge-Practice-Tests-for-IELTS-12.docx
Everyday Spelling and Grammar by Kathi Wyldeck
LEARNERS WITH ADDITIONAL NEEDS ProfEd Topic
FOISHS ANNUAL IMPLEMENTATION PLAN 2025.pdf
MICROENCAPSULATION_NDDS_BPHARMACY__SEM VII_PCI Syllabus.pdf
Race Reva University – Shaping Future Leaders in Artificial Intelligence
Civil Department's presentation Your score increases as you pick a category
ELIAS-SEZIURE AND EPilepsy semmioan session.pptx
Macbeth play - analysis .pptx english lit
Compact First Student's Book Cambridge Official
M.Tech in Aerospace Engineering | BIT Mesra
REGULATION OF RESPIRATION lecture note 200L [Autosaved]-1-1.ppt
Climate and Adaptation MCQs class 7 from chatgpt
LIFE & LIVING TRILOGY - PART - (2) THE PURPOSE OF LIFE.pdf
What’s under the hood: Parsing standardized learning content for AI
Journal of Dental Science - UDMY (2022).pdf
HVAC Specification 2024 according to central public works department

Polytechnic Physics first semester 1.pdf

  • 1. a LEARNING MATERIAL FOR APPLIED PHYSICS (180013) (FOR 1ST YEAR) HARYANA STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION LEARNING TEXT BOOKLET (PHYSICS) DIPLOMA 1ST YEAR (January, 2019) Developed By Haryana State Board of Technical Education, Bays 7-12, Sector 4, Panchkula In collaboration with National Institute of Technical Teachers Training & Research, Sector-26, Chandigarh
  • 2. b PREFACE Technical Education in polytechnics plays a very vital role in human resource development of the country by creating skilled manpower, enhancing industrial productivity and improving the quality of life. The aim of the polytechnic education in particular is to create a pool of skill based manpower to support shop floor and field operations as a bridge between technician and engineers. Moreover, a small and medium scale industry prefers to employ diploma holders because of their special skills in reading and interpreting drawings, estimating, costing and billing, supervision, measurement, testing, repair, maintenance etc. Despite the plethora of opportunities available for the diploma pass-out students, the unprecedented expansion of the technical education sector in recent years has brought in its wake questions about the quality of education imparted. Moreover, during the last few years the students seeking admissions in the polytechnics are coming mainly from the rural background and face the major challenge of learning and understanding the technical contents of various subjects in English Language. The major challenge before the Haryana State Board of Technical Education is to ensure the quality of a technical education to the stakeholders along its expansion. In order to meet the challenges and requirement of future technical education manpower, consistent efforts are made by Haryana State Board of Technical Education to design need based diploma programmes in collaboration with National Institute of Technical Teachers Training and Research, Chandigarh as per the new employment opportunities. The Board undertook the development of the learning material tailored to match the curriculum content. This learning Text Booklet shall provide a standard material to the teachers and students to aid their learning and achieving their study goals. Secretary HSBTE, Panchkula
  • 3. c ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS The Haryana State Board of Technical Education, Panchkula acknowledges the assistance and guidance provided by the administrative authorities of the Technical Education Department and Director, NITTTR for initiating and supporting the development of Learning Textbook for 1st year diploma students. The academic inputs from the faculty of the polytechnics for preparing the contents of Learning Textbook are duly appreciated. Thanks are also due towards the academic experts from the various Institutes of importance like NITTTR, Chandigarh; Panjab University, Chandigarh; PEC, Chandigarh etc. for their efforts in enrichment and finalization of the contents of this learning textbook. Last but not the least the efforts of the coordinators for overall monitoring, coordinating the development of the Learning Textbook and organization of workshops are also duly acknowledged. Joint Secretary HSBTE, Panchkula
  • 4. d TEAM INVOLVED IN DEVELOPMENT OF LEARNING TEXTBOOK (PHYSICS) ADMINISTRATIVE AUTHORITIES 1. Sh. Anil Kumar, IAS, Additional Chief Secretary, Technical Education, Govt. of Haryana-Cum-Chairman, Haryana State Board of Technical Education, Panchkula 2. Sh. A. Sreeniwas, IAS, Director General, Technical Education, Govt. of Haryana 3. Sh. K. K. Kataria, Director, Technical Education-Cum-Secretary, Haryana State Board of Technical Education, Panchkula 4. Dr. S.S. Pattnaik, Director, National Institute of Technical Teachers Training and Research, Chandigarh POLYTECHNIC FACULTY 5. Dr. Bhajan Lal, Lecturer Physics, Govt. Polytechnic for Women, Sirsa 6. Sh. Anil Nain, Lecturer Physics, Govt. Polytechnic, Hisar 7. Smt. Bindu Verma, Lecturer Physics, SJPP Damla 8. Dr. Sarita Maan, Lecturer Physics, Govt. Polytechnic, Ambala City 9. Sh. Arvind Kumar, Lecturer Physics, Govt. Polytechnic, Mandi Adampur 10. Dr. Anoop Kumar, Lecturer Physics, Govt. Polytechnic for Women, Faridabad ACADEMIC EXPERTS 11. Dr. S.K. Tripathi, Professor of Physics, Physics Department, Panjab University, Chandigarh 12. Dr. Sanjeev Kumar, Professor, Applied Physics, Applied Science Dept., Punjab Engineering College, Chandigarh COORDINATORS 13. Dr. B. C. Choudhary, Professor, Applied Physics, Applied Science Dept., NITTTR, Chandigarh 14. Sh. R. K. Miglani, Joint Secretary (Academics), Haryana State Board of Technical Education, Panchkula 15. Dr. Nidhi Aggarwal, Assistant Secretary, Haryana State Board of Technical Education, Panchkula 16. Sh. Sanjeev Kumar, Assistant Secretary, Haryana State Board of Technical Education, Panchkula 17. Sh. D. K. Rawat, Principal, Govt. Polytechnic, Narnaul
  • 5. e INDEX CHAPTER NO. TITLE PAGE NO. SYLLABUS i-iii DISTRIBUTION OF SYLLABUS &MARKS FOR ASSESSMENTS iv-vii 1. UNITS AND DIMENSIONS 1-14 2. FORCE AND MOTION 15-24 3. WORK, POWER AND ENERGY 25-30 4. ROTATIONAL MOTION 31-35 5. PROPERTIES OF MATTER 36-40 6. HEAT AND TEMPERATURE 41-46 7. WAVE MOTION AND ITS APPLICATIONS 47-59 8. OPTICS 60-67 9. ELECTROSTATICS 68-76 10. CURRENT ELECTRICITY 77-86 11. ELECTROMAGNETISM 87-91 12. SEMICONDUCTOR PHYSICS 92-100 13. MODERN PHYSICS 101-107 ASSIGNMENTS AND SAMPLE PAPERS 108-112
  • 6. i SYLLABUS 1.3 APPLIED PHYSICS L T P 2 1 2 RATIONALE Applied physics includes the study of a large number of diverse topics all related to things that go on in the world around us. It aims to give an understanding of this world both by observation and by prediction of the way in which objects will behave. Concrete use of physical principles and analysis in various fields of engineering and technology are given prominence in the course content. Note: Teachers should give examples of engineering/technology applications of various concepts and principles in each topic so that students are able to appreciate learning of these concepts and principles. In all contents, SI units should be followed. Working in different sets of units can be taught through relevant software. LEARNING OUTCOMES After undergoing this subject, the students will be able to:  Identify physical quantities, parameters and select their units for use in engineering solutions.  Units and dimensions of different physical quantities.  Represent physical quantities as scalar and vectors.  Basic laws of motions,  Analyse and design banking of roads and apply conservation of momentum to explain recoil of gun etc.  Define work, energy and power and their units. Solve problems about work and power  State the principle of conservation of energy.  Identify forms of energy, conversion from one form to another.  Compare and contrast the physical properties associated with linear motion and rotational motion and give examples of conservation of angular momentum.  Describe the surface tension phenomenon and its units, applications, effects of temperature on surface tension.  Describe the viscosity of liquids.  Define stress and strain, modulus of elasticity.  State Hooke‟s law.  Measure temperature in various processes on different scales (Celsius, Kelvin, Fahrenheit etc.)  Distinguish between conduction, convection and radiation.  Use equipment like, Vernier calliper, Screw Gauge, Spherometer.  Differentiate between Transverse and Longitudinal, Periodic and Simple Harmonic Motion.
  • 7. ii  Explain the terms: frequency, amplitude, wavelength, wave velocity, frequency and relation between them.  Explain various Engineering and Industrial applications of Ultrasonics.  Apply acoustics principles to various types of buildings to get best sound effect.  Explain the laws of reflection and refraction of light.  Explain total internal reflection as applied to optical fibers.  Define capacitance and its unit and solve simple problems using C=Q/V  Explain the role of free electrons in insulators, conductors and semiconductors.  Application of semiconductors as diode, rectifiers, concept of transistors  Explain electric current as flow of charge, the concept of resistance, heating effect of current.  State and apply Ohm's law.  Calculate the equivalent resistance of a variety of resistor combinations.  Apply the concept of light amplification in designing of various LASER based instruments and optical sources.  Apply the use of optical fibre in Medical field and optical fibre Communication.  Concept of nanomaterials LIST OF PRACTICALS (To perform minimum fourteen experiments) 1. To find diameter of solid cylinder using a vernier calliper 2. To find internal diameter and depth of a beaker using a vernier calliper and hence find its volume. 3. To find the diameter of wire using screw gauge 4. To find thickness of paper using screw gauge. 5. To determine the thickness of glass strip using a spherometer 6. To determine radius of curvature of a given spherical surface by a spherometer. 7. To verify parallelogram law of forces 8. To determine the atmospheric pressure at a place using Fortin‟s barometer 9. To determine force constant of spring using Hooke‟s law 10. Measuring room temperature with the help of thermometer and its conversion in different scale. 11. To find the time period of a simple pendulum 12. To determine and verify the time period of cantilever 13. To verify ohm‟s laws by plotting a graph between voltage and current. 14. To verify laws of resistances in series combination. 15. To verify laws of resistance in parallel combination. 16. To find resistance of galvanometer by half deflection method 17. To verify laws of reflection of light using mirror. 18. To verify laws of refraction using glass slab. 19. To find the focal length of a concave lens, using a convex lens 20. To study colour coding scheme of resistance.
  • 8. iii INSTRUCTIONAL STATREGY Teacher may use various teaching aids like models, charts, graphs and experimental kits etc. for imparting effective instructions in the subject. Students need to be exposed to use of different sets of units and conversion from one unit type to another. Software may be used to solve problems involving conversion of units. The teacher should explain about field applications before teaching the basics of mechanics, work, power and energy, rotational motion, properties of matter etc. to develop proper understanding of the physical phenomenon. Use of demonstration can make the subject interesting and develop scientific temper in the students. MEANS OF ASSESSMENT  Assignments and quiz/class tests, mid-term and end-term written tests, model/prototype  Actual laboratory and practical work, exercises and viva-voce RECOMMENDED BOOKS 1. Text Book of Physics for Class XI (Part-I, Part-II); N.C.E.R.T., Delhi 2. Applied Physics, Vol. I and Vol. II by Dr. H H Lal; TTTI Publications, Tata McGraw Hill, Delhi 3. Applied Physics - I& II by AS Vasudeva; Modern Publishers, Jalandhar. 4. Applied Physics - I& II by R A Banwait; Eagle Prakashan, Jalandhar. 5. A text book of OPTICS by N Subrahmanyam, Brij Lal and Avadhanulu; S Chand Publishing, New Delhi. 6. e-books/e-tools/relevant software to be used as recommended by AICTE/ HSBTE/ NITTTR. 7. Nanotechnology: Importance and Applications by M H Fulekar; IK International Publishing House (P) Ltd., New Delhi. 8. Practical Physics, by C. L. Arora, S Chand Publication Websites for Reference: http://swayam.gov.in
  • 9. iv Distribution of Syllabus and Marks for Assessments Section A (20%) 1. Units and Dimensions (08 periods) 1.1 Definition of Physics, physical quantities (fundamental and derived), 1.2 Units: fundamental and derived units, 1.3 Systems of units: CGS, FPS, MKS, SI 1.4 Definition of dimensions; 1.5 Dimensional formulae and SI units of physical quantities (distance, displacement, area, volume, velocity, acceleration, momentum, force, impulse, work, power, energy, pressure, surface tension, stress, strain) 1.6 Principle of homogeneity of dimensions 1.7 Dimensional equations, applications of dimensional equations; checking of correctness of equation, conversion of system of unit (force, work) 2. Force and Motion (08 periods) 2.1 Scalar and vector quantities (definition and examples), 2.2 Addition of vectors, triangle & parallelogram law (statement only), 2.3 Scalar and vector product (statement and formula only) 2.4 Definition of distance, displacement, speed, velocity, acceleration 2.5 Force and its units, concept of resolution of force 2.6 Newton‟s law of motion (statement and examples), 2.7 Linear momentum, conservation of momentum (statement only), Impulse 2.8 Circular motion: definition of angular displacement, angular velocity, angular acceleration, frequency, time period; relation between linear and angular velocity. 2.9 Centripetal and centrifugal forces (definition and formula only) 2.10 Application of centripetal force in banking of roads (derivation for angle of banking) Section B (20%) 3. Work, Power and Energy (05 periods) 3.1. Work (definition, symbol, formula and SI units) 3.2. Energy (definition and its SI units), examples of transformation of energy. 3.3. Kinetic energy (formula, examples and its derivation) 3.4. Potential energy (formula, examples and its derivation) 3.5. Law of conservation of mechanical energy for freely falling bodies (with derivation) 3.6. Power (definition, formula and units) 3.7. Simple numerical problems based on formula of power 4 Rotational Motion (03 periods) 4.1 Rotational motion with examples
  • 10. v 4.2 Definition of torque and angular momentum and their examples 4.3 Conservation of angular momentum (quantitative) and its examples 4.4 Moment of inertia and its physical significance, radius of gyration (definition, derivation and formula). 5. Properties of Matter (06 periods) 5.1 Definition of elasticity, deforming force, restoring force, example of Elastic and plastic body, 5.2 Definition of stress and strain with their types, 5.3 Hooke‟s law, modulus of elasticity (Young‟s, bulk modulus and shear) 5.4 Pressure (definition, formula, unit), Pascals Law 5.5 Surface tension: definition, its units, applications of surface tension, effect of temperature on Surface tension 5.6 Viscosity: definition, units, effect of temperature on viscosity 5.7 Fluid motion, stream line and turbulent flow. Section C (60%) 6. Heat and Temperature (04 periods) 6.1 Definition of heat and temperature (on the basis of kinetic theory), 6.2 Difference between heat and temperature 6.3 Principles of measurement of temperature. 6.4 Modes of transfer of heat (conduction, convection and radiation with examples). 6.5 Properties of heat radiation 6.6 Different scales of temperature and their relationship 7. Wave motion and its applications (07 periods) 7.1 Wave motion, transverse and longitudinal wave motion with examples, Terms used in wave motion like displacement, amplitude, time period, frequency, wavelength, wave velocity; relationship among wave velocity, frequency and wave length . 7.2 Simple harmonic motion (SHM): definition, examples 7.3 Cantilever (definition, formula of time period (without derivation). 7.4 Free, forced and resonant vibrations with examples 7.5 Acoustics of buildings– reverberation, reverberation time, echo, noise, coefficient of absorption of sound, methods to control reverberation time. 7.6 Ultrasonics: Introduction and their engineering applications (cold welding, drilling, SONAR) 8. Optics (03 periods) 8.1. Reflection and refraction with laws, refractive index, lens formula (no derivation), power of lens (related numerical problems).
  • 11. vi 8.2. Total internal reflection and its applications, critical angle and conditions for total internal reflection 8.3. Microscope, telescope (definition) 8.4. Uses of microscope and telescope. 9. Electrostatics (06 Periods) 9.1. Electric charge, unit of charge, conservation of charge. 9.2. Coulombs law of electrostatics, 9.3. Electric field, electric lines of force (definition and properties), electric field intensity due to a point charge. 9.4. Definition of electric flux, Gauss law (Statement and derivation) 9.5. Capacitor and capacitance (with formula and units), series and parallel combination of capacitors (simple numerical problems) 10. Current Electricity (06 Periods) 10.1 Electric Current and its unit, direct and alternating current, 10.2 Resistance, specific resistance and conductance (definition and units) 10.3 Series and parallel combination of resistances. 10.4 Ohm‟s law (statement and formula), 10.5 Heating effect of current, electric power and its units 10.6 Kirchhoff‟s laws (statement and formula) 11 Electromagnetism (03 periods) 11.1. Introduction to magnetism, types of magnetic materials. Dia, para and ferromagnetic materials with examples. 11.2. Magnetic field, magnetic intensity, magnetic lines of force, magnetic flux and their units 11.3. Electromagnetic induction (definition) 12. Semiconductor physics (07 periods) 12.1. Definition of energy level, energy bands, 12.2. Types of materials (insulator, semiconductor, conductor) with examples, 12.3. Intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors, p-n junction diode and its V-I characteristics 12.4. Diode as rectifier – half wave and full wave rectifier (centre tap only) 12.5. Semiconductor transistor; pnp and npn (Introduction only), symbol. 13. Modern Physics (06 periods) 13.1. Lasers: full form, principle, spontaneous emission, stimulated emission, population inversion, engineering and medical applications of lasers. 13.2. Fibre optics: Introduction to optical fibers (definition, parts), applications of optical fibers in different fields. 13.3. Introduction to nanotechnology (definition of nanomaterials with examples) and its applications.
  • 12. vii DISTRIBUTION OF MARKS Section Unit Time Allotted (Periods) Marks Allotted (%) A (20 Marks) 1 8 10 2 8 10 B (20 Marks) 3 5 8 4 3 4 5 6 8 C (60 Marks) 6 4 6 7 7 10 8 3 5 9 6 9 10 6 8 11 3 4 12 7 9 13 6 9 Total 72 100
  • 13. 1 Chapter 1 UNITS AND DIMENSIONS Learning objective: After going through this chapter, students will be able to; - Understand physical quantities, fundamental and derived; - Describe different systems of units; - Define dimensions and formulate dimensional formulae; - Write dimensional equations and apply these to verify various formulations. - 1.1 DEFINITION OF PHYSICS AND PHYSICAL QUANTITIES Physics: Physics is the branch of science, which deals with the study of nature and natural phenomena. The subject matter of physics includes heat, light, sound, electricity, magnetism and the structure of atoms. For designing a law of physics, a scientific method is followed which includes the verifications with experiments. The physics, attempts are made to measure the quantities with the best accuracy. Thus, physics can also be defined as science of measurement. Applied Physics is the application of the Physics to help human beings and solving their problem, it is usually considered as a bridge between Physics & Engineering. Physical Quantities: All quantities that can be measured are called physical quantities. For example: Distance, Speed, Mass, Force etc. Types of Physical Quantity: Fundamental Quantity: The quantity which is independent of other physical quantities. In mechanics, mass, length and time are called fundamental quantities. Derived Quantity: The quantity which is derived from the fundamental quantities is a derived quantity. For example area, speed etc. 1.2 UNITS: FUNDAMENTAL AND DERIVED UNITS Measurement: In our daily life, we need to express and compare the magnitude of different quantities; this can be done only by measuring them. Measurement is the comparison of an unknown physical quantity with a known fixed physical quantity. Unit: The known fixed physical quantity is called unit. or The quantity used as standard for measurement is called unit. For example, when we say that length of the class room is 8 metre, we compare the length of class room with standard quantity of length called metre. Length of class room = 8 metre Q = nu
  • 14. 2 Physical Quantity = Numerical value × unit Q = Physical Quantity n = Numerical value u = Standard unit e.g. Mass of stool = 15 kg Mass = Physical quantity 15 = Numerical value kg = Standard unit Means mass of stool is 15 times of known quantity i.e. kg. Characteristics of Standard Unit: A unit selected for measuring a physical quantity should have the following properties (i) It should be well defined i.e. its concept should be clear. (ii) It should not change with change in physical conditions like temperature, pressure, stress etc. (iii) It should be suitable in size; neither too large nor too small. (iv) It should not change with place or time. (v) It should be reproducible. (vi) It should be internationally accepted. Classification of Units: Units can be classified into two categories. Fundamental units: Units of fundamental physical quantities are called Fundamental units. Physical Quantity Fundamental unit Mass kg, gram, pound Length metre, centimetre, foot Time second Derived units: the units of derived physical quantity are called as derived units. For example units of area, speed etc. Area = Length  Breadth = Length  Length = (Length)2 Speed =Distance / Time =Length / Time 1.3 SYSTEMS OF UNITS: CGS, FPS, MKS, SI For measurement of physical quantities, the following systems are commonly used:- (i) C.G.S system: In this system, the unit of length, mass and time are centimetre, gram and second, respectively. (ii) F.P.S system: In this system, the unit of length, mass and time are foot, pound and second, respectively. (iii) M.K.S: In this system, the unit of length, mass and time are metre, kilogram and second, respectively.
  • 15. 3 (iv) S.I System: This system is an improved and extended version of M.K.S system of units. It is called international system of unit. With the development of science & technology, the three fundamental quantities like mass, length & time were not sufficient as many other quantities like electric current, heat etc. were introduced. Therefore, more fundamental units in addition to the units of mass, length and time are required. Thus, MKS system was modified with addition of four other fundamental quantities and two supplementary quantities. Table of Fundamental Units Sr. No. Name of Physical Quantity Unit Symbol 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Length Mass Time Temperature Electric Current Luminous Intensity Quantity of Matter metre kilogram second kelvin ampere candela mole m kg s K A cd mol Table of Supplementary unit Sr. No Name of Physical Quantity Unit Symbol 1 2 Plane angle Solid angle radian steradian rad sr Advantage of S.I. system: (i) It is coherent system of unit i.e. the derived units of a physical quantity are easily obtained by multiplication or division of fundamental units. (ii) It is a rational system of units i.e. it uses only one unit for one physical quantity e.g. joule (J) is unit for all types of energies (heat, light, mechanical). (iii) It is metric system of units i.e. it‟s multiples & submultiples can be expressed in power of 10. (iv) It gives due representation to all branches of physics. Definition of Basic and Supplementary Units of S.I. system 1. Metre (m): one metre is the length of the path travelled by light in vacuum during a time interval of 1/299 792 458 of a second. 2. Kilogram (kg) : one kilogram is the mass of the platinum-iridium prototype which was approved by the Conférence Générale des Poids et Mesures, held in Paris in 1889, and kept by the Bureau International des Poids et Mesures.
  • 16. 4 3. Second (s): one second is the duration of 9192631770 periods of the radiation corresponding to the transition between two hyperfine levels of the ground state of Cesium-133 atom. 4. Ampere (A) : The ampere is the intensity of a constant current which, if maintained in two straight parallel conductors of infinite length, of negligible circular cross-section, and placed 1 metre apart in vacuum, would produce between these conductors a force equal to 2  10-7 newton per metre of length. 5. Kelvin (K): Kelvin is the fraction 1/273.16 of the thermodynamic temperature of the triple point of water. 6. Candela (cd): The candela is the luminous intensity, in a given direction, of a source that emits monochromatic radiation of frequency 540 x 1012 hertz and that has a radiant intensity in that direction of 1/683 watt per steradian. 7. Mole (mol): The mole is the amount of substance of a system which contains as many elementary entities as there are atoms in 0.012 kilogram of Carbon-12. Supplementary units: 1. Radian (rad): It is supplementary unit of plane angle. It is the plane angle subtended at the centre of a circle by an arc of the circle equal to the radius of the circle. It is denoted by 𝜃. 𝜃 = l / r; 𝑙 is length of the arc and 𝑟 is radius of the circle 2. Steradian (sr): It is supplementary unit of solid angle. It is the angle subtended at the centre of a sphere by a surface area of the sphere having magnitude equal to the square of the radius of the sphere. It is denoted by Ω. Ω = ∆s / r2 SOME IMPORTANT ABBREVIATIONS Symbol Prefix Multiplier Symbol Prefix Multiplier d c m µ n p f a deci centi milli micro nano pico femto atto 10-1 10-2 10-3 10-6 10-9 10-12 10-15 10-18 da h k M G T P E deca hecto kilo mega giga tera pecta exa 101 102 103 106 109 1012 1015 1018
  • 17. 5 Some Important Units of Length: 1 micron = 10–6 m = 10–4 cm 1 angstrom = 1Å = 10–10 m = 10–8 cm 1 fermi = 1 fm = 10–15 m 1 Light year = 1 ly = 9.46 x 1015 m 1 Parsec = 1pc = 3.26 light year Some conversion factor of mass: 1 kilogram = 2.2046 pound 1 pound = 453.6 gram 1 kilogram = 1000 gram 1 milligram = 1/1000 gram = 10-3 gram 1 centigram = 1/100 gram = 10-2 gram 1 decigram = 1/10 gram 1 quintal = 100 kg 1 metric ton = 1000 kilogram 1.4 DEFINITION OF DIMENSIONS Dimensions: The powers, to which the fundamental units of mass (M), length (L) and time (T) are raised, which include their nature and not their magnitude are called dimensions of a physical quantity. For example Area = Length x Breadth = [ L1 ] × [L1 ] = [L2 ] = [M0 L2 T0 ] Here the powers (0, 2, 0) of fundamental units are called dimensions of area in mass, length and time respectively. e.g. Density = mass/volume = [M]/[L3 ] = [ M1 L-3 T0 ] 1.5 DIMENSIONAL FORMULAE AND SI UNITS OF PHYSICAL QUANTITIES Dimensional Formula: An expression along with power of mass, length & time which indicates how physical quantity depends upon fundamental physical quantity. e.g. Speed = Distance/Time = [L1 ]/[T1 ] =[M0 L1 T-1 ] It tells us that speed depends upon L & T and it does not depend upon M. Dimensional Equation: An equation obtained by equating the physical quantity with its dimensional formula is called dimensional equation. e.g. the dimensional equation of area, density & velocity are given as under- Area = [M0 L2 T0 ] Density = [M1 L-3 T0 ] Velocity = [M0 L1 T-1 ]
  • 18. 6 Dimensional formula & SI unit of Physical Quantities Sr. No. Physical Quantity Mathematical Formula Dimensional formula S.I unit 1 Force Mass × Acceleration [M1 L1 T-2 ] newton (N) 2 Work Force × Distance [M1 L2 T-2 ] joule (J) 3 Power Work / Time [M1 L2 T-3 ] watt (W) 4 Energy (all form) Stored work [M1 L2 T-2 ] joule (J) 5 Pressure, Stress Force/Area [M1 L-1 T-2 ] Nm-2 6 Momentum Mass × Velocity [M1 L1 T-1 ] kgms-1 7 Moment of force Force × Distance [M1 L2 T-2 ] Nm 8 Impulse Force × Time [M1 L1 T-1 ] Ns 9 Strain Change in dimension / Original dimension [M0 L0 T0 ] No unit 10 Modulus of elasticity Stress / Strain [M1 L-1 T-2 ] Nm-2 11 Surface energy Energy / Area [M1 L0 T-2 ] joule/m2 12 Surface Tension Force / Length [M1 L0 T-2 ] N/m 13 Co-efficient of viscosity Force × Distance/ Area × Velocity [M1 L-1 T-1 ] N/m2 14 Moment of inertia Mass × (radius of gyration)2 [M1 L2 T0 ] kg-m2 15 Angular Velocity Angle / Time [M0 L0 T-1 ] rad per sec 16 Frequency 1/Time period [M0 L0 T-1 ] hertz (Hz) 17 Area Length × Breadth [M0 L2 T0 ] m2 18 Volume Length × Breadth × Height [M0 L3 T0 ] m3 19 Density Mass/ Volume [M1 L-3 T0 ] kg/m3 20 Speed or velocity Distance/ Time [M0 L1 T-1 ] m/s 21 Acceleration Velocity/Time [M0 L1 T-2 ] m/s2 22 Pressure Force/Area [M1 L-1 T-2 ] N/m2
  • 19. 7 Classification of Physical Quantities on the basis of dimensional analysis 1. Dimensional Constant: These are the physical quantities which possess dimensions and have constant (fixed) value. e.g. Planck‟s constant, gas constant, universal gravitational constant etc. 2. Dimensional Variable: These are the physical quantities which possess dimensions but do not have fixed value. e.g. velocity, acceleration, force etc. 3. Dimensionless Constant: These are the physical quantities which do not possess dimensions but have constant (fixed) value. e.g. e, π, numbers like 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, etc. 4. Dimensionless Variable: These are the physical quantities which do not possess dimensions and have variable value. e.g. angle, strain, specific gravity etc. Example1 Derive the dimensional formula of following Quantity & write down their dimensions. (i) Density (ii) Power (iii) Co-efficient of viscosity (iv) Angle Sol. (i) Density = mass/volume = [M]/[L3 ] = [M1 L-3 T0 ] (ii) Power = Work/Time = Force x Distance/Time = [M1 L1 T-2 ] x [L]/[T] = [M1 L2 T-3 ] (iii) Co-efficient of viscosity = = [M] x [LT-2 ] x [L] [T]/[L2 ] x [L] = [M1 L-1 T-1 ] (v) Angle = arc (length)/radius (length) = [L]/[L] = [M0 L0 T0 ] = No dimension Example2 Explain which of the following pair of physical quantities have the same dimension: (i) Work &Power (ii) Stress & Pressure (iii) Momentum &Impulse Sol. (i) Dimension of work = force x distance = [M1 L2 T-2 ] Force x Distance Area x Velocity Mass x Acceleration x Distance x time length x length x Displacement
  • 20. 8 Dimension of power = work / time = [M1 L2 T-3 ] Work and Power have not the same dimensions. (ii) Dimension of stress = force / area = [M1 L1 T-2 ]/[L2 ] = [M1 L-1 T-2 ] Dimension of pressure = force / area = [M1 L1 T-2 ]/[L2 ] = [M1 L-1 T-2 ] Stress and pressure have the same dimension. (iii) Dimension of momentum = mass x velocity= [M1 L1 T-1 ] Dimension of impulse = force x time = [M1 L1 T-1 ] Momentum and impulse have the same dimension. 1.6 PRINCIPLE OF HOMOGENEITY OF DIMENSIONS It states that the dimensions of all the terms on both sides of an equation must be the same. According to the principle of homogeneity, the comparison, addition & subtraction of all physical quantities is possible only if they are of the same nature i.e., they have the same dimensions. If the power of M, L and T on two sides of the given equation are same, then the physical equation is correct otherwise not. Therefore, this principle is very helpful to check the correctness of a physical equation. Example: A physical relation must be dimensionally homogeneous, i.e., all the terms on both sides of the equation must have the same dimensions. In the equation, S = ut + ½ at2 The length (S) has been equated to velocity (u) & time (t), which at first seems to be meaningless, But if this equation is dimensionally homogeneous, i.e., the dimensions of all the terms on both sides are the same, then it has physical meaning. Now, dimensions of various quantities in the equation are: Distance, S = [L1 ] Velocity, u = [L1 T-1 ] Time, t = [T1 ] Acceleration, a = [L1 T-2 ] ½ is a constant and has no dimensions. Thus, the dimensions of the term on L.H.S. is S=[L1 ] and Dimensions of terms on R.H.S= ut + ½ at2 = [L1 T-1 ] [T1 ] + [L1 T-2 ] [T2 ] = [L1 ] + [L1 ] Here, the dimensions of all the terms on both sides of the equation are the same. Therefore, the equation is dimensionally homogeneous. 1.7 DIMENSIONAL EQUATIONS, APPLICATIONS OF DIMENSIONAL EQUATIONS Dimensional Analysis: A careful examination of the dimensions of various quantities involved in a physical relation is called dimensional analysis. The analysis of the dimensions of a physical quantity is of great help to us in a number of ways as discussed under the uses of dimensional equations.
  • 21. 9 Uses of dimensional equation: The principle of homogeneity & dimensional analysis has put to the following uses: (i) Checking the correctness of physical equation. (ii) To convert a physical quantity from one system of units into another. (iii) To derive relation among various physical quantities. 1. To check the correctness of Physical relations: According to principle of Homogeneity of dimensions, a physical relation or equation is correct, if the dimensions of all the terms on both sides of the equation are the same. If the dimension of even one term differs from those of others, the equation is not correct. Example 3 Check the correctness of the following formulae by dimensional analysis. (i) 𝐹 = 𝑚v2 /r (ii) 2 t l g   Where all the letters have their usual meanings Sol. 𝑭 = 𝒎𝐯𝟐 /𝐫 Dimensions of the term on L.H.S Force, F = [M1 L1 T-2 ] Dimensions of the term on R.H.S 𝒎𝐯𝟐 /𝐫 = [M1 ][L1 T-1 ]2 / [L] = [M1 L2 T-2 ]/ [L] = [M1 L1 T-2 ] The dimensions of the term on the L.H.S are equal to the dimensions of the term on R.H.S. Therefore, the relation is correct. (ii) 2 t l g   Here, Dimension of term on L.H.S t = [T1 ] = [M0 L0 T1 ] Dimensions of terms on R.H.S Dimension of length = [L1 ] Dimension of g (acc. due to gravity) = [L1 T-2 ] 2𝜋 being constant have no dimensions. Hence, the dimensions of terms 2 t l g   on R.H.S = (L1 / L1 T-2 ])1/2 = [T1 ] = [M0 L0 T1 ] Thus, the dimensions of the terms on both sides of the relation are the same i.e., [M0 L0 T1 ]. Therefore, the relation is correct. Example 4 Check the correctness of the following equation on the basis of dimensional analysis, v E d  . Here v is the velocity of sound, E is the elasticity and d is the density of the medium. Sol. Here, Dimension of the term on L.H.S v = [M0 L1 T-1 ]
  • 22. 10 Dimension of elasticity, E = [M1 L-1 T-2 ] & Dimension of density, d = [M1 L-3 T0 ] Therefore, dimensions of the terms on R.H.S v E d  = [M1 L-1 T-2 / M1 L-1 T-2 ]1/2 = [M0 L1 T-1 ] Thus, dimensions on both sides are the same, hence the equation is correct. Example 5 Using Principle of Homogeneity of dimensions, check the correctness of equation, h = 2Td /rgcos𝜃. Sol. The given formula is, h = 2Td /rgcos𝜃. Dimension of term on L.H.S Height (h) = [M0 L1 T0 ] Dimensions of terms on R.H.S T= surface tension = [M1 L0 T-2 ] d= density = [M1 L-3 T0 ] r = radius = [M0 L1 T0 ] g = acc. due to gravity = [M0 L1 T-2 ] cos𝜃 = [M0 L0 T0 ] = no dimensions So, the dimensions of 2Td/rgcos𝜃 = [M1 L0 T-2 ] x [M1 L-3 T0 ] / [M0 L1 T0 ] x [M0 L1 T-2 ] = [M2 L-5 T0 ] Dimensions of terms on L.H.S are not equal to dimensions on R.H.S. Hence, formula is not correct. Example 6 Check the accuracy of the following relations: (i) E = mgh + ½ mv2 ; (ii) v3 -u2 = 2as2 . Sol. (i) E = mgh + ½ mv2 Here, dimensions of the term on L.H.S. Energy, E = [M1 L2 T-2 ] Dimensions of the terms on R.H.S, Dimensions of the term, mgh = [M] ×[LT-2 ] × [L] = [M1 L2 T-2 ] Dimensions of the term, ½ mv2 = [M] × [LT-1 ]2 = [M1 L2 T-2 ] Thus, dimensions of all the terms on both sides of the relation are same; therefore, the relation is correct. (ii) The given relation is, v3 -u2 = 2as2 Dimensions of the terms on L.H.S v3 = [M0 ] × [LT-1 ]3 = [M0 L3 T-3 ] u2 = [M0 ] × [LT-1 ]2 = [M0 L2 T-2 ] Dimensions of the terms on R.H.S 2as2 = [M0 ] × [LT-2 ] ×[L]2 = [M0 L3 T-2 ] Substituting the dimensions in the relations, v3 -u2 = 2as2
  • 23. 11 We get, [M0 L3 T-3 ] - [M0 L2 T-2 ] = [M0 L3 T-2 ] The dimensions of all the terms on both sides are not same; therefore, the relation is not correct. Example 7 The velocity of a particle is given in terms of time t by the equation v = at + b t c  What are the dimensions of a, b and c? Sol. Dimensional formula for L.H.S V = [L1 T-1 ] In the R.H.S dimensional formula of at [T] = [L1 T-1 ] a = [LT-1 ] / [T-1 ] = [L1 T-2 ] t +c = time, c has dimensions of time and hence is added in t. Dimensions of t + c is [T] Now, b t c  = v b = v (t + c) = [LT-1 ] [T] = [L] There dimensions of a = [L1 T-2 ], dimensions of b = [L] and that of c = [T] Example 8 In the gas equation (P + a/v2 ) (v – b) = RT, where T is the absolute temperature, P is pressure and v is volume of gas. What are dimensions of a and b? Sol. Like quantities are added or subtracted from each other i.e. (P + a/v2 ) has dimensions of pressure = [ML-1 T-2 ] Hence, a/v2 will be dimensions of pressure = [ML-1 T-2 ] a = [ML-1 T-2 ] [volume]2 = [ML-1 T-2 ] [L3 ]2 a = [ML-1 T-2 ] [L6 ] = [ML5 T-2 ] Dimensions of a = [ML5 T-2 ] (v – b) have dimensions of volume i.e., b will have dimensions of volume i.e., [L3 ] or [M0 L3 T0 ] 2. To convert a physical quantity from one system of units into another. Physical quantity can be expressed as Q = nu Let n1u1 represent the numerical value and unit of a physical quantity in one system and n2u2 in the other system. If for a physical quantity Q; M1L1T1be the fundamental unit in one system and M2L2T2 be fundamental unit of the other system and dimensions in mass, length and time in each system can be respectively a,b,c. u1 = [ M1 a L1 b T1 c ] u2 = [ M2 a L2 b T2 c ]
  • 24. 12 As we know n1u1 = n2u2 n2 =n1u1/u2 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 a b c a b c M L T n n M L T          1 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 a b c M L T n n M L T                            While applying the above relations the system of unit as first system in which numerical value of physical quantity is given and the other as second system Thus knowing [M1L1T1], [M2L2T2] a, b, c and n1, we can calculate n2. Example 9 Convert a force of 1 newton to dyne. Sol. To convert the force from MKS system to CGS system, we need the equation Q = n1u1 = n2u2 Thus 1 1 2 2 n u n u  Here n1 = 1, u1 = 1N, u2 = dyne 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 M LT n n M L T            2 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 M L T n n M L T               2 2 1 kg m s n n gm cm s                2 2 1 1000 100 gm cm s n n gm cm s                2 1(1000)(100) n  5 2 10 n  Thus 1N= 5 10 dynes. Example 10 Convert work of 1 erg into joule. Sol: Here we need to convert work from CGS system to MKS system Thus in the equation 1 1 2 2 n u n u  n1 =1 u1 = erg (CGS unit of work) u2 = joule (SI unit of work) 1 1 2 2 n u n u 
  • 25. 13 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 M L T n n M L T    2 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 M L T n n M L T                  2 2 2 1 gm cm s n n kg m s                   2 2 2 1 1000 100 gm cm s n n gm cm s                   3 2 2 2 1(10 )(10 ) n    7 2 10 n   Thus, 1 erg = 7 10 joule. Limitations of Dimensional Equation: The method of dimensions has the following limitations: 1. It does not help us to find the value of dimensionless constants involved in various physical relations. The values, of such constants have to be determined by some experiments or mathematical investigations. 2. This method fails to derive formula of a physical quantity which depends upon more than three factors. Because only three equations are obtained by comparing the powers of M, L and T. 3. It fails to derive relations of quantities involving exponential and trigonometric functions. 4. The method cannot be directly applied to derive relations which contain more than one terms on one side or both sides of the equation, such as v= u + at or s = ut + ½ at2 etc. However, such relations can be derived indirectly. 5. A dimensionally correct relation may not be true physical relation because the dimensional equality is not sufficient for the correctness of a given physical relation. * * * * * *
  • 26. 14 EXERCISES Fill in the blanks: 1. The dimensional formula for coefficient of friction is …………….. 2. The dimensional formula for Modulus of elasticity is …………….. 3. 105 fermi is equal to ……………..angstrom. 4. The unit of angular velocity is……………………. 5. The unit for measuring the luminous intensity is ……………….. 6. The displacement of particle moving along x-axis with respect to time is x=at+bt2 -ct3 . The dimension of c is …………….. Short Answer Questions 1. Define Physics. 2. Define physical quantity. 3. Differentiate between fundamental and derived unit. 4. Write full form of the following system of units (i) CGS (ii) FPS (iii) MKS 5. Write definition of Dimensions. 6. What is the suitable unit for measuring distance between sun and earth? 7. Write the dimensional formula of the following physical quantity - (i) Momentum (ii) Power (iii) Surface Tension (iv) Strain v) density 8. State principle of Homogeneity of Dimensions. 9. Write the S.I & C.G.S units of the following physical quantities- (a) Force (b) Work 10. Write any three uses of dimensions. Long Answer Questions 1. Check the correctness of the relation 𝜆 = h /mv; where 𝜆 is wavelength, h- Planck‟s constant, m is mass of the particle and v - velocity of the particle. 2. Explain different types of system of units. 3. Convert 1 dyne to newton. 4. Check the correctness of the following relation by using method of dimensions (i) v = u + at (ii) F = mv / r2 (iii) v2 – u2 = 2as 5. State any four limitations of dimensional analysis. 6. Convert an acceleration of 100 m/s2 into km/h2 .
  • 27. 15 Chapter 2 FORCE AND MOTION Learning objective: After going through this chapter, students will be able to - Understand scalar and vector quantities, addition of vectors, scalar and vector products etc. - State and apply Newton’s laws of motion. - Describe linear momentum, circular motion, application of centripetal force. 2.1 SCALAR AND VECTOR QUANTITIES Scalar Quantities: Scalar quantities are those quantities which have only magnitude but no direction. Examples: Mass, length, density, volume, energy, temperature, distance, speed, electric charge, current, electric potential etc. Vector Quantities: Vector quantities are those quantities which are having both magnitude as well as direction. Examples: Displacement, velocity, acceleration, force, electric intensity, magnetic intensity etc. Representation of Vector: A vector is represented by a straight line with an arrow head. Here, the length of the line represents the magnitude and arrow head gives the direction of vector. Types of Vectors Negative Vectors: The negative of a vector is defined as another vector having same magnitude but opposite in direction. i. e. any vector 𝐴 and its negative vector [–𝐴] are shown in Fig.2.2. Equal Vector: Two or more vectors are said to be equal, if they have same magnitude and same direction. If 𝐴 and 𝐵 are two equal vectors then Figure: 2.1 Figure: 2.2 Figure: 2.3
  • 28. 16 Unit Vector: A vector divided by its magnitude is called a unit vector. It has a magnitude one unit and direction same as the direction of given vector. It is denoted by 𝐴 (A cap). 𝐴 = 𝐴 𝐴 Collinear Vectors: Two or more vectors having equal or unequal magnitudes, but having same direction are called collinear vectors Zero Vector: A vector having zero magnitude and arbitrary direction (be not fixed) is called zero vector. It is denoted by O. 2.2 LAWS OF ADDITION OF VECTORS (i) Triangle law of vector addition. Magnitude of the resultant is given by 𝑅 = 𝐴2 + 𝐵2 + 2𝐴𝐵 𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝜃 And direction of the resultant is given by 𝑡𝑎𝑛 𝛽 = 𝐵 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃 𝐴 + 𝐵 𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝜃 (ii) Parallelogram (||gm) law of vectors addition: It states that if two vectors, acting simultaneously at a point, can have represented both in magnitude and direction by the two adjacent sides of a parallelogram, the resultant is represented by the diagonal of the parallelogram passing through that point (Fig. 2.6). Magnitude of the resultant is given by 𝑅 = 𝑃2 + 𝑄2 + 2𝑃𝑄 𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝜃 And direction of the resultant is given by 𝑡𝑎𝑛 𝜙 = 𝑄 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃 𝑃 + 𝑄 𝑐𝑜𝑠 𝜃 It two vectors can be represented in magnitude and direction by the two sides of a triangle taken in the same order, then the resultant is represented in magnitude and direction, by third side of the triangle taken in the opposite order (Fig. 2.5). Figure: 2.4 Figure: 2.5 Figure: 2.6
  • 29. 17 2.3 SCALAR AND VECTOR PRODUCT Multiplication of Vectors (i) Scalar (or dot) Product: of two vectors is defined as the product of magnitude of two vectors and the cosine of the smaller angle between them. The dot product of vectors 𝐴 and 𝐵 can be represented as (ii) Vector (or Cross) Product: of two vectors is defined as a vector having a magnitude equal to the product of the magnitudes of the two vectors and the sine of the angle between them and is in the direction perpendicular to the plane containing the two vectors. Thus, the vector product of two vectors A and B is equal to 𝐴 × 𝐵 = 𝐴𝐵 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝜃 𝑛 2.4 DEFINITION OF DISTANCE, DISPLACEMENT, SPEED, VELOCITY, ACCELERATION Distance: The path covered by an object during it motion is called distance. Distance is a scalar quantity. SI unit is metre (m). Displacement: The shortest distance between the two points is called displacement. It is a vector quantity. SI unit is metre. Dimension formula: [L] Speed: The rate of change of distance is called speed. Speed is a scalar quantity. distance time speed  Unit: ms-1 . Linear Velocity: The time rate of change of displacement. 𝑣 = 𝑐ℎ𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑒 𝑖𝑛 𝑑𝑖𝑠𝑝𝑙𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑡𝑖𝑚𝑒 Units of Velocity: ms-1 Dimension formula = [M0 L1 T-1 ] Acceleration: The change in velocity per unit time. i.e. the time rate of change of velocity. 𝑎 = 𝐶ℎ𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑒 𝑖𝑛 𝑣𝑒𝑙𝑜𝑐𝑖𝑡𝑦 𝑡𝑖𝑚𝑒 Figure: 2.7
  • 30. 18 If the velocity increases with time, the acceleration „a‟ is positive. If the velocity decreases with time, the acceleration „a‟ is negative. Negative acceleration is also known as retardation. Units of acceleration: C.G.S. unit is cm/s2 (cms-2 ) and the SI unit is m/s2 (ms-2 ). Dimension formula = [M0 L1 T-2 ] 2.5 FORCE Force: Force is an agent that produces acceleration in the body on which it acts. Or It is a push or a pull which change or tends to change the position of the body at rest or in uniform motion. Force is a vector quantity. For example, (i) To move a football, we have to exert a push i.e., kick on the football (ii) To stop football or a body moving with same velocity, we have to apply push in a direction opposite to the direction of the body. SI unit is newton. Dimension formula: [MLT-2 ] Concept of Resolution of a Force The phenomenon of breaking a given force into two or more forces in different directions is known as resolution of force. The forces obtained on splitting the given force are called components of the given force. If these are at right angles to each other, then these components are called rectangular components. Let a force F be represented by a line OP. Let OB (or Fx) is component of F along x- axis and OC (or Fy) is component along y-axis (Fig. 2.8). Let force F makes an angle θ with x-axis. In Δ OPB sin𝜃 = OB OP or PB = OP sin𝜃 Fy = F sin𝜃 cos𝜃 = OB OP OB = OP cos𝜃 Figure: 2.8
  • 31. 19 Fx = F cos𝜃 Vector 𝐹 = 𝐹 𝑥 + 𝐹 𝑦 So, resultant: 𝐹 = 𝐹 𝑥 2 + 𝐹 𝑦 2 2.6 NEWTON'S LAWS OF MOTION Sir Isaac Newton gave three fundamental laws. These laws are called Newton's laws of motion. These are Newton’s First Law: It states that everybody continues in its state of rest or of uniform motion in a straight line until some external force is applied on it. For example, the book lying on a table will not move at its own. It does not change its position from the state of rest until no external force is applied on it. Newton’s Second law: The rate of change of momentum of a body is directly proportional to the applied force and the change takes place in the direction of force applied. Or Acceleration produced in a body is directly proportional to force applied. Let us consider a body of mass m is moving with a velocity u. Let a force F be applied so that its velocity changes from u to v in t second. Initial momentum = mu Final momentum after time t second = mv Total change in momentum = mv-mu. Thus, the rate of change of momentum will be 𝑚𝑣 − 𝑚𝑢 𝑡 From Newton's second law F mv mu t   or ( ) F m v m t   but v u t  = Change in velocity time = acceleration (a) Hence, we have F  ma or F = k ma Where k is constant of proportionality, for convenience let k = 1. Then F = ma Units of force: One dyne is that much force which produces an acceleration of 1cm/s2 in a mass of 1 gm. 1 dyne = 1 gm x 1 cm/s2 = 1 gm cm s-2
  • 32. 20 One newton is that much force which produces an acceleration of 1 m/s2 in a mass of 1kg. Using F = ma 1N = 1 kg x 1 m/s2 or = 1 kgm/s2 IN =1000 gm×100 cm/s2 = 105 dyne Newton’s Third law: it state that to every action there is an equal and opposite reaction or action and reaction are equal and opposite. When a body exerts a force on another body, the other body also exerts an equal force on the first body but in opposite direction. From Newton's third law these forces always occur in pairs. If two bodies A and B applies force on each other, then FAB (force on A by B) = -FBA (force on B by A) 2.7 LINEAR MOMENTUM, CONSERVATION OF MOMENTUM, IMPULSE Linear Momentum (p): The quantity of motion contained in the body is linear momentum. It is given by product of mass and the velocity of the body. It is a vector and its direction is the same as the direction of the velocity. Let m be the mass and v is the velocity of a body at some instant, then its linear momentum is given by p = mv Example, a fast-moving cricket ball has more momentum in it than a slow moving one. But a slow-moving heavy roller has more momentum than a fast cricket ball. Units of momentum: The SI unit is kg m/s i.e. kgms-1 Dimension formula = [M1 L1 T-1 ] Law of conservation of Momentum It states that if external force acting on a system of bodies is zero then the total linear momentum of a system always remains constant. As we know from newton‟s second law of motion F= dp dt i.e. If F=0 Thus, F= 0 dp dt  Hence, p (momentum) is constant. Application of law of conservation of momentum Recoil of the Gun: When a bullet is fired with a gun the bullet moves in forward direction and gun is recoiled/pushed backwards. Let
  • 33. 21 m = mass of bullet u = velocity of bullet M = mass of gun V = velocity of gun The gun and bullet form an isolated system, so the total momentum of gun and bullet before firing = 0 Total momentum of gun and bullet after firing= mu + MV Using law of conservation of momentum 0 = m.u + M.v MV = -mu V = −𝑚𝑢 𝑀 This is the expression for recoil velocity of gun. Here negative sign shows that motion of the gun is in opposite direction to that of the bullet. Also, velocity of gun is inversely proportional to its mass. Lesser the mass, larger will be the recoil velocity of the gun. Impulse Impulse is defined as the total change in momentum produced by the impulsive force. OR Impulse may be defined as the product of force and time and is equal to the total change in momentum of the body. F.t = p2– p1= total change in momentum Example: A kick given to a football or blow made with hammer. SI unit: Ns 2.8 CIRCULAR MOTION The motion of a body in a circle of fixed radius is called circular motion. For example, the motion of a stone tied to a string when whirled in the air is a circular motion. Angular Displacement (θ): The angle subtended by a body while moving in a circle is called angular displacement. Consider a body moves in a circle, starting from A to B so that BOA is called angular displacement The SI unit of angular displacement is radian (rad.) Angular Velocity: Angular velocity of a body moving in a circle is the rate of change of angular displacement with time. It is denoted by ω (omega) If θ is the angular displacement in time t then Figure: 2.9
  • 34. 22 t    SI unit of angular velocity is rad/s Time Period: Time taken by a body moving in a circle to complete one cycle is called time period. It is denoted by T Frequency (n): The number of cycles completed by a body in one second is called frequency. It is reciprocal of time period; 𝑛 = 1 𝑇 Angular Acceleration: The time rate of change of angular velocity of a body. It is denoted by α. Let angular velocity of a body moving in a circle change from ω1 to ω2 in time t, then 𝛼 = 𝜔1 − 𝜔2 𝑡 SI unit of „‟ is rad/s2 Relationship between linear and angular velocity Consider a body moving in a circle of radius r Let it start from A and reaches to B after time t, so that BOA = θ (Fig. 2.9). Now 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 = 𝑎𝑟𝑐 𝑟𝑎𝑑𝑖𝑢𝑠 𝜃 = 𝐴𝐵 𝑂𝐴 = 𝑆 𝑟 𝑆 = 𝑟𝜃 Dividing both sides by time (t), we get 𝑆 𝑡 = 𝑟 𝜃 𝑡 Here v s t  is linear velocity And t    is angular velocity Hence v = 𝑟𝜔 2.9 CENTRIPETAL AND CENTRIFUGAL FORCES Centripetal Force: The force acting along the radius towards the centre of circle to keep a body moving with uniform speed in a circular path is called centripetal force. It is denoted by FC. 𝐹 𝑐 = 𝑚𝑣2 𝑟 For example, a stone tied at one end of a string whose other end is held in hand, when round in the air, the centripetal force is supplied by the tension in the string.
  • 35. 23 Centrifugal Force: A body moving in circle with uniform speed experience a force in a direction away from the centre of the circle. This force is called centrifugal force. For example, cream is separated from milk by using centrifugal force. When milk is rotated in cream separator, cream particles in the milk being lighter, experience less centrifugal force. 2.10 APPLICATION OF CENTRIPETAL FORCE IN BANKING OF ROADS Banking of Roads: While travelling on a road, you must have noticed that the outer edge of circular road is slightly raised above as compared to the inner edge of road. This is called banking of roads (Fig. 2.10). Angle of Banking: The angle through which the outer edge of circular road is raised above the inner edge of circular roads is called angle of banking. Application of centripetal force in banking of roads Let m = mass of vehicle r = radius of circular road v = uniform speed (velocity) of vehicle θ = angle of banking At the body two forces act. Figure 2.10 (i) Weight (mg) of vehicle vertically downwards. (ii) Normal reaction (R). R makes an angle θ and resolves the forces into two components (i) Rsinθ towards the centre (ii) Rcosθ vertically upwards and balance by weight of (mg) vehicle Rsinθ provides the necessary centripetal force ( 2 mv r ) 2 mv Rsin r   - - - - - (1) and R cosθ = mg - - - - -(2) Divide equation 1 by 2 2 cos mv RSin r R mg    𝑡𝑎𝑛𝜃 = 𝑣2 𝑟𝑔 𝜃 = 𝑡𝑎𝑛−1 𝑣2 𝑟𝑔 * * * * * * Figure: 2.10
  • 36. 24 EXERCISES Fill in the blanks: 1. The maximum possible number of rectangular components of a vector is …………. 2. The acceleration of the particle performing uniform circular motion is called………… 3. Centripetal force always acts ……… (towards/away to) the centre of the circle. 4. Railway tracks are banked at the curves so that the necessary …………..force may be obtained from the horizontal component of the reaction on the train. 5. The angle through which the outer edge of a circular road is raised above its inner edge is called …………. 6. A model aeroplane fastened to a post by a fine thread is flying in a horizontal circle. Suddenly the thread breaks. The aeroplane will fly ……………(inward/outward) 7. A force which acts for a small time and also varies with time is called ………………. Short Answer Type Questions 1. State and explain laws of vector addition. 2. Explain resolution of a vector. 3. How is impulse related to linear momentum? 4. Define circular motion. Give examples. 5. Define banking of roads. 3. Define scalar and vector quantities with examples. 4. Define resolution and composition of forces. 5. Define impulse. 6. Why does a gun recoil when a bullet is fired? 7. Differentiate between centripetal and centrifugal forces. 8. An artificial satellite takes 90 minutes to complete its revolution around the earth. Calculate the angular speed of satellite. [Ans. 2700 rad/sec] 9. At what maximum speed a racing car can transverse an unbanked curve of 30 m radius? The co-efficient of friction between types and road is 0.6. [Ans. 47.8] 10. Define Force. Give its units. 11. Define Triangle law of vector addition. 12. State parallelogram law of vector addition. Long Answer Type Questions 1. Explain Newton‟s Law of Motion. 2. Explain Banking of Roads. 3. State law of conservation of momentum. 4. Derive relationship between linear and angular velocity. 5. Derive a relation between linear acceleration and angular acceleration.
  • 37. 25 Chapter 3 WORK, POWER AND ENERGY Learning objective: After going through this chapter, students will be able to; - Understand work, energy and power, their units and dimensions. - Describe different types of energies and energy conservation. - Solve relevant numerical problems 3.1 WORK (DEFINITION, SYMBOL, FORMULA AND SI UNITS) Work: is said to be done when the force applied on a body displaces it through certain distance in the direction of applied force. Work = Force × Displacement In vector form, it is written as F  .S  = FS Cos It is measured as the product of the magnitude of force and the distance covered by the body in the direction of the force. It is a scalar quantity. Unit: SI unit of work is joule (J). In CGS system, unit of work is erg. 1J = 107 ergs Dimension of work = [M1 L2 T–2 ] Example1. What work is done in dragging a block 10 m horizontally when a 50 N force is applied by a rope making an angle of 30° with the ground? Sol. Here, F = 50 N, S = 10 m, = 30 W = FS Cos θ W = 50 × 10 × Cos 30° 3 50x10x 2 W  = 612.4 J Example2. A man weighing 50 kg supports a body of 25 kg on head. What is the work done when he moves a distance of 20 m? Sol. Total mass = 50 + 25 = 75 kg θ = 90° Distance = 20 m W = FS × 0 (Cos 90o = 0) W = 0 Thus, work done is zero. Example3. A man weighing 50 kg carries a load of 10 kg on his head. Find the work done when he goes (i) 15 m vertically up (ii) 15 m on a levelled path on the ground. Sol. Mass of the man, m1= 50 kg Mass carried by a man, m2 = 10 kg Total mass M = m1 + m2 = 50 + 10 = 60 kg. When the man goes vertically up,
  • 38. 26 Height through which he rises, h = 15 m W = mgh = 60 × 9.8 × 15 = 8820 J When the man goes on a levelled path on the ground W= FS Cosθ As θ =90o , therefore, Cos 90o = 0 Hence W= F×S×0 =0 3.2 ENERGY Energy of a body is defined as the capacity of the body to do the work. Like work, energy is also a scalar quantity. Unit: SI system – joule (J), CGS system - erg Dimensional Formula: [ML2 T–2 ]. Transformation of Energy The phenomenon of changing energy from one form to another form is called transformation of energy. For example-  In a heat engine, heat energy changes into mechanical energy  In an electric bulb, the electric energy changes into light energy.  In an electric heater, the electric energy changes into heat energy.  In a fan, the electric energy changes into mechanical energy which rotates the fan.  In the sun, mass changes into radiant energy.  In an electric motor, the electric energy is converted into mechanical energy.  In burning of coal, oil etc., chemical energy changes into heat and light energy.  In a dam, potential energy of water changes into kinetic energy, then K.E rotates the turbine which produces the electric energy.  In an electric bell, electric energy changes into sound energy.  In a generator, mechanical energy is converted into the electric energy. 3.3 KINETIC ENERGY (FORMULA, EXAMPLES AND ITS DERIVATION) Kinetic Energy (K.E.): the energy possessed by the body by virtue of its motions is called kinetic energy. For example (i) running water (ii) Moving bullet. Expression for Kinetic Energy Consider F is the force acting on the body at rest (i.e., u = 0), then it moves in the direction of force to distance (s). Figure: 3.1
  • 39. 27 Let v be the final velocity. Using relation 2 2 2 v u aS   2 2 2 v u a S   2 0 2 v a S   2 2 v a S  --------------(1) Now, work done, W= FS or W= maS (using F =ma) ------------- (2) By equation (1) and (2) 2 . . 2 v W m S S  or 2 1 2 W mv  This work done is stored in the body as kinetic energy. So kinetic energy possessed by the body is (K.E.) = 2 1 2 mv 3.4 POTENTIAL ENERGY Potential Energy (P.E.): the energy possessed by the body by virtue of its position is called potential energy. Example (i) Water stored in a dam (ii) Mango hanging on the branch of a tree Expression for Potential Energy (P.E) It is defined as the energy possessed by the body by virtue of its position above the surface of earth. W = FS Work done = Force × height = mg × h = mgh This work done is stored in the form of gravitational potential energy. Hence Potential energy =mgh. LAW OF CONSERVATION OF ENERGY Energy can neither be created nor be destroyed but can be converted from one form to another. h Figure: 3.2 m
  • 40. 28 3.5 CONSERVATION OF MECHANICAL ENERGY OF A FREE FALLING BODY Let us consider K.E., P.E. and total energy of a body of mass m falling freely under gravity from a height h from the surface of ground. According to Fig. 3.3 At position A: Initial velocity of body (u) = 0 K.E = 2 1 2 mv P. E. = mgh Total Energy = K.E + P.E = 0 + mgh = mgh ------------- (1) At position B Potential energy = mg(h – x) Velocity at point B = u From equation of motion K.E. = 2 1 2 mu As 2 2 2 V U aS   Hence 2 2 0 2 u gx   or 2 2 u gx  Putting this value we get, KE= 1 2 (2 ) m gx or K.E. = mgx Total Energy = K.E + P.E = mgx + mg(h – x) = mgh --------(2) At position C Potential energy = 0 (as h = 0) Velocity at Point B = v From equation of motion K.E. = 2 1 2 mv As 2 2 2 V U aS   Hence 2 2 0 2 v gh   or 2 2 v gh  Putting this value we get KE= 1 2 (2 ) m gh or K.E. = mgh Total Energy = K.E + P.E = mgh + 0 = mgh ---------(3) From equations (1), (2) and (3), it is clear that total mechanical energy of freely falling body at all the positions is same and hence remains conserved. Figure: 3.3
  • 41. 29 Example 4 A spring extended by 20 mm possesses a P.E. of 10 J. What will be P.E., if the extension of spring becomes 30 mm? Sol. h = 20 mm = 20 × 10–3 m g = 9.8 ms–2 , m =? P.E = mgh = 10 J i.e., m × 9.8 × 20 × 10–3 = 10 J 3 10 9.8x20x10 m   m =51.02 kg When extension is 30 mm i.e., 30 × 10–3 m, then P.E =mgh = 51.02 × 9.8×3 × 10–3 = 15.0 J 3.6 POWER (DEFINITION, FORMULA AND UNITS) Power is defined as the rate at which work is done by a force. The work done per unit time is also called power. If a body do work W in time t, then power is W P t  Units of Power: SI unit of power is watt (W) 1 1 1 J W s  Power is said to be 1 W, if 1 J work is done in 1 s. Bigger units of power are: kilowatt (kW) = 103 W Megawatt (MW) = 106 W Horse power (hp) = 746 W Dimension of power = [M1 L2 T-3 ] Example 5 A man weighing 65 kg lifts a mass of 45 kg to the top of a building 10 metres high in 12 second. Find; (i)Total work done by him. The power developed by him. Solution Mass of the man, m1 = 65 kg Mass lifted m2 = 45 kg Height through which raised h = 10 m Time taken t = 12 seconds. (i) Total work done by the man, W = mgh = 110 × 9.81 × 10 = 10791.0 J (ii) Power developed W 10791J 899.25 W t 12 P s    * * * * * *
  • 42. 30 EXERCISES Fill in the blanks: 1. There are two bodies X and Y with equal kinetic energy but different masses m and 4 m respectively. The ratio of their linear momentum is…… 2. When a spring is stretched, its potential energy …………. 3. 1 kWH= ……. J Short Answer Type Questions 1. Define the terms energy, potential energy and kinetic energy. 2. Define potential energy, Derive expression for gravitational potential energy. 3. Define work and write its unit. 4. State and prove principle of conservation of energy. 5. Define power. Give it S.I unit and dimensions. 6. Explain transformation of energy. 7. A person walking on a horizontal road with a load on his head does not work. Explain. 8. Give some examples of transformation of energy. Long Answer Type Questions 1. State and explain the law of conservation of energy for free falling body. 2. Define power and energy. Give their units. 3. Define kinetic energy with examples. Obtain an expression for kinetic energy of body moving with uniform speed.
  • 43. 31 Chapter 4 ROTATIONAL MOTION Learning objective: After going through this chapter, students will be able to; - Define rotational motion and parameters like; torque, angular momentum and momentum conservation. - Describe Moment of inertia and radius of gyration. - Solve relevant numerical problems. 4.1 ROTATIONAL MOTION WITH EXAMPLES The rotation of a body about fixed axis is called Rotational motion. For example, (i) Motion of a wheel about its axis (ii) Rotation of earth about its axis. 4.2 DEFINITION OF TORQUE AND ANGULAR MOMENTUM Torque () It is measured as the product of magnitude of force and perpendicular distance of the line of action of force from the axis of rotation. It is denoted by τ, x F r      Where F is external force and r is perpendicular distance. Unit: newton (N) Dimension Formula: [M1 L2 T-2 ] Angular Momentum (L) Angular momentum of a rotating body about its axis of rotation is the algebraic sum of the linear momentum of its particles about the axis. It is denoted by L. It is vector quantity. L = momentum × perpendicular distance L= p × r or L= mvr Unit: Kg m2 /sec Dimensional Formula = [ML2 T–1 ] Figure: 4.1
  • 44. 32 4.3 LAW OF CONSERVATION OF ANGULAR MOMENTUM When no external torque acts on a system of particles, then the total angular momentum of the system always remains constant. Let I be moment of inertia and ω the angular velocity, then angular momentum is given as L = Iω Also the torque is given by dL dt   If no external torque acts on the body, then τ = 0 Hence dL dt   =0 Thus L is constant (as derivative of constant quantity is zero). Hence, if no external torque acts on system, the total angular momentum remains conserved. Examples: (i) An ice skater who brings in her arms while spinning spins faster. Her moment of inertia is dropping (reducing the moment of arm) so her angular velocity increases to keep the angular momentum constant (ii) Springboard diver stretches his body in between his journey. 5.4 MOMENT OF INERTIA AND ITS PHYSICAL SIGNIFICANCE Moment of Inertia of a rotating body about an axis is defined as the sum of the product of the mass of various particles constituting the body and square of respective perpendicular distance of different particles of the body from the axis of rotation. Expression for the Moment of Inertia: Let us consider a rigid body of mass M having n number of particles revolving about any axis. Let m1, m2, m3 ..., mn be the masses of particles at distance r1, r2, r3... rn from the axis of rotation respectively (Fig. 4.2). Moment of Inertia of whole body I = m1r1 2 + m2r2 2 + ... mnrn 2 or 2 1 n i i i I m r    Physical Significance of Moment of Inertia It is totally analogous to the concept of inertial mass. Moment of inertia plays the same role in rotational motion as that of mass in translational motion. In rotational motion, a body, which is free to rotate about a given axis, opposes any change in state of rotation. Moment of Inertia of a body depends on the distribution of mass in a body with respect to the axis of rotation. Figure: 4.2
  • 45. 33 Radius of Gyration (K) It may be defined as the distance of a point from the axis of rotation at which whole mass of the body is supposed to be concentrated, so that moment of inertia about the axis remains the same. It is denoted by K If the mass of the body is M, the moment of inertia (I) of the body in terms of radius of gyration is given as, 2 I MK  ---------- (1) Expression for Radius of Gyration Let m1, m2, m3 ..., mn be the masses of particles at distance r1, r2, r3... rn from the axis of rotation respectively (Fig. 4.3). Then Moment of Inertia of whole body I = m1r1 2 + m2r2 2 + .......+mnrn 2 If mass of all particles is taken same, then I = m (r1 2 + r2 2 + ..........+rn 2 ) Multiply and divide the equation by n (number of particle)  2 2 2 1 2 x ( ............ ) n m n r r r I n     or 2 2 2 1 2 ( ............ ) n M r r r I n     ---------- (2) (M=m×n, is total mass of body) Comparing equation (1) and (2) , we get 2 2 2 2 1 2 ( ............ ) n M r r r MK n     Or 2 2 2 2 1 2 ( ............ ) n r r r K n     2 2 2 1 2 ( ............ ) n r r r K n     Thus, radius of gyration may also be defined as the root mean square (r.m.s.) distance of particles from the axis of rotation. Unit: metre. Example 1. What torque will produce an acceleration of 2 rad/s2 in a body if moment of inertia is 500 kg m2 ? Sol. Here, I = 500 kg m2 α = 2 rad/s2 Now, torque τ = I× α = 500 kgm2 × 2 rad/s2 = 1000 kg m2 s–2 = 1000 Nm or J Figure: 4.3
  • 46. 34 Example2. An engine is rotating at the rate of 1500 rev. per minute. Find its angular velocity. Sol. Here, Revolution per minute of engine, n= 1500 Angular velocity 2 n    Or 22 1500 2 7 60     157.1   rad/s Example 3. How large a torque is needed to accelerate a wheel, for which I = 2 kgm2 , from rest to 30 r.p.s in 20 seconds? Sol. Here, Moment of inertia, I = 2 kgm2 R.P.S after 20 sec, n = 30 Initial velocity, ω1 = 0 Final velocity, ω2 = 2 x π x 30 = 188.4 rad/s. Angular acceleration = 2 1 t    = 188.4 0 20  = 9.43 rad/s2 . Now, torque, τ = I× α = 2 kg m2 × 9.43 rad/s2 = 18.86 Nm or J Example 4. If a point on the rim of wheel 4 m in diameter has a linear velocity of 16 m/ s, find the angular velocity of wheel in rad/sec. Sol. Radius of wheel (R) = 2 Diameter = 2 4 = 2 m From the relation v r  16 2 v r    = 8 rad/s. Angular velocity of wheel is 8 rad/s. * * * * *
  • 47. 35 EXERCISES Fill in the blanks: 1. The radius of gyration of a ring of radius R about an axis through its centre and perpendicular to its plane is ……………… 2. Two rings have their moment of inertia in the ratio 2:1 and their diameters are in the ratio 2:1. The ratio of their masses will be ………………….. 3. A person standing on a rotating platform with his hands lowered outstretches his arms. The angular momentum of the person ……………… 4. An earth satellite is moving around the earth in a circular orbit. In such a case, ………… is conserved. 5. When no external torque acts on a system, its ……………. is conserved. Short Answer Type Question 1. Define torque. 2. Define rotational inertia or moment of inertia. Give its SI unit. 3. Define radius of gyration and give its SI units. 4. Derive the relation between torque and angular momentum. Long Answer Type Question 1. Derive an expression for angular momentum in terms of moment of inertia. 2. State and prove law of conservation of angular momentum. 3. Define radius of gyration and derive its expression. 4. Define moment of inertia. Derive its expression and explain its physical significance.
  • 48. 36 Chapter 5 PROPERTIES OF MATTER Learning objective: After going through this chapter, students will be able to; - Understand elasticity, deforming force, restoring force etc. - Define stress, strain, Hook’s law, modulus of elasticity, pressure etc.. - Describe surface tension, viscosity and effect of temperature on these. - Understand fluid motion and nature of flow. 5.1 DEFINITION OF ELASTICITY, DEFORMING FORCE, RESTORING FORCE, EXAMPLE OF ELASTIC AND PLASTIC BODY Elasticity: It is the property of solid materials to return to their original shape and size after removal of deforming force. Deforming Forces: The forces which bring the change in configuration of the body are called deforming forces. Restoring Force: It is a force exerted on a body or a system that tends to move it towards an equilibrium state. Elastic Body: It is the body that returns to its original shape after a deformation. Examples are Golf ball, Soccer ball, Rubber band etc. Plastic Body: It is the body that do not return to its original shape after a deformation. Examples are Polyethylene, Polypropylene, Polystyrene and Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC). 5.2 DEFINITION OF STRESS AND STRAIN WITH THEIR TYPES Stress: It is defined as the restoring force per unit area of a material. Stress is of two types: 1. Normal Stress: If deforming force acts normal (perpendicular) to the surface of the body then the stress is normal stress. 2. Tangential Stress: If deforming force acts tangentially to the surface of the body then the stress is tangential stress. Strain: It is defined as the ratio of change in configuration to the original configuration, when a deforming force is applied to a body. The strain is of three types: (i) Longitudinal strain: If the deforming force produces a change in length only, the strain produced is called longitudinal strain or tensile strain. It is defined as the ratio of change in length to the original length. Longitudinal strain = Change in length(∆𝑙) original length(𝑙)
  • 49. 37 (ii) Volumetric strain: It is defined as the ratio of the change in volume to the original volume. Volumetricstrain = Change in volume(∆V) original volume(V) (iii) Shearing strain: It is defined as the ratio of lateral displacement of a surface under the tangential force to the perpendicular distance between surfaces Shearing strain = Lateral Displacement Distance between surfaces = ∆𝐿 𝐿 = tan Ф The shearing strain is also defined as the angle in radian through which a plane perpendicular to the fixed surface of a rectangular block gets turned under the effect to tangential force. Units of strain: Strain is a ratio of two similar physical quantities, it is unitless and dimensionless. 5.3 HOOK’S LAW, MODULUS OF ELASTICITY Hook’s law: Within elastic limits, the stress and strain are proportional to each other. Thus, Stress ∝ Strain Stress = E × Strain Where E is the proportionality constant and is known as modulus of elasticity. Modulus of Elasticity: The ratio of stress and strain is always constant and called as modulus of elasticity. Young’s Modulus (Y): The ratio of normal stress to the longitudinal strain is defined as Young’s modulus and is denoted by the symbol Y. F A Y l l   = F l A l   The unit of Young‟s modulus is the same as that of stress i.e., Nm–2 or pascal (Pa) Bulk Modulus (K): The ratio of normal (hydraulic) stress to the volumetric strain is called bulk modulus. It is denoted by symbol K. F A K V V   = F V A V   SI unit of bulk modulus is the same as that of pressure i.e., Nm–2 or Pa Figure: 5.1
  • 50. 38 Shear Modulus or Modulus of rigidity (𝜂): The ratio of shearing stress to the corresponding shearing strain is called the shear modulus of the material and is represented by 𝜂. It is also called the modulus of rigidity. Tangential stress Shear strain   F A L L    = F L A L   The SI unit of shear modulus is Nm–2 or Pa. 5.4 PRESSURE Pressure: It is defined as the force acting per unit area over the surface of a body. P = A F SI unit is Nm–2 or Pa Pascal Law: A change in the pressure applied to an enclosed incompressible fluid is transmitted undiminished to every portion of the fluid and to the walls of its container. Or it states that liquid enclosed in a vessel exerts equal pressure in all the directions. 5.5 SURFACE TENSION The property of a liquid due to which its free surface behaves like stretched membrane and acquires minimum surface area. It is given by force per unit length. 𝑇 = 𝐹 𝑙 Surface tension allows insects (usually denser than water) to float and stride on a water surface. SI unit is N/m. Applications of surface tension in daily life It plays an important role in many applications in our daily life.  Washing clothes  Cleaning  Cosmetics  Lubricants in machines  Spreading of ink, colours  Wetting of a surface  Action of surfactants  Paints, insecticides  Creating fuel-spray in automobile engines  Passing of liquid in porous media  Spherical shape of water droplets. Figure: 5.2
  • 51. 39 Effect of Temperature on Surface Tension In general, surface tension decreases when temperature increases and vice versa. This is because cohesive forces decrease with an increase of molecular thermal activity. The influence of the surrounding environment is due to the adhesive action liquid molecules have at the interface. 5.6 VISCOSITY The property of liquid due to which it oppose the relative motion between its layers. It is also known as liquid friction. SI unit of viscosity is pascal-second (Pas) and cgs unit is poise. Effect of Temperature on Viscosity In liquids the source for viscosity is considered to be atomic bonding. As we understand that, with the increase of temperature the bonds break and make the molecule free to move. So, we can conclude that the viscosity decreases as the temperature increases and vice versa. In gases, due to the lack of cohesion, the source of viscosity is the collision of molecules. Here, as the temperature increases the viscosity increases and vice versa. This is because the gas molecules utilize the given thermal energy in increasing its kinetic energy that makes them random and therefore resulting in more the number of collisions. 5.7 FLUID MOTION, STREAM LINE AND TURBULENT FLOW Fluid Motion: A liquid in motion is called fluid. There are two types of fluid motions; streamline and turbulent. Streamline Flow: Flow of a fluid in which its velocity at any point of given cross section is same. It is also called laminar flow. Turbulent flow: It is type of fluid (gas or liquid) flow in which the speed of the fluid at given cross section is continuously undergoing changes in both magnitude and direction. *********** Figure: 5.3
  • 52. 40 EXERCISES Fill in the blanks 1) Stress is defined as the ………………. per unit area of a material. 2) ……………………is the ratio of change in dimensions to the original dimensions. 3) For small deformations the stress and strain are proportional to each other. This is called ………………… 4) Pressure is defined as the force per unit ………………. over the surface of a body. 5) A change in the pressure applied to an enclosed incompressible fluid is transmitted undiminished to every portion of the fluid to the walls of its container. It is called…………………. 6) The property of solid materials to return to their original shape and size after the removal of deforming forces is called ................ Short Answer Type Questions 1. Define elasticity. 2. Define viscosity. 3. Define turbulent flow. 4. Define surface tension. 5. What is Young‟s modulus of elasticity? 6. State and explain Hooks Law. 7. State and explain Pascal‟s Law. 8. What is the effect of temperature on surface tension? 9. What is the effect of temperature on viscosity? 10. Give any five applications of surface tension. 11. Write difference between elastic and plastic bodies. Long Answer Type Questions 1. Explain different kind of modulus of elasticity. 2. Define surface tension. Give formula, units and applications of surface tension. 3. Explain streamline flow, laminar flow and turbulent flow. 4. Explain different types of stress. 5. Explain Young‟s modulus of elasticity and its units.
  • 53. 41 Chapter 6 HEAT AND TEMPERATURE Learning Objectives: After going through this chapter, the students will be able to: - Define heat and temperature; understand the difference between heat and temperature; - Describe principles of measuring temperature and different temperature scales, - Enlist properties of heat radiations and various modes of transfer of heat. 6.1 HEAT AND TEMPERATURE All objects are made of atoms or molecules. These molecules are always in some form of motion (linear, vibrational or rotational) and possess kinetic energy by virtue of their motion. The hotter an object is, faster will be the motion of the molecules inside it and hence more will be its kinetic energy. Heat of an object is the total energy of all the individual molecules of which the given object is made. It is a form of thermal energy. When the object is heated, its thermal energy increases, means its molecules begin to move more violently. Temperature, on the other hand, is a measure of the average heat or thermal energy of the molecules in a substance. Heat is the form of energy which produces the sensation of warmth or coldness. The cgs unit of heat is the calorie (cal) - defined as the amount of heat required to raise the temperature of 1g of water through 1o C. The S.I. unit of heat energy is the joule (J) The relation between these two units is: 1 cal = 4.18 J. Heat on the basis of kinetic theory: According to the kinetic theory, heat of a body is total kinetic energy of all its molecules. If a body have „n’ number of molecule having mass m and velocities v1, v2, v3, --------, vn respectively, then Total heat energy in the body (H) = Sum of kinetic energy of all molecules 2 2 2 2 1 2 3 1 1 1 1 ........ 2 2 2 2 n H K mv mv mv mv            ; where K is thermal constant. When the body is heated, the kinetic energy of each molecule inside it increases due to increase in their velocity. This results in the increase of total kinetic energy of the body and in turn represents total heat of the body. Temperature Temperature is the degree of hotness or coldness of the body. It is the average kinetic energy of all the molecules of which the given body is made and is given by the expression; 2 2 2 2 1 2 3 1 1 1 1 ........ 2 2 2 2 n K mv mv mv mv T n            Units of temperature are; fahrenheit (o F), celsius (o C) and kelvin (K). Kelvin is the S.I. unit of temperature.
  • 54. 42 6.2 DIFFERENCE BETWEEN HEAT AND TEMPERATURE: Heat Temperature Heat is energy that is transferred from one body to another as the result of a difference in temperature Temperature is a measure of degree of hotness or coldness It is total kinetic energy of all the molecules It is average kinetic energy of all the molecules It depends on quantity of matter It does not depend on quantity of matter It is form of energy (Thermal) It is measure of energy S.I. unit is joule S.I. unit is kelvin 6.3 PRINCIPLES OF MEASUREMENT OF TEMPERATURE: Measurement of temperature depends on the principle that properties (physical/ electrical/ chemical) of material changes with change in temperature. A device that utilizes a change in property of matter to measure temperature is known as thermometer. Temperature is a principle parameter that needs to be monitored and controlled in most engineering applications such as heating, cooling, drying and storage. Temperature can be measured via a diverse array of sensors. All of them infer temperature by sensing some change in a physical characteristic; be it a thermal expansion, thermoelectricity, electrical resistance or thermal radiation. There are four basic types of thermometers, each working on a different principle: 1. Mechanical (liquid-in-glass, bimetallic strips, bulb & capillary, pressure type etc.) 2. Thermo-electric (Thermocouples) 3. Thermo-resistive (RTDs and thermistors) 4. Radiative (Infrared and optical pyrometers). Each produces a different scale of temperature which can be related to one another. Commonly used thermometers are mercury thermometer, platinum resistance thermometer, thermo-electric and pyrometers. Liquid thermometers can measure temperature upto 300o C. Resistance thermometers can go upto 1200o C while thermo-electrics are used for measuring temperature as high as 3000o C. For still higher temperatures pyrometers (very hot furnaces) are used. 6.4 DIFFERENT SCALES OF TEMPERATURE AND THEIR RELATIONSHIP In general, there are three scales of temperature measurement. The scales are usually defined by two fixed points; temperature at which water freezes and the boiling point of water as defined at sea level and standard atmospheric pressure. a) Fahrenheit Scale: It was given by physicist Daniel Gabriel Fahrenheit in 1724. It uses the degree fahrenheit (symbol: °F) as the unit. On this scale, freezing point of water is taken as the lower fixed point (32°F) and boiling point of water is taken as upper fixed point (212°F). The interval between two points is divided into 180 equal parts. Each division is 1o F. This scale is used for clinical and meteorological purpose.
  • 55. 43 b). Celsius Scale: This scale was given by Anders Celsius in 1742. On this scale, freezing point of water is taken as the lower fixed point (marked 0°C) and boiling point of water is taken as upper fixed point (marked 100°C). The interval between two points is divided into 100 equal parts. Each division is 1o C. This scale is used for common scientific, clinical, meteorological and technological work. c). Kelvin Scale: This scale defines the SI base unit of temperature with symbol K. On this scale freezing point of water is taken as the lower fixed point (273K) and boiling point of water is taken as upper fixed point (373K). The interval between two points is divided into 100 equal parts. Each division is 1K. On scale 1o C = 1 K This is the natural scale of temperature also called the absolute temperature scale. The scale is based on ideal gas thermometer. Absolute Zero: Absolute zero is the temperature at which all molecular motions come to stand still i.e. net kinetic energy becomes zero. It is taken as zero kelvin (-273o C). At absolute zero temperature, the pressure (or volume) of the gas goes to zero. This may implies that if the temperature is reduced below -273.15°C, the volume becomes negative which is obviously not possible. Hence -273.15°C is the lowest temperature that can be achieved and therefore called the absolute zero of temperature. The interval on the scale is the same as on the celsius scale (1 K = 1 o C) and two scales can be related as. K = o C + 273.15 Thus on absolute scale of temperature, water freezes at 273.15K and boils at 373.15K. Triple Point of water: The triple point is that point on a pressure versus temperature graph which corresponds to the equilibrium among three phases of a substance i.e. gas, liquid and solid. Triple point of pure water is at 273.16K. It is unique and occurs at single temperature and single pressure. RELATION AMONG THE SCALES OF TEMPERATURE Temperature of a body can be converted from one scale to the other. Let, L = lower reference point (freezing point) H = upper reference point (boiling point) T = temperature read on the given scale. Figure 6.1 Temperature scales
  • 56. 44 Now L H L T   = Relative temperature w.r.t. both reference point. Let us take a body whose temperature is determined by three different thermometers giving readings in o C, o F and K respectively. Let T1 = C = Temperature in o C, L1 = 0°C H1 =100°C T2 = F = Temperature ino F, L2 = 32°F H2 = 212°F T3 = K = Temperature Kelvin, L3 =273 K H3 = 373K We can write, 3 3 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 3 3 T L T L T L H L H L H L                           0 32 273 100 0 212 32 373 273 C F K                           32 273 100 180 100 C F K     32 273 5 9 5 C F K     6.5 MODES OF TRANSFER OF HEAT When two bodies having different temperatures are brought close together, the heat flows from body at higher temperature to body at lower temperature. Heat may also flow from one portion of body to another portion because of temperature difference. The process is called transfer of heat. There are three modes by which heat is transferred from one place to another. These are named as conduction, convention and radiations. (i) Conduction: It is defined as that mode of transfer of heat in which the heat travels from particle to particle in contact, along the direction of fall of temperature without any net displacement of the particles. For example, if one end of a long metal rod (iron or brass) is heated, after some time other end of rod also become hot. This is due to the transfer of heat energy from hot atoms to the nearby atoms. When two bodies have different temperatures and are brought into contact, they exchange heat energy and tend to equalize the temperature. The bodies are said to be in thermal equilibrium. This is the mode of heat transfer in solids. Figure 6.2: Conduction
  • 57. 45 ii) Convection: The process of transmission of heat in which heat is transferred from one point to another by the physical movement of the heated particles is called convection. For example, if a liquid in a vessel is heated by placing a burner below the vessel, after some time the top surface of liquid also become warm. This is because the speed of atoms or molecules increases when liquid or gases are heated. The molecule having more kinetic energy rise upward and carry heat with them. Liquids and gases transfer heat by convection. Examples are heating of water, cooling of transformers, see breeze, heating of rooms by heater etc. (iii) Radiation: The process of heat transfer in which heat is transmitted from one place to another in the form of Infra-Red radiation, without heating the intervening medium is called radiation. Thermal radiations are the energy emitted by a body in the form of radiations on account of its temperature and travel with the velocity of light. We receive heat from sun by radiation process. All the bodies around us do emit these radiations. These radiations are the electromagnetic waves. 6.6 PROPERTIES OF HEAT RADIATIONS 1. They do not require a medium for their propagation. 2. Heat radiations travel in straight line. 3. Heat radiations do not heat the intervening medium. 4. Heat radiations are electromagnetic waves. 5. They travel with a velocity 3 × l08 m/s in vacuum. 6. They undergo reflection, refraction, interference, diffraction and polarization. 7. They obey inverse square law. * * * * * * Figure 6.3: Convection
  • 58. 46 EXERCISES Fill in the blanks and true/false i. Heat of an object is the …………………. (total/average) energy of all the molecular motions inside that object. ii. Temperature is a measure of the …………………. energy of the molecules. iii. Transfer of heat from a fluid to a solid surface or within a fluid is called ............ . iv. Matter that is at finite temperature emits energy in space in the form of electromagnetic waves. The process is known as …………….... v. Heat radiation travels at the same speed as sound. (True/ False). vi. The Kelvin scale is an absolute scale. (True/ False) vii. Heat radiations cannot travel through a vacuum. (True / False) viii. Air conditioner is an example of radiation. (True / False) Short Answer Questions 1. Define heat. Give SI unit of heat. 2. Define temperature. Give SI unit of temperature. 3. What are heat radiations? Whether these travel in straight line or not? 4. What is principle of measurement of temperature? 5. Define absolute zero temperature. 6. What is triple point? 7. Give two examples of convection. 8. Define the process of conduction in metals. 9. Give relationship between celsius and fahrenheit scales of temperature. 10. Temperature of a patient is 40o C. What will be the corresponding temperature on Fahrenheit scale? Long Answer Questions 1) Explain heat and temperature on basis of kinetic theory. 2) Describe principle of temperature measurements and name two such devices. 3) Describe with example different modes of transfer of heat. 4) Explain different scales of temperature and establish relationship between them. 5) Give any five properties of heat radiations.
  • 59. 47 Chapter 7 WAVE MOTION AND ITS APPLICATIONS Learning Objective: After going through this chapter, students will be able to; - Understand concept of waves and wave motion, define parameters representing a wave motion and their relationship, define simple harmonic motion with examples, understand vibrations and types of vibrations. - Describe concept of acoustics, associated parameters and methods to control acoustics of buildings. - Identify ultrasonic waves and enlist their engineering applications. 7.1 WAVE MOTION Motion of an object is the change in its position with time. In different types of motions, some form of energy is transported from one place to another. There are two ways of transportation of energy from its place of origin to the place where it is to be utilized. One is the actual transport of matter. For example when a bullet is fired from a gun it carries kinetic energy which can be utilized at another place. The second method by which energy can be transported is the wave process. A wave is the disturbance in which energy is transferred from one point to other due to repeated periodic motion of particles of the medium. The waves carry energy but there is no transport of matter. There are two types of waves; 1. Mechanical or Elastic waves 2. Electromagnetic waves Mechanical waves Those waves which are produced due to repeated periodic motion of medium particles are called mechanical or elastic waves. They need a material medium for their generation and propagation. For example sound waves, water waves are mechanical in nature. Electromagnetic waves The wave which travels in form of varying electric and magnetic fields mutually perpendicular to each other and also perpendicular to direction of propagation of wave. They do not need material medium for their propagation. For example, light waves, heat radiations, radio waves, X-rays are electromagnetic waves. The characteristics of wave motion are: 1. The wave travels forward but the particles vibrate only about their mean position. 2. The velocity of wave is the rate at which the disturbance travels through the medium. 3. The velocity of the wave depends on the type of wave (light, sound) and type of medium (solid, liquid or gas). 4. The velocity of waves is different from the velocity of particles. 5. There is regular phase difference between particles of wave.
  • 60. 48 Types of Wave Motion: There are two types of wave motion; a) Transverse wave motion b) Longitudinal wave motion a) Transverse wave motion When the particles of the medium vibrate perpendicular to the direction of propagation of wave the wave motion is called transverse wave motion. A transverse wave motion is shown in Fig. 7.1. A transverse wave consists of one crest and one trough that makes one cycle. The distance between two consecutive crests or two consecutive troughs is called wave length. Fig. 7.1 Examples are wave produced by a stretched string, light waves, waves produced on surface of water etc. b) Longitudinal Waves When the particles of medium vibrate parallel to the direction of propagation of wave the wave motion is called longitudinal wave motion. A longitudinal wave travels in the form of compressions and rarefactions as shown in the Fig. 7.2. The part of medium where distance between medium particles is less than their normal distance is called compression and the portion where distance is more than their normal distance is called rarefaction. One cycle consist of one complete compression and one complete rarefaction. The distance between two consecutive compressions and rarefaction is called wave length. Fig. 7.2 Most familiar example of longitudinal waves is sound waves. Sound waves can travel in different medium such as solids, liquids and gases.
  • 61. 49 The main points of difference between transverse and longitudinal waves are listed below: S. No. Transverse Waves Longitudinal Waves 1. The particles of the medium vibrate perpendicular to the direction of propagation of wave The particles of medium vibrate parallel to the direction of propagation of wave 2. The wave travels in form of crests and troughs The wave travels in form of compressions and rarefactions. 3. There is no change in density of the medium. These waves produce change in density of the medium. 4. These waves can be polarised. These waves cannot be polarised. 5. Velocity of wave decreases with density of medium Velocity of wave increases with density of medium 6. Electromagnetic waves, wave travelling on stretched string, light waves are the examples. Sound waves, pressure waves, musical waves are its examples. Terms Characterizing Wave Motion: Various parameters used to characterize a wave motion are defined below. Displacement: The distance of a particle from its mean position, at any instant is called displacement. Amplitude: It is the maximum displacement of the particle from its mean position of rest. Wavelength: It is the distance travelled by the wave in the time in which the particle of the medium completes one vibration. Or the distance between two consecutive crests or troughs is called as wavelength. It is denoted by λ and measured in metres. The distance AB or DE in figure 7.3 is equal to one wave length. Fig. 7.3 Time period: It is defined as the time taken by a wave to complete one vibration or one cycle. It is denoted by T and SI unit is second. Frequency: The number of vibrations made by a wave in one second is called frequency. It can also be written as reciprocal of time period ( = 1/T). It is represented by n or  (nu) and units are hertz (Hz), kilohertz (kHz), Megahertz (MHz) ... etc.
  • 62. 50 Wave Velocity: The distance travelled by the wave per unit time is defined as wave velocity. It is denoted as (v) and measured in m/s. Or it may be defined as the velocity by which a wave propagates is called as wave velocity. Phase: Phase of a vibrating particle tells the position of a particle at that instant. It is measured by the fraction of angle or time elapsed by wave at any instant since the particle has crossed its mean position in positive direction. It is denoted by θ and unit is radian. Phase difference: The difference in angle or time elapsed between two particles at any instant. It is calculated by the formula Phase difference (ϕ) = λ 2π × path difference Relation between Wave velocity, Wavelength and Frequency Wave velocity is the distance travelled by a wave in one time period. v distanse time T    and frequency is reciprocal of time period i.e. T 1 ν  Thus v =   The relation holds for both transverse and longitudinal waves. Numerical 1: A radio station broadcasts at a frequency of 15 MHz. The velocity of transmitted waves is 3×108 m/s. What is the wavelength of transmitted waves? Solution: Given, frequency () = 15 MHz = 15×106 Hz, Velocity of waves (v) = 3×108 m/s Using relation; v =   we get wavelength () = v  = 6 8 10 15 10 3   = 20 m Numerical 2: A tuning fork of frequency 512 Hz makes 24 vibrations in air. If velocity of sound in air is 340 m/s, how far does sound travel in air? Solution: Here, frequency () = 512 Hz and velocity = 340 m/s Using the relation v =  , we get Wavelength () =  V = 512 40 3 = 0.664 m Therefore, distance in 24 vibrations = 24 × = 24 ×0.664 m = 15.94 m
  • 63. 51 Fig. 7.4. Damped vibrations Fig. 7.5. Undamped vibrations 7.2 FREE, FORCED AND RESONANT VIBRATIONS Vibrations A motion in which the object moves to and fro about a fixed mean position is called oscillatory motion (vibration). All oscillatory motion needs to be periodic. The motion in which the object repeats its path after a fixed or regular interval of time is called periodic motion. For example, motion of hands of clock, motion of spring mass system, simple pendulum, cantilever, rim of cycle wheel etc. Types of Vibrations: There are three types of vibrations: free, forced and resonant. 1) Free Vibrations: A force can set a resting object into motion. But when the force is a short-lived or momentary, it only begins the motion. The object moves back and forth, repeating the motion over and again. When a body is set into vibrations and is allowed to vibrate freely under the influence of its own elastic forces, such vibrations are called free vibrations. The frequency of free vibration is called natural frequency. Examples are vibrations of simple pendulum, cantilever, loaded beam etc. Free vibrations can also be divided in two classes; damped and undamped vibrations. a) Damped Vibrations: In case of free vibrations, the extent of displacement from the equilibrium position reduces with time. This is because the force that started the motion is a momentary force and the vibrations ultimately cease. The object is said to experience damping. Thus when the amplitude of vibrations goes on decreasing with time and finally the vibrations stop after some time then such vibrations are called damped vibrations as shown in Fig.7.4. For example vibrations of cantilever, loaded beam, spring mass system etc. Damping is the tendency of a vibrating object to lose or to dissipate its energy over time. b) Undamped Vibrations: If the amplitude of vibrations remains constant and the vibrations continue for infinite time then such vibrations are called undamped vibrations as shown in Fig. 7.5. For example vibrations of simple pendulum in vacuum.
  • 64. 52 2) Forced Vibrations: A vibrating object naturally loses energy with time. It must continuously be put back into the vibrations through a force in order to sustain the vibration. A sustained input of energy would be required to keep the back and forth motion going. Thus when a periodic force is used to maintain the vibrations of an object then such vibrations are called forced vibrations. For example swing of a child. 3) Resonant Vibrations: It is a special type of forced vibration in which the frequency of applied force matches with natural frequency of an object. In this situation resonance occurs and the amplitude of vibrations increases largely. For example tuning of radio set, swing of a child. (a) Tuning of a radio set: There are many stations sending radio waves of various frequencies causing forced oscillations in the circuit of receiver. When the frequency of tuner equals that of waves from particular broadcasting station, the resonance takes place and hence we can hear only that station, whose amplitude is increased. (b) During earthquake certain building whose natural frequency are same as the frequency of earthquake collapse due to resonant vibration. Resonance occurs widely in nature. Some sounds we hear, like when hard objects of metal, glass, or wood are struck, are caused by brief resonant vibrations in the object. Electromagnetic waves are produced by resonance on an atomic scale. Other examples are the balance wheel in a mechanical watch, tidal resonance, acoustic resonances of musical instruments, production of coherent light by optical resonance in a laser etc. 7.3 SIMPLE HARMONIC MOTION (SHM) It is a special type of motion in which the restoring force is directly proportional to displacement from the mean position and opposes its increase. Applying Newton‟s second law of motion (force = mass × acceleration), it can be stated as a periodic motion in which the acceleration is directly proportional to displacement and is always directed towards mean position. In other words, if F is the restoring force and „y‟ is the displacement from the mean position, then F = - K y or a = - m K y The negative sign indicates that F opposes increase in y and K is constant of proportionality, called force constant. In such motion displacement varies harmonically with time and can be represented in terms of harmonic functions i.e. sinθ, cosθ such as y(t) = A sin t or A cos t (  = t) Here A is the amplitude of SHM and  is angular frequency. Examples of SHM are; motion of simple pendulum, cantilever, mass-spring system, swing etc.
  • 65. 53 Fig. 7.6 Cantilever Characteristics of SHM: • The motion should be periodic. • Force causing the motion is directed toward the equilibrium point (minus sign). • Acceleration produced is directly proportional to the displacement from equilibrium. 7.4 CANTILEVER A metallic beam fixed at one end and free to vibrate at other end is called cantilever. The normal configuration of a cantilever is shown in Fig. 7.6. When it is loaded at free end it vibrates and its edge performs simple harmonic motion. The time taken to complete one vibration is called time period. The time period is given by 2 p T g   Where p is the depression of beam (displacement of beam from its unloaded position) and g is acceleration due to gravity. 7.5 SOUND WAVES These are mechanical waves and need medium for their propagation. Sound waves also called pressure waves can be transmitted through solid, liquid or gas. There are three frequency ranges in which sound is categorised: a) Audible: The sound waves between frequencies 20 Hz to 20 kHz is called audible range and audible to human. It is also called sonic sound. b) Infrasonic: Sound waves below frequency 20Hz are called infrasonic and are inaudible to human ears. A number of animals produce and use sounds in the infrasonic range. For example elephant, whales, rhinos etc. c) Ultrasonic: The sound waves with frequency above 20 kHz are called ultrasonic. Bats communicate through ultrasonic waves. These waves also inaudible to human ears. Properties of sound waves are:- 1. Sound waves are longitudinal mechanical waves. 2. They need material medium for their generation and propagation. 3. They cannot traverse through vacuum so their velocity in vacuum is zero. 4. Their velocity in air at NTP is 332 m/s and it increases with rise in temperature. 5. Sound waves travel faster in solids than in liquids than in gasses. 6. They show the phenomena of reflection, transmission, diffraction etc.
  • 66. 54 7.6 ACOUSTICS OF BUILDINGS The branch of physics that deals with study of audible sound including their generation, propagation and properties is called acoustics. Acoustics of buildings: It deals with construction of public halls, auditoriums, cinema halls etc. for best sound effects. Generation of Audible Sound: Any object that can produce longitudinal mechanical waves of frequency between 20 Hz to 20 kHz generates audible sound. For example, musical instruments, vibrating fork, human throat (vocal chord) etc. Propagation of Audible Sound: Audible sound propagates in material medium only. Its velocity is lowest in air and increases with increase in density of the medium. It travels fastest in metals. While travelling in one medium if it meets another medium it gets divided into three parts; reflected part, absorbed part and transmitted part. Coefficient of Absorption of Sound: The ratio of sound energy absorbed by a surface to the total sound incident on a surface is called coefficient of absorption or simply absorption coefficient of sound. It is denoted by „a‟ and its SI unit is OWU (open window unit). Its value is maximum (=1) for an open window. a = surface on the incident energy sound Total surface a by energy sound absorbed Types of Audible Sound: Two types of audible sound are musical sound and noise. Musical Sound: The sound that produces pleasant effect on our ears is called musical sound. It is a single sound or multiple sounds having same frequency, wavelength and meeting in same phase. e.g. Sound of music, crisping of birds etc. Noise: The sounds that produce unpleasant effect on our ears are called noise. It has irregular amplitude with time. It is generally a combination of multiple sounds of different frequency, wavelength and meeting in different phases. e.g. sound of horn, thunder etc. Reverberation: It is the persistence of sound after the source has stopped emitting sound due to reflection from multiple surfaces. Reverberation Time: The time up to which a sound persists in a hall or room after the source has stopped emitting it is called reverberation time.
  • 67. 55 Standard reverberation time (Sabine’s formula): Reverberation time is the time taken by the sound intensity to drop by 60 dB or reduce to its one millionth parts. An American scientist W. C. Sabine developed an equation for calculating the reverberation time as: T = 0.16V aS  where V is the volume of the hall in m3 , a is the average absorption coefficient of room surfaces and S is total surface area of room in m2 . Here ..... s a s a s a S a 3 2 2 2 1 1      where a1, a2, a3etc. are absorption coefficients of different objects in hall and s1, s2, s3etc. are their surface areas. Echo: The repetition of original sound by reflection from a surface is called echo. The echo is produced if the reflected sound reaches our ears after 1/10 of a second. It is different from reverberation as echo is identified as repeated sound due to a time gap of at least 1/10 of a second. The distance „d‟ of reflector/obstacle causing echo is given by d = v. 2 t where „v‟ is velocity of sound and „t‟ is time taken by reflected sound to reach our ears. The minimum distance of obstacle to produce echo thus is given as s = {332× (1/10)}/2 = 16.6 m/s Thus, the obstacle must be placed at a minimum distance of 16.6 m from the source to produce echo. Methods to Control Reverberation time: To control reverberation time the simplest way is to increase absorption in the hall. The methods to control reverberation are: 1. Provide few open windows in hall- Open windows are good absorbers of sound and the reverberation time can be controlled by adjusting the number of open windows in the hall. 2. Cover the floor with carpets- The carpets are also good absorbers of sound which help in reducing the reverberation time in the hall. 3. Curtains- The use of heavy folded curtains on doors and windows allows to control the reverberation time. 4. Cover the walls-Covering the walls with absorbing materials like fibre or asbestos sheets etc help in reducing reverberation time. 5. Using false ceiling- False ceiling is made of sound absorbing materials which reduces the reverberation in a hall. 6. Using upholstered cushioned seats in hall- the seats in the empty hall would also absorb the sound if they are made of good absorbing cushioned material and turn up when no one is sitting on them. 7. A good number of audience increases the absorption of hall.
  • 68. 56 7.7 ULTRASONICS The sound waves having frequency more than 20 kHz are called ultrasonics. Their characteristics are: i. They are high frequency and high energy waves. ii. If they are passed through a liquid it is shaken violently. iii. They work as catalyst for chemical reactions. iv. They can be sent in the form of narrow beam to long distances without loss of energy. v. Travelling in one medium if they meet another, they return back in same medium at 180 degree. vi. Just like ordinary sound waves, ultrasonic waves get reflected, refracted and absorbed. vii. They produce intense heating effect when passed through a substance. Production of Ultrasonic: The natural producer of ultrasonics is „Bat‟. Another simple method to produce low frequency ultrasonics is „Galton‟s whistle‟. Two types of oscillators are used to produce ultrasonic sounds: Magnetostriction oscillator, Piezoelectric oscillator. Applications of Ultrasonic: Ultrasonic waves are used in various fields like; medical for ultrasound, navigation for various purposes, engineering for drilling, cleaning, flaw detection etc. Some important applications of ultrasonic are described below: 1) Drilling: Ultrasonic is high frequency and high energy wave, so they can be used in applications involving high amount of energy. They can be used to make a drill even in hardest material of world i.e. Diamond. For this a tool bit is attached at lower end of magnetostriction oscillator. The sheet to be drilled is kept below the tool bit. It is driven by a magneto-striction oscillator that creates the vibrations. When oscillator is switched on the tool bit moves up and down that produces enough strain to make a drill in the sheet. The setup of drilling is shown in figure 7.7. 2) Ultrasonic welding (cold welding): The setup is shown in figure 7.8. Cold welding means welding without involvement of heat which is possible only with ultrasonics. A hammer is attached at lower end of magnetostriction oscillator. The sheets to be welded are kept below hammer. When oscillator is switched on hammer strikes the sheets frequently. In case of resonance the molecules of both sheets enter in each other due to high amplitude and welding is performed without involvement of heat. The interface of the two parts is specially designed to concentrate the energy for maximum weld strength. Fig. 7.7 Ultrasonic drilling Fig. 7.8 Cold welding
  • 69. 57 Fig. 7.9 Sound navigation and ranging 3) SONAR: is a technique which stands for SOund Navigation and Ranging. It uses ultrasonic for the detection and identification of underwater objects. A powerful beam of ultrasonic is sent in the suspected direction in water. By noting the time interval between the emission and receipt of beam after reflection, the distance of the object can be easily calculated. Measuring the time interval (t) between the transmitted pulses and the received pulse, the distance (d) between the transmitter and the remote object is determined using the formula d = v × 2 t where v is the velocity of sound in sea water. The same principle is used to find the depth of the sea as shown in figure 7.9. Numerical 3. An ultrasonic scanner travelling with a speed of 1.5 km/s in a tissue operating under a frequency of 4.1 MHz. What is the wavelength of sound in the tissue? Solution: Given, Velocity (v) = 1.5 km/s = 1.5×1000 = 1500 m/s Frequency () = 4.1 MHz = 4.1×106 Hz Using the relation; v =  we can get Wavelength,  = v  = 6 10 1 . 4 1500  = 3.65×10-4 m = 36.5 mm Numerical 4. A man hears his sound again after reflection from a cliff after 1 second. If the velocity of sound is 330 m/s, find the distance of cliff from the man. Solution: Given Velocity of sound, v = 330 m/s Time after which sound is heard, t = 1.0 s Let d be the distance of cliff from man. Total distance travelled by sound in going and coming back from cliff = 2 d Thus, 2 d = v × t = 330 ×1 = 330 m d = 330 2 = 165 m * * * * * *
  • 70. 58 EXERCISES Fill in the blanks or true/false 1. In __________ waves, matter in the medium moves forward and backward in the same direction in which the wave travels. 2. When the vibrations of a body are maintained by its own elastic forces then such vibrations are called ________. 3. Sound wave cannot get ________ (Reflected /Polarized) 4. Echo is caused due to _________ of sound. 5. Perfect absorber has absorption coefficient of _________(0 / 1/ infinity). 6. Standard reverberation time is given by _________ formula. 7. ______________ waves does not require medium to travel 8. In __________ waves, matter in the medium moves back and forth at right angles to the direction the wave travels. 9. The velocity of sound waves in vacuum is ______. 10. Wave is a form of disturbance. (True / False) 11. In SHM, acceleration is directly proportional to displacement. (True / False) 12. The vibrations in which amplitude of vibrations remains constant are called damped vibration. (True / False) 13. The minimum distance of an obstacle for echo to be heard is 16.6 m. (True / False). 14. Sound waves cannot travel in outer space because these are mechanical waves. (True / False). Short answer type questions: 1. Define wave motion. 2. Explain types of wave motion? 3. Differentiate between transverse and longitudinal waves. 4. Define amplitude and wavelength of a wave. 5. Give relation between time period and frequency of a wave. 6. Define Simple Harmonic Motion. 7. What is a cantilever? 8. Define acoustics of buildings. 9. What is Sabine‟s formula? 10. Define ultrasonic waves. 11. Establish the relation between velocity, frequency and wavelength? 12. Give full form of SONAR. 13. Name different types of vibrations. 14. What are resonant vibrations? 15. Explain damped and undamped vibrations? Long answer questions: 1) Define wave motion? Explain transverse and longitudinal wave motion with examples. 2) Define the terms; wave velocity, frequency and wave length. Drive the relationship between them. 3) Describe simple harmonic motion. Give its characteristics.
  • 71. 59 4) What is a cantilever? Write the formula for its time period. 5) What are acoustics and acoustics of buildings? 6) Explain the terms: reverberation, reverberation time and echo. 7) Define coefficient of absorption of sound? Give its units. 8) List various methods to control reverberation time. 9) Explain free, forced and resonant vibrations with examples. 10) What is ultrasonic wave? Explain their two engineering applications.
  • 72. 60 Fig. 8.1 Reflection of light Chapter8 OPTICS Learning Objectives: After studying this chapter the student should be able to; - Understand light properties, reflection and refraction of light, lens parameters, lens formula and power of a lens. - Explain total internal reflection, conditions for TIR and its applications. - Describe microscope, telescope and their uses. Introduction Optics is the branch of physics which deals with the study of behavior and properties of light. Light is an electromagnetic wave having transverse nature. Although light has dual nature; particle as well as wave, classical approach considers only wave nature. The wave nature is further simplified in geometric optics, where light is treated as a ray which travels in straight line. Ray optics model includes wave effects like diffraction, interference etc. Quantum optics deals with application of light considered as particles (called photons) to the optical systems. The phenomena of photoelectric effect, X-rays and lasers are explained in the quantum optics (particle nature of light). Ray Optics (Geometric optics) Geometrical optics describes the propagation of light in terms of rays. The assumptions of geometrical optics are:  Light travels in straight-line paths.  It bends, or split into part, at the interface between two different media.  It follows curved paths in a medium where refractive index changes.  It may be reflected, absorbed or transmitted. 8.1 REFLECTIONAND REFRACTION OF LIGHT Reflection of Light The phenomena of bouncing back of light after striking at a polished surface is called as reflection Glassy surfaces such as mirrors exhibit reflection. This allows for production of reflected images that can be associated with real or virtual location in space. Figure 8.1 depicts the phenomenon of reflection from a glass-air interface. The light ray incident on a glass mirror at an angle i (angle of incident) and the light ray reflected from the surface at an angle r (angle of reflection).
  • 73. 61 Fig. 8.2 Refraction of light Laws of reflection: 1) The incident ray, reflected ray and the normal, all lie in same plane, and 2) The angle of incidence is always equal to angle of refraction i.e. i =r Refraction of light When a light ray passes from one transparent medium to another, it gets deviated from its original path while crossing the interface of two media. The phenomena of bending of light rays from their original path while passing from one medium to another is called refraction.  When light travels from a rarer medium to denser medium, it bends towards the normal.  When light travels from a denser medium to rarer medium, it bends away from the normal. It happens when light travels through medium that has a changing index of refraction. Refraction occurs due to change in speed of light as it enters a different media. Figure 8.2 describe the occurrence of refraction at an interface. Laws of refraction: 1) The incident ray, the refracted ray and the normal all lie in the same plane. 2) The ratio of sine of incidence angle (θ1) to the sine of refracted angle (θ2) is a constant for that pair of media and is equal to the refractive index of that media. This is also known as Snell’s law 1 1 2 2 sin sin sin sin i r      Where „i‟ is the angle of incidence and „r' is the angle of refraction and1 2  is the refractive index of medium 2 w.r.t. medium 1.If medium 1 is vacuum then, 1 2 sin sin     When light travels from air (vacuum) to a medium then refractive index of the medium can be written as v c   where c is the velocity of light in air (vacuum) and v is the velocity of light in the medium. For example, the refractive index of water is 1.333, meaning that light travels 1.333 times slower in the water than in vacuum. Thus, the refractive index of a material is a dimensionless number that describes how light propagates through that medium.
  • 74. 62 The Snell‟s law is used to find the deflection of light rays when they pass through different media. It is used to produce dispersion spectra through a prism since light ray having different frequencies have slightly different refractive index in most materials. Lens and lens formula Lens is an optical device based on phenomenon of refraction. A lens is a transparent medium bounded by two refracting surfaces. It can produce two types of rays- converging and diverging rays. Convex lens is converging while concave lens is diverging. Terms related in study of lenses: 1. Centre of curvature: The center of curvature of a lens is the centre of sphere which forms a part of the spherical surface of the lens. 2. Radius of curvature: The radius of the sphere of the spherical surface of lens is called radius of curvature. It is the distance of the vertex of the lens from the center of curvature. 3. Principal axis: The principal axis of a lens is an imaginary line that is perpendicular to the vertical axis of the lens. Principal focus of the lens lies on this axis. All rays parallel to the principal axis that are incident on the lens, would either converge (if lens is converging) to, or diverge (if the lens is diverging) from, the principal focus. 4. Optical centre: Optical centre is the centre of the lens lying on the principal axis. If a light ray passes through optical centre, it goes undeviated. 5. Principal focus: When the parallel rays are incident on a lens, they either meet or appear to meet at a point on the principal axis, that point is called principal focus. 6. Focal length (f): The distance of principal focus from the optical centre is called focal length. In other words, focal length is equal to the image distance when the object is at infinity. 7. Image: If two or more rays passing from a point gets refracted through a lens and converges or appears to diverge to a point then that point is called the image of first point. The image can be real or virtual. In real image, rays actually meet at the second point, while in virtual image; the rays appear to diverge from the second point. Lens formula The formula which gives relation between focal length (f), object distance (u) and image distance (v) as 1 1 1 f v u   This is called lens formula. Linear magnification: the ratio of size of image to the size of object is called as linear magnification of a lens. It is given by; m = I O or u v and holds for both convex and concave lenses and for real as well as virtual images.
  • 75. 63 Fig. 8.3 Total internal reflection Power of lens The ability of a lens to converge or diverge the light rays is called as power of lens. Mathematically, power of a lens is defined as the reciprocal of the focal length. P = f 1 (f is taken in metre) The unit of power of lens is m-1 which is called dioptre and indicated by symbol „D‟. In other words, one dioptre is the power of a lens of one metre focal length. The power of a convex lens is positive and that of concave lens is negative. If two lenses are combined (placed in contact), the focal length of the combination is given by 1 2 1 1 1 F f f   Thus the power of combination becomes sum of power of individual lenses. i.e. P = P1 + P2 In general, P= P1 + P2+ P3 + ………. 8.2 TOTAL INTERNAL REFLECTION (TIR) When light is goes from denser medium to rare medium and the angle of incidence is greater than critical angle, the light get completely reflection in the same medium. This phenomenon is known as total internal reflection. There are two essential conditions for TIR: 1. The light should travel from a denser medium to a rarer medium. 2. The angle of incidence in the denser medium should be greater than the critical angle. The angle of incidence for which the angle of refraction becomes 90o is called as critical angle (θc). At the critical angle of incidence, the refracted ray travels along the boundary between the two media i.e. the angle of refraction becomes 900 . For angle of incidence greater than critical angle light is totally reflected as shown in Fig. 8.3. The critical angle for a material depends upon the refractive index. Higher the refractive index, the lower the critical angle. It can be calculated using the following formula: Sin c =  1 Where c is the critical angle and µ is the refractive index.
  • 76. 64 Fig. 8.4 A microscope Fig. 8.5 A Telescope Applications of TIR 1. TIR is the basic principle of optical fibers which are used as transmission media in sending telecommunication signals and images in endoscopes. 2. Automotive rain sensors work on the principle of TIR, which control automatic windscreen wipers. 3. Prisms in binoculars also form erect images based on total internal reflection. 4. Some multi-touch screens also use TIR to pick up multiple targets. 5. Optical fingerprinting devices used to record fingerprints without the use of ink are also based on TIR. 6. The bright shining of diamonds is also a result of total internal reflection. 7. Formation of mirage. 8.3 OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS An optical instrument is a device which is used to view the objects. The eye is natural optical system. In addition to it, other instruments are devised to increase the range a human‟s viewing ability. The optical instruments are an aid to the eye. They consist of an arrangement of lenses, prisms or mirrors which enables to see better than what we can see with the naked eye. These can be of two types: 1. When the real image is formed on screen as in case of photographic camera, overhead projector etc. 2. When a virtual image is formed and can be seen directly with eye as in telescopes, microscopes, binoculars etc. a) Microscope: A microscope is an optical instrument which enables us to see magnified image of very small objects. A microscopic object is invisible to the eye unless aided by a microscope. Fig.8.4 shows the view of a microscope. There are two types of microscope: 1. Simple microscope. It is also known as magnifying glass. It is made of only one convex lens and the object is so adjusted before the focal point that the image is formed at least distance of distinct vision. 2. Compound microscope. The magnification produced by a simple microscope is small and is only governed by the focal length of lens. To produce large magnification, a compound microscope is used in which magnification is obtained in two stages by the use of two convex lenses.
  • 77. 65 Telescope: A telescope is an optical instrument which is used to see distant objects clearly. There are three types of telescopes: 1. Astronomical: It is used to see astronomical heavenly objects like stars and planets. The image formed in an astronomical telescope is inverted. 2. Terrestrial: Astronomical telescope forms an inverted image which is not suitable to see the terrestrial objects like buildings, trees etc. For seeing the distant objects lying on earth, the final image should be erect. A terrestrial telescope (Fig. 8.5) forms an erect image and makes use of three convex lenses. 3. Galilean (modification of terrestrial telescope): It is a modified version of terrestrial telescope which also forms erect image but with the use of only two lenses. 8.4 USES OF MICROSCOPE AND TELESCOPE a) Uses of Microscope 1. Biological scientists use microscope to see microorganisms and their behavior. 2. Doctors use microscope to see and examine blood cells and bacteria. 3. Forensic science experts use microscope to analyze the evidences of crimes. 4. Jewelers and watch makers use it to see the details of parts they are working with. 5. Environmentalist uses it to test the soil and water samples for presence of pollutants. 6. Geologist uses it to test the composition of different types of rocks. 7. These are used in various laboratories. b) Uses of Telescope 1. Astronomical objects are seen by using telescope by astronomers. 2. They found use in terrestrial applications also. They are used in laboratories to perform different experiments and finding values of different quantities. 3. Spectrometry uses telescopes to find wavelength of light and spectral lines etc. 4. It is used in spy glasses and long focus camera lenses. Solved Numericals Numerical 1. A lens is having power of +4 D. What is its focal length? Solution: Given, Power (P) = +4 D We know that P = f 1 Therefore, 4 = f 1 or f = m 4 1 = 0.25 m = 25 cm Thus, focal length of lens is 25 cm.
  • 78. 66 Numerical 2. An object is kept at distance of 30 cm from a convex lens of focal length 0.2 m. Find the position of the image formed. Solution: Given, distance of object, u = - 30 cm = - 0.3 m, and f = 0.2 m The lens formula is u 1 v 1 f 1   or u 1 f 1 v 1   = ) 3 . 0 ( 1 2 . 0 1   = 5-3.33 = 1.67 v = 67 . 1 1 = 0.598 = 0.6 m = 60 cm Numerical 3. A light wave has wavelength of 600 nm in vacuum. What is the wavelength of the light as it travels through water (index of refraction = 1.33)? Solution: Given, wavelength () = 600 nm = 600 ×10-9 m ( 1 nm = 10-9 m). The wavelength of light that travels through a medium of refractive index n changes by expression n = 33 . 1 10 600 9    n  = 451× 10-9 m = 451 nm * * * * * *
  • 79. 67 EXERCISES Fill in the blanks and true/false 1. The speed of light in vacuum is _________. 2. Spectrum is formed due to _________of light. 3. A ________ lens is thick at centre and thin at ends. 4. A transparent medium bound by two curved surfaces is called ________ (lens/mirror). 5. A lens is an optical device based on ________ (reflection/ refraction). 6. Changing path of light while entering second medium is called ________. 7. Power of a lens is measured in __________ . 8. Power of a lens is inverse of __________ . 9. Simple microscope uses __________ (one/two) number of lens. 10. Simple microscope is also known as magnifying glass (True/ False). 11. Telescope that uses three lenses is called terrestrial telescope. (True / False) 12. An instrument that forms image on screen is called camera. (True / False) 13. Refractive index of a medium is constant. (True / False) 14. Two lenses are used in a simple microscope. (True / False) Short answer questions: 1. Define reflection and state laws of reflection. 2. Define refraction and state laws of refraction. 3. Explain total internal reflection (TIR). 4. What is critical angle? 5. Define principal focus of a lens. 6. Write is lens formula. 7. Define power of a lens. 8. Give the relation between focal length and power of a lens. Long answer questions: 1. Define refractive index? How it is related to Snell‟s law. 2. Describe total internal reflection. Give two applications of TIR. 3. What is critical angle? Explain conditions necessary for TIR. 4. What is a microscope? Give its types and uses. 5. What is a telescope? Give various uses of telescope.
  • 80. 68 Chapter 9 ELECTROSTATICS Learning Objectives: After studying this chapter, the student should be able to; - Understand fundamental of charges at rest, properties of point charges; - Explain conservation and quantization of charges; - Relate the properties leading charge storage capacity of the electronic devices using static charges. Electrostatics is the branch of physics which deals with the study of charges at rest. 9.1. ELECTRIC CHARGE Electric Charge: it is the physical property of matter that causes it to experience force when placed in an electromagnetic field. There are two types of charges. (1) Positive charge: e.g. proton, alpha particle (2) Negative charge: e.g. electron, etc. Charge on electron is smallest unit of charge. SI unit of charge is coulomb (C). Like charges repel each other and unlike charges attract each other. i.e. + ve +ve Repel -ve -ve Repel +ve -ve Attract -ve +ve Attract Conservation of Charge Charge conservation is the principle that total electric charge in an isolated system always remains constant. This also means that no net charge can be created or destroyed. When an atom is ionized, equal amounts of positive and negative charges are produced. Hence the algebraic sum of charges before and after remains the same. Quantization of Charges Charge quantization is the principle that the total charge on any object is an integral multiple of the elementary charge (e). Thus, an object's charge can be exactly ne  (i.e. 1 e, −1 e, 2 e, etc.). Or Q = ne  9.2. COULOMB LAW OF ELECTROSTATICS It states that force of interaction between two point charges is (i) Directly proportional to magnitude of charges and (ii) Inversely proportional to the square of the distance between them. Charge on electron (e) = - 1.6 × 10-19 C Charge on proton (P) = + 1.6 × 10-19 C
  • 81. 69 Let F is force between two charges q1 and q2. Then 1 2 F q q  2 1 F r  1 2 2 q q F r   ………(1) 1 2 2 q q F K r  ………(2) where K is constant of proportionality and its value is given as 0 1 4 K    = 9 × 109 Nm2 /C2 (in SI units system) Now from equation (2) 1 2 2 0 4 q q F r    ………..(3) Here 0  is electrical permittivity of vacuum. Its value is 8.854 × 10-12 N-1 m-2 C2 . Let 1 2 = = q q q (say) and r = 1 m then from equation (3), F = 9 × 109 N Thus one coulomb is that much charge which produces a force of 9 × 109 N at a unit charge placed at a distance of 1 m. Smaller units of charge; milli coulomb (mC) = 10-3 C. micro coulomb (μC) = 10-6 C. 9.3. ELECTRIC FIELD It is the space around the charge in which force of attraction or repulsion can be experienced by another charge. Electric field intensity At point is defined as the force acting on a unit positive charge at that point. 0 F E q     The value of 0 q should be very small. Its SI unit is N /C (newton per coulomb) Electric Lines of Force: It is the path along which the isolated charge moves in electric field if it is free to do so. These are imaginary continuous line in an electric field such that tangent to it at any point gives the direction of electric force at that point (Fig. 9.2).  A unit positive charge is also called as test charge q2 q1 r Figure 9.1
  • 82. 70 Properties of electric lines of force  Electric lines of force originate from a +ve charge and terminate to a -ve charge.  The tangent to the line of force indicates the direction of the electric field and electric force.  Electric lines of force are always normal to the surface of charged body.  Electric lines of force contract longitudinally and expand laterally.  Two electric lines of force cannot intersect each other.  Two electric lines of force proceeding in the same direction repel each other.  Two electric lines of force proceeding in the opposite direction attract each other.  There are no lines of force inside the conductor, so electric field inside conductor is zero. 9.4. ELECTRIC FLUX It is the measure of distribution of electric field through a given surface. Electric flux is defined as total number of electric lines of force passing per unit area normal to the surface. It is denoted by ϕ (phi). Consider small elementary area ds   on a closed surface S. Electric field E  exit in the space. If θ is the angle between E  and area vector ds   as then EdS       is called electric flux. GAUSS’S LAW It states that net electric flux of an electric field over a closed surface is equal to the net charge enclosed by the surface divided by 0  i.e. + - Proof: Consider a closed surface S having a charge q placed at a point O inside a closed surface as shown in Fig. 9.3. Take a point P on the surface and consider a small area ds around P . Let OP r  P ds   dω r θ E  ds O 0 cos S q Eds        . E ds        Figure 9.3 Figure 9.2
  • 83. 71 Then Electric field at P is 2 0 4 q E r    …………(1) Now electric flux cos S Eds      Putting value of E we get 2 0 cos 4 S q ds r       2 0 cos 4 S q ds r       0 4 S q d       0 .4 4 q     4 Total Solid angle    0 q    Hence, 0 cos S q Eds        Applications of Gauss’s Law: Electric field due to a point charge: Now flux 0 cos S q Eds        0 S q E ds     2 0 .4 q E r     ( Area of Sphere = 2 4 r  ) 2 0 4 q E r     Thus the electric intensity decreases with increase in distance. 2 cos ds d r     is Small Solid Angle ds E  r Consider a point charge q . We want to find electric field at point P at a distance of r from it. Construct a spherical surface of radius r . This is called as Gaussian surface. Consider small area dS on the surface. Let θ is angle between E  and Area vector as shown in Fig. 9.4. . ( θ = 0) Figure 9.4
  • 84. 72 9.5. CAPACITOR Capacitor is an electronic component that stores electric charge. Capacitance Of a capacitor is defined as the ability of a capacitor to store the electric charge. As potential is proportional to charge V q  or q V  q CV q C V   Unit of capacitance: farad (F), microfarad Grouping of Capacitors Series Grouping: A number of capacitors are said be connected in series if -ve plate of one capacitor is connected to the +ve plate of other capacitor and so on. In this grouping, current is same on each capacitor. Consider three capacitors of capacitances C1, C2, C3 in series. Let V is total applied voltage. If V1, V2, V3 → voltage drops across C1, C2, C3 as shown in fig. 9.5. Figure 9.5 Then V = V1+V2+V3 ----------------- (1) Now V q C   C q V  So, 1 1 C q V  , 2 2 C q V  , 3 3 C q V  Putting in Equation (1) 3 2 1 C q C q C q C q               3 2 1 C 1 C 1 C 1 C q q 3 2 1 C 1 C 1 C 1 C 1    So the total capacitance decreases in series grouping.
  • 85. 73 The reciprocal of the equivalent capacitance of two capacitors connected in series is the sum of the reciprocals of the individual capacitances. Parallel Grouping: A number of capacitors are said to be connected in parallel if +ve plate of each capacitor is connected to the +ve terminal of battery and –ve plate of each capacitor is connected to the –ve terminal of battery. In this grouping voltage across each capacitor in same. Consider three capacitors of capacitances C1, C2, C3 connected in parallel and V is applied voltage. q1, q2, q3 charges on capacitors C1, C2, C3 as shown in fig. 9.6 Figure 9.6 So q = q1 + q2 +q3 ------------------ (1) Now V q C  or q = CV  q1 = C1 V, q2 = C2V, q3 = C3V Put in equation (1) CV = C1V + C2V + C3V CV = (C1 + C2 + C3) V C = C1 + C2 + C3 So the total capacitance increases in parallel grouping. The equivalent capacitance of capacitors connected in parallel is sum of the individual capacitance.
  • 86. 74 Solved Numerical Example 1. Calculate the Coulomb force between two protons separated by a distance of 1.6× 10–15 m. Solution: Given, 2 protons; Charge on Proton = 1.6 × 10–19 C Thus, q1 = q2 = 1.6 × 10–19 C Distance, r = 1.6 × 10–15 m Also 2 2 9 0 /C Nm 10 × 9 4 1   Now 2 2 1 0 r q q 4 1 F     10 6 . 1 10 6 . 1 10 6 . 1 10 9 2 15 19 19 9           F F = 90 N Example 2. Calculate the force between an alpha particle and a proton separated by distance of 5.12×10–15 m. Solution: Given, q1 = Charge on alpha particle = 2 × 1.6 × 10–19 C q2 = Charge on proton = 1.6 × 10–19 C distance, r = 5.12 × 10-15 m 2 2 9 /C Nm 10 9 4 1   o  Now 2 2 1 0 r q q 4 1   F   9 19 19 2 15 9 10 3.2 10 1.6 10 5.12 10 F           F = 17.58 N Example 3. Three capacitors of capacitances 3 F, 2 F and 4 F are connected with each other. Calculate total capacitance (a) in Series grouping (b) in Parallel grouping. Solution: Given, C1 = 3 F, C2 = 2 F and C3 = 9 F In Series grouping C 1 C 1 C 1 C 1 3 2 1 tot   
  • 87. 75 9 1 2 1 3 1 C 1 tot    = F  18 17  Ctot = 18 1.06 F 17   In Parallel grouping Ctot = C1 + C2 + C3 Ctot = 3 + 2 + 9 Ctot = 14 F Example 4.Three capacitors 1 F, 2 F, and 3 F are joined in series first and then in parallel. Calculate the ratio of equivalent capacitance in two cases. Solution: Given, C1 = 1 F, C2 = 2 F, C3 = 3 F In series grouping 3 2 1 C 1 C 1 C 1 1    S C 3 1 2 1 1 1 1    S C 6 11 1  S C  F 11 6 C  In Parallel grouping Cp = C1 + C2 + C3 Cp = 1 + 2 + 3 Cp = 6F  Ratio 11 6 6  S C Cp or 11  S C Cp
  • 88. 76 EXERCISES Fill in the blanks 1) As per Coulomb's law, force of attraction or repulsion between two point charges is ……………… proportional to product of the magnitude of charges. 2) A device which stores charge is called ……………….. 3) 1 micro farad (1 µF) is equal to …………… farad. 4) SI unit of charge is …………………… 5) The unit of capacitance is ...................... 6) Unit of electric field intensity is ................... Short Answer Questions 1. Define electric field. 2. What are electric lines of force? 3. Define the term capacitance. 4. What is electric flux? 5. Define capacitor. 6. What do you mean by electric potential? 7. Define electric intensity. 8. Explain properties of electric lines of force. 9. Explain Gauss's law. 10. Define electric charge and its types. 11. Find the total capacitance when three capacitors each of 2 F are joined in (i) series, (ii) parallel? 12. What will be Coulomb's force between 2 point charges 10 µC and 5 µC placed at a distance of 150 cm? Long Answer Type Question 1. Calculate total capacitance when capacitors are connected in series and parallel grouping. 2. State and prove Gauss law. 3. Using Gauss theorem find electric field intensity due to a point charge. 4. State Coulomb‟s law of electrostatics. 5. The force between two charges is 120 N. What will be the force, if the distance between the charges is doubled?
  • 89. 77 Chapter 10 CURRENT AND ELECTRICITY Learning Objectives: After studying this chapter, the learner should be able to; - Describe electric current and types of current; AC and DC. - Define resistance, combination of resistances; series and parallel. - State Ohm’s law, Kirchhoff’s law and their applications 10.1 ELECTRIC CURRENT AND ITS UNITS In a conductor, there are many free electrons. These electrons are in random motion but there is no net motion along the conductor. But if the two ends of a conductor are at different potentials, the charge will start flowing from one end of conductor to the other end. Therefore, the free electrons (charge) which were moving randomly will now move towards positive terminal of the battery and constitute a current. Hence a potential difference is always needed to make charge move from one end of the conductor to the other end of the conductor. In a conductor the motion of the free electrons give rise to the electric current as shown in Fig. 10.1. + - Figure 10.1 Electric current passing through a conductor is the rate of flow of charge passing through it. If a charge of q units passes through any cross section of the conductor in t seconds. The current (I) flowing through the wire is given by the formula arg Ch e q I time t   The direction of current is the direction of flow of positive charge i.e. opposite to the direction of flow of electron. Unit: ampere (A) In the relation q I t  If the charge is measured in coulombs and time is measured in seconds then the unit of current will be ampere. Where 1 ampere (A) = 1 c 1 sec oulomb One Ampere: The current flowing through the conductor is said to be of one ampere if one coulomb of charge flows through the conductor in one second. Conductor
  • 90. 78 Electric Potential difference (V) Electric potential between two points is defined as the work done in moving a unit positive charge from one point to other against the electric field. SI unit: volt (V) One Volt: 1 j 1 1 c oule V oulomb  So, electric potential difference is said to be 1 V, if 1 J work is done in moving 1 C charge from one point to another point. It is defined as energy consumption of one joule per electric charge of one coulomb. Direct Current (DC) Direct current in an electric wire is that which flow in only one direction. It is the unidirectional flow of current. The electric current flowing through a semi-conductor diode is an example of direct current. Direct current (DC) is produced by sources such as batteries, fuel cells and solar cells and cannot travel over long distances since it has more loss of energy. The frequency of DC is zero and it has a single polarity. In direct current the electron flows from negative end of the battery to the positive end of the battery. Symbol of DC voltage source It can be shown as Fig. 10.2. DC form is used in low voltage apparatus like charging batteries, cell phones, automotive apparatus, aircraft apparatus and other low voltage low current apparatus. Alternating current (AC) AC is current that reverses the direction periodically and also has a magnitude that varies continuously with time. AC is used in our homes. Power stations generate AC because it is easy to low and raise the voltage with the help of transformers. In North America the frequency of AC is 60 Hz and in India it is 50 Hz. The AC in our home is sinusoidal in nature. The radio frequency current in antennas and transmission lines are the examples of AC. Figure 10.2 Figure 10.3
  • 91. 79 Symbol of AC It is produced by an alternator and has more power and can be easily transferred from one place to another. 10.2 OHM’S LAW According to Ohm‟s law “The current flowing through a conductor is always directly proportional to the potential difference between the two ends if the physical condition (temperature, pressure etc.) of the conductor remains the same”. If I is the current passing through a conductor and V is the potential difference between the ends of the conductor having resistance R, then V α I V = R I V R I  Therefore, V R I  = potential differnce electric current where R is a constant and is called electric resistance. The value of R depends upon nature, dimension and temperature of the conductor. V = I R Therefore V I R  If a graph is drawn between current (I) and the potential difference (V) it will be a straight line for a conductor (Fig. 10.5). 10.3 RESISTANCE (R) The opposition to the flow of electric current in an electric circuit is called resistance. Therefore, it is the measure of the difficulty to pass an electric current through the circuit. c V potential difference R I electric urrent   If V is measured in volts and I is measured in amperes then the resistance R is measured in ohms. Symbol: Figure 10.5 Figure 10.4
  • 92. 80 Unit: ohms (Ω) One ohm: 1 v 1 1 olt ohm ampere  Therefore, one ohm is the resistance of conductor in which a current of one ampere flows through it when the potential difference of one volt is maintained between its two ends. Specific Resistance (Definition and Units) The resistance of a conductor depends on following factors; (i) The resistance of a given conductor is directly proportional to its length i.e. R l  ............ (1) ii) The resistance of a given conductor is inversely proportional to its area of cross-section. 1 R A  ........... (2) By combining equation (1) and (2), we get l R A  or l R A   where ρ (rho) is a constant and known as specific resistance or resistivity of the material. The resistivity of a material does not depend on its length or thickness. It depends on the nature of the material. If l = 1 m and A = 1 m2 then from above equation ρ = R Thus resistivity of the material is the resistance of a conductor having unit length and unit area of cross- section. Units: ohm-m (Ωm) Conductivity: It is the degree to which an object conducts electricity. This is the reciprocal of the resistivity,    1 Where, σ is the conductivity and ρ is the resistivity of the conductor. Unit: siemens per metre or mho per metre Conductance (G): It is the reciprocal of the resistance and it is a measure of ease with which the current flows through an object. G = 1 R where G = Conductance R = Resistance Unit: mho
  • 93. 81 10.4 COMBINATION OF RESISTANCES 1. Series combination The resistance are said to be connected in series if the same current passes through all the resistances and the potential difference is different across each resistance. Let three resistances R1, R2, R3 be connected in series as shown in the Fig. 10.6 Figure 10.6 Let V = Voltage applied across the series combination I = Current passing through the circuit Clearly current I is same throughout the circuit Let V1, V2, V3 be the potential difference across R1, R2, R3 respectively. Then, according to Ohm‟s law V = I R where R is the total resistance in series Now V = V1 + V2 + V3 --------------- (1) Then by Ohm‟s law V1 = I R1 V2 = I R2 V3 = I R3 Putting the values of V1, V2 and V3 in equation (1) we get IR = I R1+I R2 +I R3 IR = I (R1 +R2 + R3) R = (R1+R2+ R3) Thus the combined resistances when they are connected in series is the sum total of the individual resistances. 2. Parallel Combination The resistances are said to be connected in parallel if the potential difference across each resistance is the same but the current passing through each resistance is different. Let there be three resistances R1, R2, R3 connected in parallel as shown in Fig. 10.7. One end of each resistance is connected to point A and the other end of each resistance is connected to the point B. V1 V2 V3 V
  • 94. 82 Figure 10.7 Let V = potential difference applied across A and B (same across each resistance) I = total current flowing in the circuit. R = total resistance of the circuit Let I1, I2, I3 be the current passing through the resistances R1, R2, R3 respectively. From Ohm‟s law applied to the whole circuit 1 1 V I R  2 2 V I R  3 3 V I R  Now we have, I = I1+ I2+ I3 ----------------------- ( 2 ) Putting the values of I, I1, I2, I3 in the equation (2) 1 2 3 V V V V R R R R    1 2 3 1 1 1 1 V V R R R R          Or 1 2 3 1 1 1 1 R R R R    Thus we can say that if the resistances are connected in parallel, then the reciprocal of the equivalent resistance is equal to the sum of reciprocals of individual resistances in the circuit. 10.5 HEATING EFFECT OF ELECTRIC CURRENT When an electric current is passed through a conductor, the conductor becomes hot after some time and produces heat. This effect of electric current is called heating effect of current. This happens due to the conversion of some electric energy passing through the conductor into heat energy. The heating effect of current was studied experimentally by Joule in 1941. After doing this experiments, Joule came to the conclusion that the heat produced in a conductor is B A
  • 95. 83 directly proportional to the product of square of current (I2 ), resistance of the conductor (R) and the time (t) for which current is passed. Thus, H = I2 Rt Derivation of Formula To calculate the heat produced in a conductor, consider current I is flowing through a conductor of resistance R for time t. Also consider that the potential difference applied across its two ends is V. Now, total amount of work done in moving a charge q from point A to point B is given by: W = q × V ------------------ (1) Now, we know that charge = current x time or q = I × t and V = I × R (Ohm‟s law) Putting the values of q and V in equation (1), we get W = (I × t) × (I × R) or W = I2 Rt Now, assuming that all the work done is converted into heat energy we can replace symbol of „work done‟ with that of „heat produced‟. So, H = I2 Rt Applications of Heating Effect of Current The heating effect of current is used in various electrical heating appliances such as electric bulb, electric iron, room heaters, geysers, electric fuse etc. 10.6 ELECTRIC POWER Electric power is the rate per unit time at which electric energy is transferred or consumed by an electric circuit. W P t  Or P = V I Where, V is the applied voltage and I is the current flowing through the circuit. SI unit of power is watt (W). Now P = V I If, V = 1 volt (1 V) and I = 1 ampere (1 A), then, P = 1 watt Thus, power is said to be 1 watt, if a potential difference of 1 volt causes 1 ampere of current to flow through the circuit. Bigger units of electric power are kilowatt (kW) and megawatt (MW) 10.7 KIRCHHOFF’S LAWS These two rules are commonly known as: Kirchhoff‟s circuit laws with one of Kirchhoff‟s laws dealing with the current flowing in a closed circuit, Kirchhoff‟s current law (KCL); while the other law deals with the voltage sources present in a closed circuit, Kirchhoff‟s voltage law, (KVL).
  • 96. 84 (i) Kirchhoff’s First Law (Kirchhoff’s Current Law) KCL The law states that “The algebraic sum of all the currents meeting at any junction point in an electric circuit is zero” Σ I = 0 Let us suppose the currents I1, I2, I3 entering the junction are all positives in value and the two currents I4, I5 are leaving the junction are negative in values (Fig. 10.8), then according to KCL I1 + I2 + I3 - I4 - I5 = 0 Or I1 + I2 + I3 = I4 + I5 or Sum of incoming currents = sum of outgoing currents Figure 10.8 (ii) Kirchhoff’s Second Law (Kirchhoff’s Voltage Law) KVL The law states that “In any closed loop of a circuit, the algebraic sum of products of the resistances and currents plus the algebraic sum of all the e.m.f. in that circuit is zero”. In any closed circuit; Σ E + ΣIR = 0 Here we use two sign conventions (Fig. 10.9). 1. If we go from negative terminal of the battery to the positive terminal then there is rise in potential and it is considered positive. And if we go from positive terminal to negative terminal, there is fall of potential and it is considered as negative. 2. If we go with the current, voltage drop is negative and if we go against the current, the voltage drop is positive. In the closed loop ABCD using KVL we get - E2 - IR1 - IR2 + E1 = 0 Solved Numerical Example 1. An source of emf 6 V is connected to a resistive lamp and a current of 2 ampere flows. What is the resistance of lamp? Solution. Given, V = 6 V and I = 2 A From Ohm‟s law, we know, V = I R or R = V/I R = 6/2 = 3Ω Figure 10.9
  • 97. 85 Example 2. An electric fan has a resistance of 100 ohms. It is plugged into potential difference of 220 V. How much current passes through the fan? Solution. Given, R = 100 ohm and V = 220 V We know, I =V/R = 220/100 Therefore I =2.2 A Example 3. Calculate the total resistance, if three resistances of 1 ohm, 2 ohm and 3 ohm are connected in series. Solution. Given, R1 = 1 ohm, R2 = 2 ohm R3 = 3 ohm We know that in series combination; R = R1 + R2 + R3 Therefore R = 1 + 2 + 3 = 6 ohm Example 4. Calculate the total resistance if three resistances of 4 ohm, 1 ohm and 6 ohm are connected in parallel. Solution. Given, R1 = 4 ohm R2 = 1 ohm R3 = 6 ohm Form formula we know in parallel combination 1 2 3 1 1 1 1 R R R R    Hence 1 1 1 1 4 1 6 R    Therefore, total resistance, R 12 17  ohm * * * * * *
  • 98. 86 EXERCISE Fill in the blanks 1) The resistance of the wire is inversely proportional to ................. 2) The formula of specific resistance of a wire is ……………… 3) Product of voltage and current is known as …………. 4) SI unit of electric potential is .................... 5) SI unit of resistance is .......... 6) The reciprocal of conductance is ................... 7) SI unit of specific resistance is .................... Short answer question 1. Define electric current. 2. Define resistance. 3. Define specific resistance. 4. What is conductance? 5. Explain alternating current and direct current. 6. Explain ohm‟s law. 7. Write short note on electric power. 8. Explain Kirchhoff‟s laws. 9. If a wire is stretched to double of its length. What will be the new resistivity? Long Answer type questions 1. Calculate the total resistance when resistances are connected in series and parallel. 2. Explain heating effect of current. Derive the formula for it and what are its applications? 3. a) Three resistors 1 Ω, 2 Ω and 3 Ω are combined in series. What is the total resistance of the combination? b) If the combination is connected to a battery of emf 12 V and negligible internal resistance, obtain the potential drop across each resistor. 4. Differentiate between AC and DC. 5. Explain Kirchhoff‟s law of current (KCL) and Kirchhoff‟s law of voltage (KVL). 6. If the resistance of a circuit is 12Ω and the current of 4 A passes through it calculate the potential difference. [Ans 48 V] 7. Electric fan takes a current of 0.5 amp when operated on a 200 V supply. Find the resistance. [Ans 440 ohm] 8. Current of 0.75 A, when a battery of 1.5 V is connected to wire of 5 m having cross sectional area 2.5 × 10-7 m², what will be the resistivity? 9. Calculate the total resistance when three resistances of 4 ohm, 8 ohm and 12 ohm are connected in series. [ Ans 24 ohm ] 10. Calculate the total resistance when resistances of 2 ohm and 2 ohm are connected in parallel. [ Ans 1 ohm ] 11. Calculate the power generated in a current of 2 A passes through a conductor having a potential difference of 220 V. [ Ans 440 W ]
  • 99. 87 Chapter 11 ELECTROMAGNETISM Learning Objectives: After studying this chapter, students will be able to; - Understand the magnetic field associated with flow of current and related parameters - Classify materials on basis of magnetic properties - Describe magnetic flux and magnetic lines of force 11.1 ELECTROMAGNETISM Electromagnetism or magnetism in general is the study of production of magnetic field when current is passed through a conductor. Various terms associated with magnetism are; Magnetization (I) It represents the extent to which a material is magnetized when placed in a magnetic field. It is given by magnetic moment per unit volume of material. where, M is magnetic moment and V is volume of the material. Unit: ampere/metre Magnetic Intensity (H): It is the capability of magnetic field to magnetize a magnetic material. Magnetic Permeability (μ): It is property of material and defined as the degree to which magnetic lines of force can penetrate the medium. Magnetic susceptibility (χ): It is a property which determines how easily a specimen can be magnetised. It is given by ratio of magnetization and magnetic Intensity. H I   Types of Magnetic Materials: On the basis of behaviour of magnetic material in magnetic field, the materials are divided in to three categories: 1. Diamagnetic materials: The materials when placed in magnetic field, acquire magnetism opposite to the direction of magnetic field (Fig. 11.1). The magnetic dipoles in these substances tend to align opposite to the applied field and tend to repel the external field around it.  Diamagnetic substances have tendency to move from stronger to the weaker magnetic field. V M I 
  • 100. 88  When rod of diamagnetic material is placed in magnetic field, it aligns perpendicular to the magnetic field.  Permeability of diamagnetic material is < 1. Examples; gold, water, mercury, graphite, lead etc Fig 11.1 2. Paramagnetic materials: Paramagnetic substances are those which get weakly magnetized when placed in an external magnetic field (Fig. 11.2). These materials show weak attraction in magnetic field. The magnetic dipoles in the magnetic materials tend to align along the applied magnetic field. Such materials show weak feeble magnetization and the magnetization disappears as soon as the external field is removed.  Permeability of paramagnetic material is > 1.  The magnetization (I) of such materials dependent on the external magnetic field (B) and temperature (T) as: T B C I  Where C is the Curie constant. Examples: sodium, platinum, liquid oxygen, salts of iron and nickel. Fig 11.2 Ferromagnetic materials: Ferromagnetic substances are those which get strongly magnetized when placed in an external magnetic field. They exhibit the strongest attraction in magnetic field. Magnetic dipoles in these materials are arranged into domains.
  • 101. 89 (a) (b) Figure 11.3 These domains are usually randomly oriented as shown in Fig. 11.3 (a) and net magnetism is zero in the absence of magnetic field. When an external field is applied, the domains reorient themselves to reinforce the external field as shown in Fig. 11.3 (b) and produce a strong internal magnetic field that is along the external field. These materials show magnetism on removal of magnetic field. Examples are iron, cobalt, nickel, neodymium and their alloys. These are usually highly ferromagnetic and are used to make permanent magnets. 11.2 MAGNETIC FIELD The space around a magnetic material or a moving electric charge within which the force of magnetism can be experienced. The direction of a magnetic field within a magnet is from south to north and outside the magnet is north to south. Unit: tesla (Wb/m2 ) Figure 11.4 Magnetic lines of force: Curved lines used to represent a magnetic field, drawn such that the number of lines relates to the magnetic field's strength at a given point (Fig. 11.4). Properties of magnetic lines of force (i) The magnetic field lines of a magnet forms continuous closed loops. (ii) The tangent to the field line at a given point represents the direction of the net magnetic field (B) at that point. (iii) Larger the number of field lines crossing per unit area, the stronger is the magnitude of the magnetic field (B).
  • 102. 90 (iv) Their density decreases with increasing distance from the poles. (v) The magnetic field lines do not intersect with each other. (vi) They flow from the South pole to the North pole within a material and North pole to South pole in air. Magnetic flux: The total number of magnetic field lines crossing through given surface area (S) held perpendicular to direction of magnetic field (B).  = B S cos Unit: The SI unit of magnetic flux is the weber (Wb) Magnetic Intensity: It is the amount of magnetic flux in a unit area perpendicular to the direction of magnetic flow. 11.3 ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION The phenomenon of producing an induced e.m.f. in a conductor by changing magnetic flux linked with it is electromagnetic induction. When the speed at which a conductor is moved through a magnetic field is increased, the induced voltage increases and vice versa. Electromagnetic Induction is used in  Electrical motor  Generator to produce AC electricity.  Induction cooker  Metal detector  Inductors and transformers  Induction welding  Inductive charging * * * * * *
  • 103. 91 EXERCISES Fill in the blanks 1) The direction of a magnetic field within a magnet is ........... to .................. 2) When the speed at which a conductor is moved through a magnetic field is increased, the induced voltage ............... (increases/ decreases) 3) Total number of magnetic field lines passing through an area is called ........... 4) Example for para-magnetic materials is ………………… 5) Example for ferro-magnetic materials ………………. Short Answer type question 1. Define magnetic flux and write its unit. 2. Define electromagnetic induction with example 3. Define magnetic field. 4. What is unit of magnetic field? 5. Define magnetic susceptibility? Write applications of electromagnetic induction. . 6. Define magnetic field intensity. 7. What is the relation between magnetization and magnetic field? Long Answer Questions 1. What are magnetic lines of force? Write their properties. 2. Explain type of magnetic materials. 3. Explain ferromagnetic materials with their magnetic domains theory. 4. Explain difference between electric field and magnetic field. 5. Differentiate between paramagnetic and ferromagnetic materials with examples. 6. What is electromagnetic induction? Give its application.
  • 104. 92 Ground State Metastable State Excited State E1 E2 E0 Chapter 12 SEMICONDUCTOR PHYSICS Learning Objectives: After studying this chapter, students should be able to; - Understand concept of energy levels and energy bands in solids, - Describe semiconductor materials, their types and doping, - Explain semiconductor junctions, junction diodes, and transistors, 12.1 ENERGY LEVEL AND ENERGY BANDS Energy Levels: In an atom, electrons cannot revolve in any direction, but are confined to well defined energy states. These states are called energy levels. There are three types of energy levels: 1. Ground level: This refers to the lowest energy state in the system (E0). Thus the completely de-excited atoms would occupy this level. 2. Excited level: any level above the ground state is excited state (E1). The atom can stay in excited state only for 10-8 s. After this time the atom will lose its energy in the form of radiation and come back to ground state. 3. Metastable level: This level (E2) lies in between the excited (E1) and ground levels (E0). Its lifetime is 100 times more than excited state. Energy bands: If two atoms are brought closer to form a solid, the energy levels get modified due to mutual interactions. Each energy level split into two levels, one having energy higher than the original level and another having lower energy.
  • 105. 93 Figure 12.1 Now when a large number of atoms (n) come closer to each other, each energy level splits into a large number of levels. As a result a large number of discrete but closely spaced energy levels are formed. These are called energy bands. The inner shells however remain unaffected by neighbouring atoms, because, they are shielded by the outer electrons of their own atoms. The highest energy band occupied by the valence electrons is called the valence band. Above this band there lies an empty band called the conduction band. These bands are separated by an energy gap known as forbidden gap (Eg) as shown in Fig. 12.1. 12.2 TYPES OF MATERIALS On the basis of the forbidden gap (Eg), the material can be divided into following categories (Fig.12.2). Insulators: These are poor conductors of electricity. Forbidden gap for these materials is Eg = 5 - 9 eV. The energy gap between valence band and conduction band is very large. Hence valence electrons will not be freed and no current will flow. Examples are paper, wood, plastics etc. Figure 12.2
  • 106. 94 Conductors: Metals or good conductors are those substances which can conduct heat and electricity through them easily as there are many free electrons. In case of conductors Eg = 0 i.e. valence band and the conduction band overlap each other. Examples are Copper, Aluminium, Gold etc. Semiconductors: The conductivity of a semiconductor lies between that of conductors and insulators. In case of semiconductors, Eg is of the order of 1 -2 eV. At absolute zero temperature, the conduction band is totally empty and there is no flow of current. So these materials act as insulators at room temperature. But at the higher temperature, some valence electrons acquire sufficient energy to go in the conduction band. So at higher temperatures these materials start working as conductors. Even a small electric field can cause a flow of current in such materials. Examples are Silicon (Si), Germanium (Ge). 12.3 INTRINSIC AND EXTRINSIC SEMICONDUCTORS Intrinsic Semiconductors: A semiconductor, which is quite pure and completely free from any impurity, is called an intrinsic semiconductor. E.g. Silicon (Si) and Germanium (Ge). Figure 12.3 Doping: The process of adding desirable impurity to a semiconductor is called doping and the impurity atoms added are called dopants. Extrinsic Semiconductors A doped semiconductor is called an extrinsic semiconductor. On the basis of doping, semiconductors are of two types n-Type Semiconductor: When a small amount of pentavalent impurity (e.g. Phosphorous, Arsenic etc.) is added to an intrinsic semiconductor (Si or Ge), it provides a large numbers of free electrons. The semiconductor is then, called n-type semiconductor. They have four valence electrons. Each of the four electrons forms covalent bond with neighbouring four atoms. By forming such covalent bonds, there is no free electron at absolute zero temperature. At room temperature some electrons break away from the covalent bond and enter into the conduction band. Each electron leaves behind a vacancy known as hole. Hence in pure semiconductors both electrons and holes constitute current and the numbers of these two types of charge carriers are equal i.e. ne = nh
  • 107. 95 Because impurity atom has five valence electrons, four of these will form covalent bonds, but one excess electron will be left free. Hence the current carriers are electrons. Therefore majority carriers are negatively charge electrons while the holes are minority carriers. In an n-type semiconductor, number of electrons is much larger than the number of holes, i.e. ne>>nh n-type semiconductor p-type semiconductor Figure 12.4 p-Type Semiconductor: When a small amount of trivalent impurity (e.g. Boron, Aluminium etc.) is added to intrinsic semiconductor, it creates a large number of holes in valence band. The semiconductor is called a p-type semiconductor. When a trivalent impurity is added to semiconductor, its three valence electrons form covalent bonds with three neighbouring atoms, while the fourth bond has a deficiency of electron. Thus there is a vacancy, which acts as a hole that tends to accept electrons. The number of holes is greater than the number of electrons, i.e. nh>>ne Hence, in p-type semiconductors, holes are the majority carriers and electrons are the minority carriers. p-n junction Diode A single crystal of silicon or germanium that has been doped in such a way that half of it is a p-type and the other half an n-type semi-conductor is known as a p-n junction diode. The junction is called p-n junction as shown in Fig.12.5. Figure 12.5 p n Vb
  • 108. 96 Characteristics of p-n Junction Diode The graph (Fig. 12.7) showing the variation of the current flowing through the junction, when the voltage is applied across the junction diode in forward biased and reverse biased, is known as characteristic curve of a p-n junction diode. Forward bias characteristic: the p-n junction diode is said to be forward biased if the positive terminal of battery is connected to the p-type and the negative terminal to the n-type of semiconductoras shown in Fig. 12.6. Figure 12.6 Figure 12.7 Reverse bias characteristic: The p-n junction diode is said to be reverse biased if the negative terminal of the external source is connected to the p-type and the positive terminal to the n-type of semiconductor as shown in Fig 12.8. Knee Voltage p n Vb Let V is the voltage applied. This pushes the majority carriers, the holes in the p-type and electrons in the n-type towards the p-n junction. If V > VB, then the majority carriers from both sides are able to diffuse across the junction and a current is set up in the circuit. This process decreases the thickness of the depletion layers. The diode offers a low resistance to the flow of current. A minimum amount of voltage required so that a current start flowing is known as the knee voltage. The current starts following at point A (knee voltage). p n V b Figure 12.8
  • 109. 97 The external voltage pulls the majority carriers holes in the p-type crystal and the electrons in the n-type crystal away from the junction. This increases the width of depletion layer. The diode offers very high resistance and no current is set up across the junction due to majority carriers. However, a small current may be there across the junction due to minority carriers. It is called leakage current (Is). 12.4 DIODE AS A RECTIFIER The rectifier is an electronic device which converts alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC). Half wave rectifier: Half wave rectifier convert AC in to DC for only half of the input cycle. The circuit diagram for half wave rectifier using the p-n diode is as shown. During the first half cycle of AC the diode operates under a forward bias and current flows through the load RL. During the other half, the diode becomes reverse bias and no current flows through the load RL. Thus we get a rectified, unidirectional current across RL and only half of the AC signal wave is rectified. The half wave rectifier gives output only for half cycle, hence power loss is high. Figure 12.9 Full wave rectifier: Full wave rectifier converts AC in to DC for complete cycle of input wave. The circuit diagram for full wave rectifier is shown. The center tap transformer is used. Two diodes are connected across the secondary of the transformer, the middle point of which is tapped at T. During the first half of the AC cycle, one end of the secondary say A becomes positive and B becomes negative. Diode D1 is forward biased and diode D2 is reverse bias. Thus a current flows through the diode D1 and output is obtained across RL. Figure 12.10
  • 110. 98 Now, during the other half of AC cycle, end B becomes positive and the end A becomes negative and the current flows through the diode D2. Thus, during both halves, the current through the load RL is in the same direction and full wave rectification of AC is achieved. 12.5 SEMICONDUCTOR TRANSISTOR The transistor is composed of three semiconductor elements. One type of semiconductor is sandwiched between two types of semiconductors. So, basically transistor is combination of two pn-junctions joined back to back (Fig. 12.11). If n-type semiconductor is sandwiched between two p-type semiconductors, this is known as p-n-p transistor. Figure 12.11 If p-type semiconductor is sandwiched between two n-type semiconductors then this is known as n-p-n transistor. In the circuit symbols of a transistor, only emitter has an arrow to indicate that it is the supplier electrode. It also indicates the direction of flow of current.  The three elements of the transistor are; emitter (E), collector (C) and base (B).  The emitter supplies the majority carriers for transistor current flow. The collector collects current and the base controls the passage of electrons from the emitter to collector.  The doping level in the emitter is more than in the collector.  The base is thin and lightly doped.  Collector is moderately doped.  Area of emitter is moderate, for base is minimum and of collector is maximum.  In normal operation of a transistor, the emitter-base junction is always forward biased whereas the collector-base junction is reverse biased. * * * * * *
  • 111. 99 EXERCISES Fill in the blanks 1) The diode is nonconducting in .............. biased. 2) When the diode current is large, the bias is ..................... 3) The knee voltage of a diode is approximately equal to .................. 4) In an n-p-n transistor, the majority carriers in the emitter are ........... 5) The emitter junction is usually ........................ biased 6) In a p-n-p transistor, the major carriers in the emitter are ................. Short answer Questions 1. What do you mean by energy level? 2. Define energy band. 3. What do you mean by forbidden gap? 4. Explain conduction and valance band in material? 5. Write the unit used for measuring Forbidden gap? 6. What is forbidden gap for Si, Ge? 7. Explain type of material on the basis of Energy band. 8. Differentiate between a conductor and an insulator. 9. Define semiconductor with example 10. Define doping. 11. What are dopants? 12. Explain p- type semiconductors? 13. Explain n- type semiconductors? 14. Define intrinsic semiconductor? 15. Define extrinsic semiconductor? 16. What is p-n junction diode? 17. Define rectifier? 18. Define transistor. 19. What is n-p-n transistor? Draw symbol. 20. What is p-n-p transistor? Draw symbol. 21. A transistor has how many pn junctions? Long answer Questions 1. Distinguish between conductors and semiconductors. 2. What is meant by energy band? How is it formed? 3. What does doping mean? How do we obtain the p and n type semiconductor? 4. What is the difference between intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors? 5. What do you understand by forward biasing and reverse biasing in the operation of a p-n junction diode? 6. Explain transistor? Distinguish between p-n-p and n-p-n transistors. 7. Draw symbols for p-n-p and n-p-n transistors. 8. Write examples of trivalent and pentavalent impurities used as dopant.
  • 112. 100 9. Write difference between p-type and n-type semiconductors? 10. Define conductor, insulator and semiconductor with example. 11. Explain half wave rectifier. 12. Explain in brief about p-n-p and n-p-n transistor 13. Define rectifier? Explain full wave rectifier with a circuit diagram. 14. Explain p-n junction diode? Plot and explain its characteristics.
  • 113. 101 Ground State Meta-stable State Excited State E1 E2 E0 Chapter 13 MODERN PHYSICS Learning objectives: After studying this chapter, the student should be able to; - Understand concepts of Laser, emission processes and lasing conditions; - List laser beam characteristics and engineering applications. - Describe Optical Fibre, its structure, working principle and applications. - Acquire some knowledge about Nanotechnology and its long term applications. 13.1 LASER LASER is an acronym for Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission of Radiation. It is a beam of light which is coherent, monochromatic, highly directional and very intense. Energy Level: In an atom, the electrons are confined to well defined energy states. These states are called as energy level (Fig. 13.1). There are three types of energy levels: 1. Ground level: This refers to the lowest energy state in the system (E0). The completely de-excited atoms would occupy this level. 2. Excited level: Any level above the ground state is excited state (E1). The atom can stay in excited state only for a very short time varying from 10-8 to 10-10 second. After this time the atom will lose its energy in the form of radiations and come back to ground state. 3. Metastable level: This level lies in-between the excited and ground levels (E2). Its lifetime is 100 times more than excited state and atom can stay in this state for a longer time. The Emission Process When a material is energized by some radiations, the atoms of the material get excited to the higher state from ground state. These excited atoms may lose energy and come back to ground state. The energy loss may be in the form of heat, light or X-rays etc. This process may takes place in two ways: Figure 13.1 Energy levels
  • 114. 102 I. Spontaneous Emission: Spontaneous emission is the process of light emission in which the atoms in excited state (E1) comes back to ground state (E0) after 10-8 seconds, without any external radiation(see Fig.13.2).The atoms in excited state, release radiation of energy hν = E1 - E0 in the form of photons. These photons are emitted in random directions. II. Stimulated Emission: E1 E0 Population Inversion: In a material, when the number of atoms in excited state (N2) becomes more than the number of atoms in ground state (N1), this condition is known as population inversion. This condition is must for stimulated emission and hence for Laser emission. Characteristics of Laser Laser light has four unique characteristics that differentiate it from ordinary light: a) Coherence The photons emitted from ordinary light sources have different phases and hence non- coherent. While in Laser all the emitted photons have same phase or constant phase difference. Thus the laser light is highly coherent in nature. Because of this coherence, a large amount of power can be concentrated in a narrow space. b) Monochromatic In laser, all the photons emitted have the same frequency, or wavelength. Hence, the laser light has single wavelength or color. Therefore, laser light covers a very narrow range of frequencies or wavelengths. Hence the light emitted by a laser is highly monochromatic. E1 E0 If excited atom is irradiated with a photon having energy hν = E1 - E0 before spontaneous emission process, then the excited atom will lose the energy in the form of two photon as shown in Fig.13.3. This process occurs in such a way that the incident photon and the emitted photon are found to be moving with same momentum and phase. This kind of emission is called stimulated emission. Figure 13.2 Spontaneous emission process Figure 13.3 Stimulated emission process
  • 115. 103 c) Directionality In ordinary light sources (lamp, torch), photons will travel in random direction. Therefore, these light sources emit light in all directions. But, in laser, all photons will travel in same direction. Therefore, laser emits light only in one direction. This is called directionality of laser light. As a result, a laser beam can travel to long distances without spreading. If an ordinary light travels a distance of 2 km, it spreads to about 2 km in diameter. On the other hand, if a laser light travels a distance of 2 km, it spreads by less than 2 cm. d) High Intensity In laser, the light spreads in small region of space and in a small wavelength range. Hence, laser light has greater intensity when compared to the ordinary light. Even 1 mW laser would appear many thousand times more intense than 100 W ordinary lamp. Applications of Lasers:  Laser welding: Lasers can be used for spot welding, seam welding, inert gas laser welding and welding of non-metals.  Laser cutting: Metals can be cut with output power of atleast 100 W to 500 W. Wide range of materials can be cut e-g. paper, cloth, plywood, glass, ceramics, sheet metal like steel, titanium, aluminium etc.  Laser drilling: Lasers are used for fine drilling  Lasers are used for accurate measurement of the order of 0.1 m to the extent of distant object.  Lasers are used to produce thermonuclear fusion.  These are used to study the chemical process, nature of chemical bonds, structure of molecule and scattering.  Long distance communication by using optical fibre and laser is very efficient.  In medicine, lasers are used to study many biological samples, treatment of lever and to remove tumors.  Laser is used for printing. Laser printers are very fast and efficient. The quality is very high.  In computers, we use laser disc. In CD writer, a tiny laser beam burns spot on the compact disc. 13.2 OPTICAL FIBRE An optical fibre consists of a very thin core made of glass or silica having a radius of the order of micrometers (10-6 m). The core is covered by a thin layer of cladding material of lower refractive index. Such optical fibres can transmit a light beam from one end to the other without significant energy loss. These are generally made from transparent materials such as glass (silica) or glass like polymers. The branch of physics dealing with the propagation of light through optical fibres is known as fibre optics
  • 116. 104 Principle: It is based on the phenomenon of total internal reflections at the glass or silica boundary. The light will reach at other end even if the fibre is bend or twisted. If ray of light travelling from a denser medium into a rarer medium and the angle of incidence is greater than the critical angle, the ray is totally reflected back into the same media. This phenomenon is called as total internal reflection. Fibre Types On the basis of mode of propagation the fibre can be classified as: Monomode fibre: It has a very narrow core of diameter about 8-12 μm or less and the cladding is relatively big 125 μm as shown in Fig. 13.5 (a). As the name implies, monomode fibre sustains only one mode of propagation that is why it is also known as single mode fibre, Multimode fibre: It has a core of relatively large diameter such as 50-200 μm as shown in Fig.13.5 (b). As the name suggests the multimode fibre contain many hundreds of modes of propagation simultaneously. The signals do not intermix with each other. This is most commonly used optical fibre Numerical Aperture (NA): It is the light collecting ability of an optical fiber. It depends on difference in refractive index of core and cladding. Generally, value of NA ranges from 0.1 to 0.5 for most of the commonly used optical fibres. Fig. 13.5 (b) Figure 13.4 Schematic of optical fibre Fig. 13.5 (a)
  • 117. 105 Applications of Optical Fibres:  With the help of light pipes made up of flexible optical fibres, it is possible to examine the inaccessible parts of equipment or of the human body. For example in endoscopy, a patient's stomach can be viewed by inserting one end of a light pipe into the stomach through mouth.  Optical fibres are also used for transmitting and receiving electrical signals that are converted to light by transducers.  These are used as transmission medium to transmit communication signals at high data rates over long distances. For example, more than 100000 telephone signals at data rate of Gigabits/sec can be simultaneously transmitted through a typical single pair of optical fibre.  Optical fibres are also being extensively used for cable TV networks and local area networks (LAN) in premises. The quality of the signals transmitted with optical fibres is much better than other conventional methods. 13.3 NANOTECHNOLOGY It is the branch of technology that deals with use of nanomaterials with dimensions less than 100 nanometres, especially the manipulation of individual atoms and molecules. Nanomaterials: These are materials with any dimension in the nanoscale (1 nm to 100 nm). These materials are very reactive and exhibit unique physical, chemical and biological properties due to high surface-to-volume ratio. Example: Carbon nanotube, nanoparticle, quantum dots, nanoplymers, nanoshell, nanopores,nanorod, nanowires, nanopowder, fullerene, etc. Applications of Nanotechnology Nanomaterials are of interest because of their unique optical, magnetic, electrical, and other properties. These emergent properties have the potential for great impacts in electronics, medicine, and other fields.  Medicine: Nanotechnology based drugs are being used to treat dangerous diseases like cancers and prevent health issues more effectively, as customized nanoparticles can deliver drugs directly to diseased cells in the body. New nanoparticles based chemotherapy drugs that can be delivered directly to cancer cells for better treatment are under development.  Electronics: Electronic devices made with nano-fabrication techniques help in reducing weight and power consumption. This also improves display screens on electronic devices and increasing the density of memory chips. Nanotechnology can help to reduce the size of transistors and other components used in integrated circuits.  Food Industry: Developing new nanomaterials will not only make a difference in the
  • 118. 106 taste of food, but also in improve the food production, nutrient value and preservation.  Fuel Cells: Nanotechnology is being used to reduce the cost of catalysts, used in fuel cells to produce hydrogen ions from fuel such as methanol. Nanomaterials are also being developed to improve the efficiency of membranes used in fuel cells.  Solar Cells: Nanotechnology based solar cells can be manufactured at significantly lower cost with better efficiency as compared to conventional solar cells.  Space: Advancements in development of nano- composites make lightweight spacecrafts. Carbon nano-tubes based cables have been proposed for the space elevators.  Fuels: Nanotechnology can be used for production of fuels from low grade raw materials which are economical and also increase the efficiency of engines.  Catalyst: Nanoparticles have a greater surface area to interact with the reacting chemicals than catalysts made up of larger particles. This allows more chemicals to interact with the catalyst simultaneously and hence makes the catalyst more effective.  Chemical Sensors: Nanotechnology based sensors can detect very small amounts of chemical vapours. Various types of nanostructures such as carbon nano-tubes, Graphene, Zinc oxide nanowires can be used as detecting elements in nanotechnology based sensors.  Fabric: Making composite fabric with nano-sized particles or fibres allows improvement of fabric properties without a significant increase in weight, thickness, or stiffness.  Environment: Nanotechnology is being used in cleaning water and existing pollution, improving manufacturing methods to reduce the generation of new pollution, and making alternative energy sources more cost effective. * * * * * *
  • 119. 107 EXERCISE Fill in the Blanks 1) When number of atoms become more in higher energy levels than lower energy levels, the condition, is called . . . . . . . 2) In laser, the light amplification is achieved due to ................ (spontaneous/stimulated) emission. 3) A multimode step index fibre has a core diameter of range …. 4) For total internal reflection, the angle of incidence is .............. than critical angle 5) The size range of nanoparticles is between ………to .......... nm. Short answer Questions 1. Define energy level. 2. Give full form of LASER. 3. What is principle of laser? 4. What is meant by population inversion? 5. Write working principle of optical fibre? 6. Name the type of optical fibres. 7. What are nanomaterials? Give an example. 8. What is size range of nanomaterial? Long answer Questions 1. Explain the characteristics of laser. Also differentiate between laser beam and ordinary light beam. 2. Describe the two processes of emission of radiations. Also Distinguish between two emission processes. 3. What is the primary requirement to produce laser beam? What are the main properties of laser beam? 4. Write five applications of laser light. 5. Write some uses of optical fibres. 6. Define nanotechnology? Give and explain five applications of nanotechnology
  • 120. 108 Subject: Applied Physics (180013) Assignment – 1 (Section A) Q1: Each Question carries 2 marks. i. Write the SI unit of force, work, energy, pressure and momentum. ii. Write dimensional formula of distance, displacement, density, force, stress, work, momentum, velocity, strain, acceleration, impulse, surface tension, coefficient of viscosity. iii. 1 newton =______dynes. iv. State the principle of homogeneity v. Write cgs units of length, mass and time. vi. Write two advantages of SI units over the earlier systems. vii. Give limitations of method of dimensions. viii. Name the fundamental quantities and write their units. ix. State triangle law and parallelogram law of vector addition. x. What is relation between linear and angular velocity? xi. Define velocity and acceleration xii. Define Impulse with example. 1. Covert 1 joule into erg using dimension analysis. (4) 2. Define vector and scalar quantity, giving examples in each case. (4) 3. Define the terms vector product and scalar product. Write formula. (4) 4. Define force. What is meant by resolution of force? (4) 5. Define momentum. State conservation of liner momentum. (4) 6. Define centripetal and centrifugal force. Write formula (4) 7. State Newton's three laws of motion with example (4) 8. Define angular displacement, angular velocity, angular acceleration, frequency and time period. (8) 9. Define banking of road. Derive an expression for banking of road. (8)
  • 121. 109 Subject: Applied Physics (180013) Assignment – II (Section B) Q1: Each Question carries 2 marks. i. Define power. Write its unit. ii. Define energy and write its unit. iii. Define potential energy. iv. Define work. Give unit of work v. Define stress. Give its SI units. vi. State Hooks law. vii. Define elasticity. Give 2 example of elastic material. viii. Define restoring force and deforming force. ix. Give four example of transformation of Energy. x. Define pressure and write its unit. xi. Define streamline and turbulent flow. xii. What is effect of temperature on surface tension? xiii. What is physical significance of moment of inertia? xiv. Define torque with example. xv. What is Pascal law? 1. State kinetic energy. Find the expression for it. (4) 2. Define strain. Explain its types. (4) 3. Define radius of gyration. Derive expression for it. (4) 4. Define angular momentum. What is conservation of angular momentum? (4) 5. Define moment of inertia with example. (4) 6. Define surface tension and give its unit. Write three applications of surface tension? (4) 7. Define viscosity. What is the effect of temperature on viscosity?. (4) 8. State principle of conservation of energy and prove it for freely falling body. (8) 9. Explain Young's, bulk and shear modulus of elasticity. (8)
  • 122. 110 Subject: Applied Physics (180013) Set -1 Sample paper (Section C) MM: 60 Section A: objective types question. All questions are compulsory. (1X10=10) Question 1 i. SI unit of temperature is ………………….. ii. Heat is transferred in solids by the mode of ………………. iii. SI unit of specific resistance is ……………….. iv. Write Full form of SONAR v. Diamonds shine brightly due to reflection of light.(True/false) vi. A device that converts AC to DC is called ………………….. vii. Resistance of a material is ……………proportional to the area of the conductor. viii. The resistance of a semiconductor ………………………..(increases/decreases) with temperature. ix. Light wave is ……………………..(transverse/longitudinal)in nature. x. The sound wave having frequency greater than 20 kHz are called ………………… Section B: Very short answer type questions. Attempt any five questions. (5X2=10) Question 2 a) Define convection. b) Define coefficient of absorption of sound. c) What is power of lens? Write its unit. d) Define Ohm's law. Write its formula. e) Define electric power. Give its SI unit. f) Define electromagnetic induction with example g) Draw the symbol of pnp and npn transistor. Section C: Short answer type questions. Attempt any six questions. (6X4=24) 3. Define echo and reverberation 4. What is total internal reflection? Write the condition for TIR. 5. Write any four principles of measurement of temperature? 6. Define electric potential and write its formula and unit. (2,1,1). 7. State Kirchhoff‟s laws for electrical network 8. Write four differences between longitudinal and transverse wave. 9. Explain about magnetic lines of force? Write their properties. 10. Explain half wave rectifier. Section D: Long answer type questions. Attempt any two questions. (2x8=16) 11. State and derive Guass law of electrostatics. 12. What is p-n junction diode? Draw and explain its characteristics. 13. (a) Write any four applications of optical fibre. (b) Write the characteristic of LASER
  • 123. 111 Subject: Applied Physics (180013) Set -II Sample paper (Section C) MM: 60 Section A: objective types question. All questions are compulsory. (1X10=10) Question 1 i. SI unit of temperature is ______________. ii. Write full form of S.H.M. iii. Name one application of ultrasonic waves. iv. Device used to see distant objects is called _____________ v. Write SI unit of electric charge. vi. Write formula of electric flux. vii. Frequency of DC is ____________. viii. Give one example of diamagnetic material. ix. Pure semiconductor is also called______. x. Name two parts of optical fiber. Section B: Very short answer type questions. Attempt any five questions. (5X2=10) Question 2 a) Define critical angle in TIR. b) Define cantilever. Write its formula. c) Define capacitance. Write is unit. d) Define specific resistance. Write its unit? e) Define direct and alternating current. f) What is the principle of optical fibre. g) Define extrinsic semiconductor. Section C: Short answer type questions. Attempt any six questions. (6X4=24) 3. What is difference between heat and temperature? 4. Drive the relation between velocity, frequency and wave length of electromagnetic wave. 5. Define microscope and telescope. Write two uses of each. 6. Define nanomaterials and give examples. Write two applications. 7. What are electric lines of force? Write their properties. 8. Define reverberation time. What are the methods to control reverberation time? 9. Explain two types of magnetic materials with examples 10. Write four applications of LASER. Section D: Long answer type questions. Attempt any two questions. (2x8=16) 11. Derive expression for total resistance of resistors connected in (i) Series, (ii) parallel 12. Define rectifier? Explain full wave rectifier with the help of circuit diagram. 13. Name different scales for measuring temperature. Give relation among the scales of temperature.
  • 124. 112 Subject: Applied Physics (180013) Set -III Sample paper (Section C) MM: 60 Section A: objective types question. All questions are compulsory. (1X10=10) Question 1 i. What is noise? ii. Write lens formula iii. SI unit of charge is …………………… iv. SI unit of electric potential is .................... v. What is forbidden gap for Si? vi. Give full form of LASER. vii. The minimum distance of an obstacle for echo to be heard is 16.6 m. (True / False). viii. The size range of nanoparticles is between ………. ix. In an npn transistor, the majority carriers in the emitter are ........... x. Full form of TIR is ................... Section B: Very short answer type questions. Attempt any five questions. (5X2=10) Question 2 a) Define SHM. Give one example. b) A wire has resistance of 64 ohm. What will be its resistance when it is four folded? c) What is heating effect of current? d) Define magnetic flux and write its unit. e) Define refractive index. f) Define electric Energy and write its unit. g) Define magnetic field Section C: Short answer type questions. Attempt any six questions. (6X4=24) 3. State and derive Coulomb law of electrostatics. 4. Define electric field. Derive the electric field due to Point Charge 5. What is free, forced and resonant vibration? Give example. 6. Define reflection and refraction. Write laws for them. 7. Explain in brief about PNP and NPN transistor 8. Define conduction & convection method of heat transfer with examples. 9. What is the difference between p-type and n-type semiconductors? 10. Explain any two applications of ultrasonic wave. Section D: Long answer type questions. Attempt any two questions. (2x8=16) 11. Derive expression for total capacitance of capacitor connected in (i) Series, (ii) parallel. 12. Define displacement, velocity, acceleration, time period and frequency for a particle executing SHM. 13. Define conductors, insulators and semiconductors with example.